10141: -1430-§2 33-12 [rp. |- '™ 9-1430-533-12-1 TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR AND ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR IMPROVED HIGH-POWERED ILLUMINATOR RADAR SET AN/MPQ-46 (x0-1) (IMPROVED HAWK AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM) This copy is a reprint which includes current pages from Changes 1 through 18. cic oN ee) ayce T™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 WARNING RADIATION HAZARD ‘This equipment contains the following radioactive items: Nomenclature NSN Ieotope Amount (Miorocuries) Electron tube TG-67 5960-00-882-9042 * 10 - 2.0 Electron tube 5787WA —5960-00-272-8545 Co 60 0.20 ‘*lsotope and level of activity varies among manufacturers. Refer to TB 48-0116. Refer to TM 3-261, TM 38-260, and TB 43-0116 for information relative to shipping, storage, handling, and disposal of radioactive material. FIRST AID FOR RADIOACTIVE CONTACT ‘The following first aid procedure for wounds caused by anything coated with a radioactive particle material represent the only reasonable first aid treatment which would possibly be available: 4, Stimulation of mild bleeding by normal pressure about the wound and by use of suction cups. Do not suck the wound by mouth. The wound must be washed with soap and flushed with plenty of clear water. ®. If the wound is of the puncture type, or the opening is quite small, an incision should be made to pro- mote free bleeding and to facilitate cleaning and flushing of the wound. ¢, Evacuate patient to a medical facility where monitoring of the wound can be accomplished. All such wounds should be examined by a medical officer. d. For wounds involving the extremities, pending medical attention, place a lightly constricting band (tourniquet) 2 to 4 inches closer to the heart than the site of the wound. The band should be tight enough to halt the flow of blood in superficial blood vessels but not tight enough to stop the pulse (arterial flow). CLEANING SURFACES ON WHICH TUBES HAVE BEEN BROKEN Wet Method. Put on rubber or plastic gloves. Pick up large fragments with forceps then, using a wet cloth, wipe across the area. Make one wipe at a time and fold cloth in half, using the clean side for wiping each time. When cloth becomes too small, discard and start again with a clean piece of cloth, Care must be taken not to rub the radioactive particles into the surface being cleaned by using a back and forth motion. All debris and cloths used for cleaning should be sealed in a container such as a plastic bag, heavy waxed paper, ice cream carton, or glass jar for disposal.cv WARNING FOR RADIO-FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD (FOR HAWK SYSTEMS WITH CWAR AN/MPQ-55) Radio-frequency (rf) radiation from radar antennas and associated equipment is a potential hazard to personnel. Rf radiation is not cumulative but it can be hazardous. It heats the body tissues, and, if the radiation intensity is sufficiently high, will permanently damage the tissue. This damage is not immediatels apparent. Precautions should be taken to insure that personnel are not exposed to rf radiations of hazardous intensity levels. Personnel who must be within the hazardous distances for the below listed radars should be instructe¢ not to place themselves on the radiating side of the antenna, and to never look into a transmitting horn o open waveguide which is connected to an energized transmitter. Personnel are prohibited from entering areas where they may be exposed to levels of rf radiation above 1( milliwatts per square centimeter (10 mw/cm?). This level, though not considered hazardous, is stipulated by AR 40-583 as the maximum permissible exposure level for personnel. A power intensity of at least 10 mw/cm? is present along the axis of each radar’s transmitted beam, for the distances listed below. These distances are based on calculations and actual measurements and may be used as a guide to prevent radio-frequency radiation injury. In each instance, radiation intensity rapidly diminishes as the distance is increased. ANTENNA DISTANCE High-powered Illuminator Radar 111.5 m (366 ft) Cw Acquisition Radar non-scanning 74m (243 ft) scanning 36 m (118 ft) Pulse Acquisition Radar 15.2 m (50 ft) Range-only Radar 45.1 m (148 ft) ‘The 36m distance for the scanning CWAR antenna does not mean the system constitutes a hazard to person- nel while the antenna is scanning. It means that those systems capable of producing power densities greater than 100 mw/cm? when the antenna is stationary must be controlled out to the 100 mw/cm? distance in the event the antenna should stop scanning. No radiation hazard exists at radar ground level if the radars are not depressed below zero degrees elevation. When at all possible during maintenance, however, place the antenna at a high elevation. Personnel are restricted from the area atop the radars or other elevated locations in front of the antennas when radiating. Personnel may move in and around the CWAR to zero range at ground level provided they are below the horizontal center line of the antennas, There is no height restriction to either side or rear of the antennas. Potentially hazardous power density levels do not exist in the radiation field of the improved pulse acquisi- tion radar when scanning. ‘The above information is applicable to typical Hawk sites. The services of the U.S. Army Environmental Hygiene Agency are available, in accordance with the provisions of AR 40-583 for the evaluation of po- tential radio-frequency hazards at sites where unusual operating or site conditions may exist.cis TM 9—1430—533—12. WARNING FOR RADIO-FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD (FOR HAWK SYSTEMS WITH CWAR AN/MPQ.-48) Radio-frequency (rf) radiation from radar antennas and associated equipment is a potential hazard to versonnel. Rf radiation is not cumulative but it can be hazardous. It heats the body tissues, and, if the ‘mdiation intensity is sufficiently high, will permanently damage the tissue. This damage is not immediately apparent. Precautions should be taken to insure that personnel are not exposed to rf radiations of hazardous intensity levels. Personnel who must be within the hazardous distances for the below listed radars should be instructed not to place themselves on the radiating side of the antenna, and to never look into a transmitting horn or open waveguide which is connected to an energized transmitter. Personnel are prohibited from entering areas where they may be exposed to levels of rf radiation above 10 milliwatts per square centimeter (10 mw/cm?). This level, though not considered hazardous, is stipulated by AR 40-583 as the maximum permissible exposure level for personnel. A power intensity of at least 10 mw/cm? is present along the axis of each radar’s transmitted beam, for the distances listed below. These distances are based on calculations and actual measurements and may be used as a guide to prevent radio-frequency radiation injury. In each instance, radiation intensity rapidly diminishes as the distance is increased. ANTENNA DISTANCE High-powered Illuminator Radar 111.5 m (366 ft) Cw Acquisition Radar 20.4 m (67 ft) I Pulse Acquisition Radar 15.2 m (50 ft) Range-only Radar 45.1 m (148 ft) No radiation hazard exists at radar ground level if the radars are not depressed below zero degrees elevation. When at all possible during maintenance, however, place the antenna at a high elevation. Personnel are restricted from the area atop the radars or other elevated locations in front of the antennas when radiating. NOTE Potentially hazardous power density levels do not radars when scanning. in the radiation field of the improved pulse and ew acquisition The above information is applicable to typical HAWK sites. The services of the U.S. Army Environmental Hygiene Agency are available, in accordance with the provisions of AR 40-583 for the evaluation of po- tential radio-frequency hazards at sites where unusual operating or site conditions may exist.™ 9—1430—533—12—1 cre WARNING DANGEROUS VOLTAGE is used in the operation of this equipment DEATH ON CONTACT may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions Never work on electronic equipment unless there is another person nearby who is familiar with the opers. tion and hazards of the equipment and who is competent in administering first aid. When the technician is aided by operators, he must warn them about dangerous areas. Whenever possible, the power supply to the equipment must be shut off before beginning work on the equipment. Take particular care to ground every capacitor likely to hold a dangerous potential. When work- ing inside the equipment, after the power has been turned off, always ground every part before touching it, ‘Use extreme caution when operating equipment protected by interlocks. Insure that interlocks (doors, panels, and drawers) are functioning properly. (TM 9-1425—525—12—4) Be careful not to contact high-voltage connections when installing or operating this equipment. Whenever the nature of the operation permits, keep one hand away from the equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through the vital organs of the body. WARNING } Do not be misled by the term “low voltage."" Potentials as low as 50 volts may cause death under adverse conditions. For artificial respiration, refer to FM 21—11. EXTREMELY DANGEROUS POTENTIALS greater than 500 volts exist in the following units: High-voltage regulator Master oscillator filament power supply Master oscillator power supply Power amplifier filament power supply Power amplifier power supply ‘Transmitter high-voltage power supply test set ‘Transmitter panel 2c7 ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 ) WARNING HIGH NOISE LEVEL WHEN RADAR IS OPERATING When operating, the liquid cooler produces dangerously loud noises. Without protection, long exposure to this noise can cause a hearing loss. Ear protectors must be worn within ten feet of the cooler. See AR 40-5 for additional information. WARNING When the HIPIR is connected to the BCC/PCP, synchro reference is applied to the HIPIR by the BCC/ POP. Therefore, regardless of the HIPIR’s condition, synchro reference will be present within the HIPIR’s circuitry whenever the BCC/PCP is energized. Before performing maintenance on the HIPIR, disconnect all data cables from the off-trailer connector panel. MECHANICAL HAZARD When performing maintenance procedures in the vicinity of the antenna, insure that the antenna PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH, located on the motor-generator assembly, is in the SAFE position. WARNING X-RAY HAZARD X-rays exist within the HIPIR when radiating. ‘The X-rays are emitted from PA klystron tube VA868(V2). Do not operate the HIPIR with the protec- tive tube shield removed from V2. Failure to heed the warning may result in unnecessary exposure to low-level radiation. The severity of this exposure damage is dependent on the proximity of the source (tube) and the length of exposure.TH 9—1430—533—12-1 WARNING DANGEROUS CHEMICALS are used in the operation of this equipment DEATH may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions cr The following is a list of chemicals used in the operation or maintenance of the equipment in this manual, including proper care and handling procedures and corrective actions (fire and first aid procedures). Ham (NSNZAPN) Coolant (6850-00-078-4459/ 5959151) Dielectric coolant fluid OS59 type 3 (1960-00-943-4691, MIL-C-47220) Isopropyl alcohol, technical TT 1785 grade 3 (6810-00-286-5435) Flammable; avoid open flames and sparks. Avoid contact with skin (use rubber gloves). Avoid contact with eyes (use safety goggles). Swallowing can cause damage to the central nervous system and severe kidney damage. Avoid water contamination as mix- ture can become flammable. Excessive high temperature may produce irritating vapors. Avoid prolonged and repeated skin contact. Avoid contact with eyes. Flammable; keep away from open flames. Vapors are toxic and can produce symptoms of intoxication and irrita- tion of eyes, nose, and throat. Avoid contact with skin. Not toxic but may add to the effect of inhala- tion. Swallowing causes severe nausea, vomiting, abdominal pain, bleeding and central nervous system damage. Corrective Actions CO; or dry chemical extinguisher. ‘Wash with water. Flush thoroughly with water. Seek medical attention immediately. Use CO» or dry chemical extinguish- er. Remove vietim to fresh air. Wash thoroughly. Flush thoroughly with water. Get medical attention. Use CO, or dry chemical extinguish- er. Remove to fresh air and give oxygen if short of breath. Get medical atten- tion. Promptly remove soaked clothing and wash skin thoroughly with water. Induce vomiting if victim is consci- ous and alert. If victim is not alert, black coffee and activated charcoal may be given. Never give anything by mouth to a person who is uncon- | scious. Get medical attention.cw tem (NSN/APN) WARNING DANGEROUS CHEMICALS Continued TM 9—1430—533—12—1 (Care and Handing Procedaree Corrective Actions Methanol DM 232 grade A (6810-00-292-9676) Mineral spirits Naphtha TIN 97 TTYIGRA (6810-00-286-3785) Flammable; keep away from heat or open flames. Use in well-ventilated area. Inhala- tion can cause headache, dizziness, weakness, or disturbance of the stomach, intestines or eyes. Avoid prolonged contact with skin, Avoid contact with eyes. Swallowing causes intoxication, drowsiness, visual disturbances (di- lated, unreactive pupils), possible blindness. Flammable. Avoid heat, sparks and open flames. When heated, may yield carbon monoxide. Exces inhalation causes headache, ind nausea. Use with adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged or repeated contact. with skin. Avoid contact with eyes. Flammable. Avoid open flames or flames or sparks. Use in well-ventilated area. Avoid contact with skin. Wear pro- tective clothing (rubber gloves, apron, and safety goggles). Avoid contact with eyes. Do not wear contact lenses; use safety goggles. Avoid swallowing. Use CO; or dry chemical extinguish- er. Remove victim to fresh air. If not breathing, use artificial respiration. Get medical attention. Keep warm and cover eyes to exclude light. Wash with water. Wash thoroughly with water. Get medical attention. Immediately induce vomiting and seek medi attention. Do not in- duce vomiting in an unconscious vie- tim. Remove victim to fresh air and get medical attention. Apply artificial respiration if necessary. Wash with mild soap and water and apply skin cream. Flush thoroughly with water. Get medical attention. Use CO; o dry chemical extinguish- er. Remove victim to fresh air. If breathing has stopped, perform arti- ficial respiration. Get medical atten- tion. Wash skin with soap or mild deter- gent and water. If irritation persists after washing, get medical attention. Wash thoroughly with water. Get medical attention. Do not induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.1 9—1430—533—12-1 WARNING DANGEROUS CHEMICALS Continued cv Hem (NSN/APN) Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) (contained in General Electric and Electrical Utilities capacitors located in the liquid cooler) (5910-00-675-4503/9175280) Toluene OC265 (6810-00-257-2487) Corrective Action When heated, vapors are highly tox- ic. Do not allow capacitors to become overheated. Replace any capacitors that show signs of excessive swelling or leaking. Avoid contact with eyes. Do not wear contact lenses when working with this material. Avoid contact with skin. Excessive inhalation or swallowing can cause nausea, vomiting, loss of weight, liver damage and abdominal pain, When liver damage is severe, it can be fatal. If material leaks or vaporizes, per- sons in the area should wear protec- tive clothing (paper suits, gloves, disposable booties, organic respira- tors) when disposing of contami- nants. Flammable; keep away from open flames. Vapors harmful. Use in well- ventilated area. Avoid prolonged contact with skin, Avoid contact with eyes. Avoid swallowing. Remove to fresh air and give oxyger if short of breath. If breathing ha: stopped, perform artificial respira tion. Keep the victim warm. Ge: medical attention. Wash thoroughly with water. Get medical atention. Wash with soap or mild detergent and water. Remove contaminated clothing. Get medical attention. Get medical attention immediately. If swallowed, induce vomiting. Do not induce vomiting in an uncon- scious vietim. Remove all ignition sources. Venti- late the area. If solid material is present, sweep onto paper or other suitable material and burn in a safe place. If in a liquid form, absorb on paper towels. Evaporate in a safe place, then burn. PCB material can also be disposed of in an approved hazardous waste location. Use CO, or dry chemical extinguish- er. Remove to fresh air. Wash thoroughly with water. Flush with water for at least 15 minutes. Get medical attention, Get medical attention immediately. If swallowed, induce vomiting. Do not induce vomiting in an uncon- scious victim.<17 TM 9—1430—533—12—1 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL HEADQUARTERS 4 WASHINGTON, D.C. 1 September 1972 No. 9—1430—533—12—-1 | OPERATOR AND ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR HIGH-POWERED ILLUMINATOR RADAR SET AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) (HAWK AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM) REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) direct to: Commander, U.S. Army Missile Command, ATTN: DRSMI-SNPM, Redstone Arsenal, Alabama 35898. A reply will be furnished to you. TABLE OF CONTENTS Parneraph Page CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION Section 1. General 1-142 Ma Tl, Description and data 15-19 12 CHAPTER 2 _ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Section I. _ Controls and indicators 24,22 a Il, Operation under usual conditions 225 II. Operation under unusual conditions ..... 25-29 225 CHAPTER 3. PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS Section I._ Daily check procedures .. a a IL. Preventive maintenance services 82-37 345 IIL. Operational checks 38-314 Bat TIL1, Alinement procedures EDtel 3.87 TIL2. Silent mode system redeployment check .... 314.2,8:143 31064 IV. Ilustrations 315 e107 CHAPTER 4. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS, Section tools, and equipment 41-48 a 1. eneral 481,482 “a m. ipt of the HIPIR 433,434 42 W. 44,465 aan V. Maintenance services 46-418 421 CHAPTER 5. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 51-520 51 6. PREPARATION FOR TRAVEL Section 1. General 61-68 61 IL, Methods of transportation 64,65 e1 IIL. Preparation for travel ...... 66-69 65TM 9—1430—533—12—1 CHAPTER Section CHAPTER Section CHAPTER APPENDIX INDEX 1 Ommpopr es Shree an EMPLACEMENT PROCEDURES General Emplacement of the HIPIR ORIENTING AND ALINING HAWK battery (BCC AN/TEW-8 ores AFU (PCP AN/MSW-11) HAWK battery (BCC AN/TSW-11) .... AFU (PCP AN/MBW-13, -14) ‘Azimuth mil ring ... LIGHTNING PROTECTION REPERENCES «coo MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART NOMENCLATURE AND REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ..... ‘SERIAL NUMBER EFFECTIVITY CODE ‘SIMULATOR CONTROL GROUP SIGNAL CROSS REFERENCE BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST ........ ‘MINOR ALTERATIONS 14,12 13-09 e189 810 — 8.18 819-827 8-28 — 8.96 887 — 8.40 s1-98 cw Ga Index-1cw ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Section |. GENERAL 1-1. Scope maintenance of high-powered illuminator radar @. This technical manual (TM) contains AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) (HIPIR) (fig. 1-1). instructions for operator and organizational — um 64617 6. This TM is one of a series of TM's on opera- tion, assembly and emplacement, organizational maintenance, direct and general support, and depot maintenance of the HAWK airdefense guided-missile system. ¢, The requirement for nomenclature distinction between “Basic and Improved” HAWK Systems and major items is no longer applicable. Action to delete this distinctive terminology will be taken as the respective pages of this manual are changed for other reasons. 1.2. Destruction of Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use Destruction of materiel to prevent enemy use will be undertaken by the user upon order of the unit commander. His decision will be based upon orders and policies established by the Army Com- mander. Procedures for destruction of the HIPIR and related materiel are contained in TM 43— 0002-24. 1-3. Travel Preparation, Emplacement, Alinement, and Lightning Protection Complete instructions for preparation for travel, emplacement, orientation and alinement, and light- ning protection of the HIPIR are contained in chapters 6 through 9. 1—Radar transmitter (30A1A1) 2-Motor-generator assembly (30A1A5) ‘38—Radar set group (30A1A4) ‘4—Main power distribution box (30A1A6) 5—Liquid cooler (30A1A2) 6—Input voltage adjust assembly (30A1A8) ‘Antenna receiver group (30A1A3) 8Dummy load(30A1A7) Figure 1-1. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) —major groups and assemblies.T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 1-4, Forms, Records, and Reports For the forms, records, and reports required of units maintaining this equipment, refer to TM 38750. 14.1. Hand Receipts Hand receipts for Components of End Items (COEI), Basic Issue Items (BII), and Additional Authorization List (AAL) items are published in Hand Receipt Manuals, TM 9—1425-525—-10-HR_ and TM 9-1425—1525—10—HR. These manuals are published to aid in property accountability and are available through: Commander, U.S. Army Ad- jutant General Publications Center, ATTN: AGDL-OD, 1655 Woodson Road, St. Louis, MO 68114, Section Il. 1-5. Physical Description NoTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 1-1 @. General. The HIPIR consists of eight major groups and assemblies: radar transmitter (1), motor- Transmitter panel 1 2—Transmitter panel 2 3—Transmitter panel 3 4—Radar tranamitter subassembly 5—High and low frequency amplifier 6—Degeneration IF amplifier cv 1-4.2. Reporting Equipment Imy Recommendations (EIR’s) If your HAWK equipment needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us what you don't like about your equipment. Let us know why you don’t like the design or performance. Put it on an SF 368 (Quality Deficiency Report). Instructions for preparing EETR’s are provided in TM 38-750, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS). EIR’s should be mailed directly to Commander, US Army Missile Command, ATTN: DRSMI-SNEM, Redstone Arse- nal, Alabama 35898. A reply will be sent directly to you. DESCRIPTION AND DATA generator assembly (2), radar set group (8), main power distribution box (4), liquid cooler (6), input voltage adjust assembly (6), antenna receiver group (7), and dummy load (8). . Radar Tran transmitter contains itter (Fig. 1-2). The radar number of racks and panels ‘7—Bridge nulling amplifier and cavity tuner 8 Monitor amplifier 9—Range and coding amplifier oscillator 10—Transmitter klystron tuning control amplifier, L1—Tranamitter test set 12— Transmitter low-voltage power supply Figure 1-2, Radar transmitter—cover removed.cw ‘consisting of one or more units or components. A watertight door, covering the front of the cabinet, Provides access to the operating controls and elec- tronic units. The door opens upward and can be locked to provide protection from the weather during Jocal operation or maintenance. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 1-2. (1) Transmitter panel 1. Transmitter panel 1 (1) is a hinged panel containing power cireuit breakers, ‘switches, indicator lamps, meters, and controls used in monitoring and controlling the operation of the transmitter, liquid cooler, and interlock test. The panel opens to the left and provides access to the high-voltage power supply, transmitter contactor TM 9—1430—$33—12-1 relay assembly, line voltage regulator, and the high- voltage power supply test set. A blower, behind transmitter panel 1, provides cooling for the units behind the transmitter panels. (2) Transmitter panel 2. Transmitter panel 2 (2) is a hinged panel containing meters, switches, and controls for controlling and monitoring the operation of the transmitter. The panel opens to the right and provides access to the high-voltage power supply, high-voltage regulator, and the ripple sensing unit. (3) Transmitter panel 3. Transmitter panel 3 (3) is hinged panel containing meters, switches, and controls for controlling and monitoring the operation of the transmitter and the transmitter low-voltage power supply. The panel opens to the right to provide ‘access to the rf transmitter assembly, ferrite switch control and power supply, and the temperature and flow control switch. 12d(4) Radar transmitter subassembly. The radar transmitter subassembly (4) contains the various Plug-in units (5 through 10) to control the operation of the transmitter. An air cooler installed directly behind the radar transmitter subassembly cools the plug-in-units, the high-voltage regulators, and the transmitter low-voltage power supply (12), The transmitter test set (11) and the transmitter low- voltage power supply are mounted beneath the radar transmitter subassembly. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 1-8, unless otherwise indicated. ¢. Liquid Cooler (Fig. 1-8). The liquid cooler provides cooling to the components in the transmitter ‘group. A watertight door, covering the entire front of the cabinet, opens upward and locks to provide access to the components (1 through 7) for maintenance. During operation, the air intake cover must be kept open at all times. An air exhaust door on the rear of the cabinet provides access to the exhaust-air filter, and must be kept open at all times during operation. Opening both the air intake cover and the liquid cooler door introduces mechanical ‘MI 64619 1—Indicator valve knob 2 Reservoir 8—Sight gate 4—Capacitor assembly S—Airintake filter 6—Heat exchanger ‘7—Liguid filter Figure 1-8. Liquid cooler—door opened. TM 9—1430—533—12—1 interference with the rotation of the anten- na and could damage the equipment. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 1-4 unless otherwise indicated. d. Antenna Receiver Group (Fig. 1-4). The antenna receiver group consists of the antenna pedestal (16), radar transmitting antenna (1), and the radar receiving antenna (5) mounted to the center of the platform. (1) Antenna pedestal, The pedestal houses the azimuth drive and gear assemblies, synchro assembljes, torque tube and slipring assemblies, and the blower assembly. Access covers and plates on the pedestal are removable for maintenance. The pedestal also serves as an inclosure through which rf energy and electronic data are delivered to and received from the radar set group and radar transmitting antenna to the receiver and transmitter. The elevation head (10) sits on top of the antenna pedestal (16). Two spirit levels (13) mounted on the elevation head are used in leveling the IHIPIR. ‘Access covers (12) provide access to the motor, gear assemblies, and synchro assemblies used to elevate or depress the antenna, Stow locks (11 and 14) are provided to lock the antenna in elevation and azimuth. (2) Transmitting antenna. The radar transmit- ting antenna (1) is a parabolic reflector-type antenna with a transmitting feed system consisting of two radiating elements: a transmitting waveguide and a transmitting horn. (3) Transmitter housing. The transmitter housing (fig. 1-5) contains the transmitter waveguide assembly, rf noise calibrator, simulator control group, radar signal simulator group, a portion of the transmitter feed, and the sighting scope. (4) Receiving antenna. The receiving antenna (5) consists of a parabolic reflector-type antenna assembly and a housing which incloses the receiver components and plug-in units. The radar receiving antenna consists of a side lobe horn (7), cassegrain grid (8), reflector (9), and a nutating receiver horn (6). The nutating receiver horn is part of the nutating scanner assembly mounted through the rear receiver housing. A nutating scanner motor speed control, used in conjunction with a saturable reactor, main- tains the motor at a constant speed. (5) Receiver housing. The receiver housing con tains the units and the components shown in figure 1- 6. ¢. Radar Set Group (Fig. 1-7). The radar set group contains a number of drawers, racks, and panels, each of which contains one or more components or plug-in 13TM 9—1430—533—12—1 4 , - Mi 64620 1—Radar transmitter antenna 10—Elevation head 2—Transmitter horn 11—Elevation STOW lock 3Transmitting waveguide 12— Access cover 4—Tranamitting reflector 18—-Spirit level ‘5_Radar receiving antenna 14—Atimuth STOW lock 6—Nutating receiver horn 15—Access cover ‘1—Side lobe horn 16— Antenna pedestal 8-Camsegrain grid 17—Azimuth indicator seale 9—Receiver reflector Figure 1-4. Antenna receiver group. 1—Telescope bracket 2—Transmitter waveguide assembly 3-RE noise calibrator 4~Simulator control group J1 5—Simulator control group 6—Telescope storage box ‘7—Simulator control group J2 ‘8—Radar signal simulator group 7 MI 64621A 9—Transmitter feed Figure 1-5. Transmitter housing — cover removed. cunits, A watertight door, covering the entire front of the cabinet, provides access to the operating controls and electronic units. The door opens upward and is locked open to provide protection from the weather during local operation or maintenance. When the door is closed, the equipment is automatically placed in the remote mode of operation. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 1-7. (1) Power supply drawer. The 300-, 90-, 28-vde power supply and test set group (1), when opened, provides access to the radar set group test set and the 300-, 90-, 28-vde power supply assemblies. The test set used to monitor important signals in each of the electronic consoles. The power supply develops and distributes the necessary controlling and energizing voltages for the IHIPIR. (2) Target intercept computer. The target in- tercept computer is divided into two drawers: the range and azimuth drawer (2), and the elevation and time-of-flight drawer (3). The range and azimuth drawer contains the range and azimuth control amplifier, the range and azimuth computer, and the range interlock computer. The elevation and time-of- flight drawer contains the comparator and minimum elevation cutout, the elevation and time-of-flight computer, and the elevation and time-of-flight con- trol amplifier. The target intercept computer generates lead angle commands that are fed to the improved launcher (ILCHR) just prior to missile launch to aim the missiles on the ILCHR boom at the shortest possible trajectory. The target intercept computer also determines when the target is in range and indicates this to the improved battery control central (IBCC). . (8) 100-, £50-, £12.6-vde power supply drawer. This drawer (9) contains the 100-, +50-, +£12.6-vde power supplies and the communications station. The power supplies provide low voltages for the solid state circuitry in the radar set group and the antenna receiver group. The communications station provides communications between majot items within the battery. (4) Control-indicator panel. The control- indicator panel (11) is a hinged panel’ containing ‘switches, indicators, and meters for controlling and monitoring the operation of the IHIPIR and its antenna system. The panel may be lowered on its hinges during operation and maintenance to provide access to a 6.3-vde power supply in radars *(N)' or two 6.3-vde power supplies in radars *(M)' and the forced sir cooling system for the radar set group. (5) 6.3-Vde power supply. In radars *(N)', the rack located behind the control-indicator panel contains a 6.3-vde power supply. This power supply ——— Refer to appendix D for serial number effectivity. TM 9—1430—533—12—1 generates filament voltages for both the radar set group and radar receiver. In radars *(M)' , the rack behind the control-indicator panel contains two identical power supplies. The left-hand 6.3-vde power supply generates the filament voltages for the radar set group. The right-hand power supply generates the filament voltages for the radar re- ceiver. The rack may be rolled part way out for ‘access during maintenance. The power supplies can be disconnected for complete removal. (6) Main fuse panel. The main fuse panel (4) is a hinged panel containing indicator fuses, power circuit breakers, a doppler speaker, a speaker volume con- trol, a remote synchro reference indicator, an equip- ment time meter, and convenience outlets. During maintenance, the panel may be lowered to provide access to the contactor rack, the secant elevation amplifier, and the radar set group contactor relay assembly. (1) Forced air cooling system, The forced air cooling system for the radar set group consists of a blower motor, an air-intake filter, a series of sir duets, and two exhaust filters located at each end of the radar set group. The purpose of the system is to cool the components and plug-in unite in the radarset group to prevent damage from overheating. (8) Radar et control drawer. The radar set control drawer (5) contains the radar set control unit and a ground speed computer. The radar set control controls the mode of local operation on the radar antenna circuits and acts as a relay assembly for ‘moat of the automatic tracking circuitry. The ground speed computer develops ground speed information and supplies this information to the speed indicator in the IBCC. (9) Antenna control drawer. The antenna con- trol drawer (6) contains two plug-in units, the azimuth control amplifier, and the elevation control amplifier. These units contro! the movement of the antenna, The drawer may be pulled out to provide ‘access to the amplifiers during maintenance or opera- tion. (10) Tracking computer drawer. The tracking computer drawer (7) contains two plug-in units: tracker 1 and tracker 2. The drawer may be pulled out during maintenance or operation to provide access to the units. These trackers work in conjunction to form the speedgate system. The speedgate develops target range information for the IBCC and target intercept, computer, antenna positioning information for the antenna control circuits, and doppler spectrum infor- mation and target radial velocity for the IBCC. The speedgate accepts automatic and manual commands from the IBCC to control its modes of operation. (11) -100-, 150-, 250-vde power supply. Thi power supply (12) generates and distributes low voltages to the radar set group and the antenna receiver group.TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 Figure 1-6. Receiver housing—cover removed. ,Google1_Nutating seanner motor speed control 2-Dual-doppler amplifier ‘3-Receiver klystron tuning control amplifier 4—Dual approach-recede network amplifier ‘5 Ferrite modulator driver amplifier #1 ‘6—Triple IF amplifier ‘1—Nutating scanner assembly ‘8_Receiver IF signal generator ‘9_Noise generator TM 91430533121 10—Range delay mixer 11—Local oeeillator assembly 12—Delay line awiteh 18_Wavequide awiteh 14Frequency converter 15—Delay line assembly 16—Receiver test set 17—Signal comparator 18—Perrite modulator driver amplifier #2 Figwre 1-6 Continued. 4 | sesss [seeee poresssel| Sante | i ico 1 1-800-, 90-, 28-vde power supply and test set group ‘&-Right-hand subordinate distribution box. 9-100, 450, £12.6-rde power supply ‘2Target intercept computer—range and azimuth drawer ‘3~Target intercept computer—elevation and time-of-flight drawer 10—Communications module 4-Main fuse panel 11—Control-indieator panel 5—Radar set control drawer 12-100, 160, 250-vde power supply @—Antenna control drawer 18 Left-hand subordinate distribution box ‘7—Tracking computer drawer Figure 1-7. Radar vet oroup—door removed. Ww™ 91430533121 J, Motor-Generator Assembly (Fig. 1-8). The motor-generator provides armature voltages for the ‘azimuth and elevation drive motors. The case has an air inlet-outlet door to provide ventilation, a pressure equalizer valve, and the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH. A hinged cover provides access to the motor-generator for maintenance. 9. Main Power Distribution Box (Fig. 1-9). The main power distribution box monitors the phasing and controls the main power input from the power generator. It contains a PHASE LIGHT lamp (1) and a main power switch (2). 1-6. Functional Description The IHIPIR beams rf energy into space to illuminate a target. The radar then locks on the reflected energy to automatically track the target in azimuth, elevation, speed, and range. The IHIPIR provides the necessary information to aim the ILCHR 0 that the miseile can home on the reflected energy from the target and intercept it. For additional functional description, refer to TM 9—1430—583—12—2, 1-7. Date This paragraph contains physical data for the IHIPIR. Operating data is provided in TM 9-1425—525 and TM 9-1425-1525. . Rader. Overall length (travel condition) Overall width (travel condition) Overall height (travel condition) 15ft7in. sft 10ft9 in. p Mi 64624 1—Motor-generator case 2—Motor-generator_ —PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH ‘4—Air inlet-outlet door ‘5Preasure equalizer valve Figure 1.8. Motor-generator assembly —door opened. 18 cw 1_PHASE LIGHT lamp 2_Main power awiteh Figure 1-9. Main power distribution baz. ‘Total weight of IHIPIR mounted on M390 trailer Maximum slope emplacemen Diameter of circle of emplacement ‘b. Antenna, Reflector-type Reflector diameter . Mechanical limits: Azimuth Elevation. Electrical limits: -Air-over hydraulic 1-8. Differences Among Models Any differences among models that exist in this equipment are indicated in the text and on diagrams by the use of the serial number effectivity code. This code is given in appendix D.1-9. Modification Work Orders Table 1-1 lists all modification work orders (MWO's) affecting the IHIPIR. The table includes the ‘MWO number, description, and effectivity. ‘TH 91490533121 Note ‘MWO’s are listed in this manual for information only. ‘This manval is not an authority for requisitioning kita. The published MWO, or a change thereto, ia the only authority for requisitioning MWO kite, Table 1-1. Modification Work Orders wo Deseription 9-1425-625-50-1 | Replaces communication station transistor volt- ‘age regulator with a zener voltage regulator. 9-1425-625-50-2 | Replaces communications station zener voltage regulator. 9-1425-625-60-10 | Adds protective cover 10292503 to 300-, 90:, ‘28-vde power supply to eliminate safety hazard. 9-1430-638-50-2 | Redesign of dual doppler amplifier to correct for loes of video and increase the blanking rate capability. 9-1480-683-50-3 | Relocates RGS in receiver text eet. 9-1480-533-50-4 9-1480-583-50-5 9-1480-583-50-6 9-1430-533—50-7 9-1430-583-50-8 9-1430-538-50-9 9-1480-533-50-10 9-1430-538-50-11 9-1490~683-60-12 9-1430-633-50-13, 9-1430-533-60-14 Drills holes in radar set group low-voltage power supply cover. ‘Adds safety covers 10288274, 10288275, and ‘10678092 over terminal board and transformer terminals, Replaces two 6.3-vde power supplies 10045530 with one 6.3-vde power supply 10288265. ‘Replaces radar set contro! 10182182 with radar ‘eet control 10288136. Replaces simulator control group 10675319 ‘with simulator control group 10288696, ‘Adds ferrite suppressors to tracker 1 to elimi- nate high frequency oscillations. Replaces liguid level sensing diodes in the A5 module of the high-voltage power supply with a toggle switch. Replaces TOJ logic module A20 10675417 in tracker 2 with a new A20 module 10288821. Removes wire between A3TB6-10 and ASTB7-9 in the radar set group to eliminate a 6.3-vde ground loop. Replaces circuit cards A19 (10182977) and ‘AB (10182978) in tracker 1 with new circuit ecards A19 (10292571) and Ab (10292573) to correct failure of the side lobe lock inhibit function due to unwanted oscillation and harmonics. ‘Adds ground strap to radar set group blower motor shock mount. Ettectivty ‘Communications stations 10677377. ‘Communications 10288711. stations 10677877 and Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182551 with ‘serial numbers 276001 through 480122. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182661 with serial numbers 275001 through 300018. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182651 with serial numbers 276001 through 300086, Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with ‘serial numbers 276001 through 300036, Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with ‘serial numbers 275001 through 800036, Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with serial numbers 275001 through 300036. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182661 with serial numbers 275001 through 300036. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182661 with serial numbers 275001 through 300036. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182661 with serial numbers 276001 through 300036, Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182661 with serial numbers 275001 through 380000, 380009 through 390000 and 390014 through 400000. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182661 with serial numbers 276001 through 380000 and certain radars in the range of 380001 through 400000. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182661 with serial numbers 275001 through 380000. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with serial numbers 275001 through 430000. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182661 with serial numbers 275001 through 430000. i)‘Tm 91490533121 es Table 1-1, Modification Work Orders — Continued wo Desert Eetectivty 9-1480-538-50-15 9-1480-633-50-16 9-1430-633-50-17 9-1430-533-60-18 9-1430-533-50-19 9—140—583— 50-20 9—1480—588—50—21 | 9-1430-633-50-22 9-1430—583-60-23 9-1430—533-60-24 l 9-1420-633-50-25, Changes wiring in tracker 2 to suppress oscil- lation present on video output of module AS which cause an out-of-focus display on the Acscope in the IBCC, and to enable the use of new A17 module 10292709, Changes wiring in dual doppler amplifier to ‘eliminate blocking of output following BITE tests and to eliminate failure of semicondue- tor in modules A3, A13, and A20 caused by accidental shorting of terminal during troubleshooting. Raises terminal boards TB2 and TBS off floor of transmitter group housing and adds protec tive cover to prevent shorting of 28 vde to ound caused by spillage of ethylene glycol. ‘Adds insulating strips to Inside of bottom ‘cover on tracker 1 and tracker 2 to prevent shorting of modules to cover. ‘Adda protective cover to 6.3 vde power supply to prevent damage to transistors. Removes reconstituted doppler shield from ‘AIZTB1-4 and connected to A12J6-M to elimi- nate ground loop existing between tracker 1 and tracker 2 Changes value of C5 in secant amplifier chassis ‘to prevent the radar from losing azimuth angle tracking and switeh to coast condition at the IBCC Fire Control Console. ‘Adds two zener diodes in the power distribution ‘panel to eliminate transients, to protect the IF spectrum analyzer AS module. |Add zener diode to the monitor amplifier: ‘parent board, at the input to the HOJ enable ‘amplifier Al, to protect the input circuit HY1 from volume transient. [Adds filtering components to the tracker I ‘parent board to prevent transients from pro- ducing a false break lock command that places tracker in a memory status. Installs an x-ray shield on PA klystron tube V2 to reduce pomible radiation hazard. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with ‘serial numbers 276001 through 460312. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with, ‘serial numbers 276001 through 480122. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with ‘serial numbers 275001 through 480122. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with ‘terial numbers 275001 through 470437. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10162651 with ‘serial numbers 276001 through 490284. Radar set AN/MPQ46 (XO-1) 10182551 with serial numbers 276001 through 490234. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) 10182561 with serial numbers 276001 through 490234. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (X0-1) 10182561 with ‘serial numbers 276001 through 620885. Radar sot AN/MPQ-46 (X0-1) 10182551 with ‘serial numbers 275001 through 620885. Radar set AN/MPQ-46 (X0-1) 10182561 with ‘serial numbers 276001 through 680283. Radar sot AN/MPQ-46 (X0-1) 10182661 with ‘terial numbers 275001 through 520246,TM 9—1430—533—12—1 CHAPTER 2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Section |. CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 2-1. General ‘This section provides information concerning the controls and indicators of the IHIPIR. 2-2, Controls and Indicators The controls and indicators are listed in tabular form in tables 2-1 through 2-14, and are shown in figures 2-1 through 2-14. Placarded items are in- dicated by upper case letters. 40: un 1 rh ea ] 8 ons Ogee am | [unedraeo ne roger corm ~ ‘ Ly Jt is ‘ VW Figure 2-1. Control-indicator panel—controls and indicators. Table 2-1. Control-Indicator Panel— Controls and Indicators (Fy. 210 SERVO FIELD CURRENT meters ELEVATION mil indicator aial ance Indicates azimuth or elevation motor-generator field current. Indicates in hundreds of mile the elevation angle commanded by the clevation handsheel aTM9—1430—$33—12—1 Table #1. Controt-Indicator Panel—Controls and Indicatorn (Fig. 2-1)—Continued Ker Conte rate Pesce 3 | LOCK lamp ‘When illuminated, indicates lock on target or aynthetic lock. 4 | SIGNAL STRENGTH meter Provides a measure of signal strength return from target 5 | Lockawiteh LOCK HOLD — Places the IHIPIR in synthetic lock for test purposes. NORMAL — Permits normal operation in acquiring and locking on target. LOCK DISABLE — Prohibits speedgate system lock on any signal. For test purposes only. 6 | SPECIAL LOCK lamp ‘When illuminated, indicates special lock circuitry is enabled. 7 | MEMORY lamp When illuminated, indicates lock is lost and the IHIPIR is in the memory mode of operation. 8 | TARGET SPEED meter Indicates radial speed of target. 9 | AZIMUTH mil indicator dial Indicates in hundfeds of mils the azimuth angle commanded by the ‘asimuth handwheel. 10 | NOISE meter Monitors am or fm transmitter noise depending on position of NOISE. selector switch, 1 | NOBewiteh Selects am or fm transmitter noise for monitoring on NOISE meter. (Spring-loaded to the fm position.) 12 | RFPOWEROUTPUT meter tora rf power output fromthe tranamitter. 18 | INTERLOCK TEST switeh Position Group Function 1 OFF 2 1 Auxiliary 28¢ 3 2 Lhsubjunction box 4 3 +800 and console pe 5 4 Pedestal lvpe RSG control Monitor panel and fuse panel 6 5 Lhexhauat and eh ‘exhaust air intake 14 | INTERLOCK TEST lamp ‘When illuminated, indicates closed interlocks for the INTERLOCK ‘TEST switch position. 15 | RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter Indicates measurement of rectiver functions selected by receiver functions selector switch. 16 | FINE-ADS pushbutton Provides fine adjustment ofthe range phase signal 17 | Receiver functions soletor switch ‘Selects RANGE NULL, REP LEVEL, SIDE LOBE, or MAIN FEED, 18 | Asimuth handwhee! Permits positioning ofthe antenna in azimuth, 19 | ADP/HPLewiteh in procensed by the target intereept IPL — IHUPER target information processed by the taruet intercept computer. 20 | TEST LOCAL/REMOTE switch ‘TEST LOCAL — Enables lal test commands to the speedate and signal comparator.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table #1. Control-Indicator Panel—Controls and Indicators (Fiy.2-1)—Continned Sess eee LOCAL-REMOTE switch ‘TARGET SPEED switch ‘Speed-designate switeh Ranging switeh Coding awiteh TOI ewiteh RADIATE lamp RADIATE pushbutton RAD READY amp STANDBY pushbutton STANDBY lamp OFF pushbutton LV PWR SUPPLIES selector ‘witeh ‘Avto-manual switch MAN TRACK lamp RIPPLE TEST pushbutton Elevation handwhee! LV PWR SUPPLIES meter LINE VOLT meter Serve fitid current switch REMOTE — Enables ADP / 1BCC commands to the speedgate and signal comparator. LOCAL — Permits operation of the IHIPIR from the radar set group ‘and tranamitter group. REMOTE — Permits operation ofthe IHIPIR from the IBCC. X2— Spring loaded to this position. X1 — Increases the sensitivity of the TARGET SPEED meter. MANUAL SPEED — Enables manual speed commands to apeedgate in local test. NORMAL — Normal operating position. AUTO DESIGNATE — Enables auto speed commands to apeedgate in local test. Bnables und dleables range modulation from transmitted signal. Enables and disables coding modulation from tranamitied signal Enables and disables track-on-jm mode of operation. ‘When illuminated, indicates radiate function i ordered Places equipment in radiate condition. ‘When ilumineted,indiates that radiate conditions can be achieved Places equipment in standby condition When illuminated, indiates equipment is in standby. Removes standby and radiate power. Selects +6.8V, -100V, +100V, + 250V, +150V, or +6.8V for indication on the LV PWR SUPPLIES meter MAN TRACK — Disubies a portion ofthe tracking circuits to prevent ‘automatic tracking when lock occurs. AUTO TRACK — Enables the tracking circuits to automatically track ‘8 target when lock occurs, Indicates that auto-manual: in MAN TRACK position. Allows the ripple sensing of each power supply to be monitored by the LV PWR SUPPLIES meter. Permits positioning of antenna in clev Indicates measurement of function selected by LV PWR SUPPLIES selector Indicates line input voltage. ‘Selects EL elevation) or AZ (azimuth) motor-generator field current for indication on SERVO FIELD CURRENT‘TM 9—1430—533—12—1 1 @ 28 » be —s G3 i [ ®@oo0 2% 14 2) 22h My We tole ty tes 14 ea ger 82 as fie panel —contandiicto Thble22 Mae Pee Poel Cotrland indicat (Fa. 0 = _ ansee = 1 | seavesvee.yno.t te andar tmpe 2 | seavmisveeLyno.2tue Provide ae cit veo rotten lamps itm dada tps Thon forte bone ot 2 | eter Provides ao up rom adi apie 4 LVPS FIL fuse and Provides circuit overload protection; indicator lamp illuminates when =| indicator lamp fuse is burned out. | 5 | axrsenvori te Provide i vere petetonIndese lmp amisies whe asinine lp tie bod oo | «| uve voutace meren tue Proce ove pts: ner lam males het tnd indo tue snd os 1 | -son av sav pwn supeLy Provides re ord protection nde lm ili ther adindicao amp tim hun 1 | svwcumo aust and Proves ir overdone fm ila inca an ioe bac 2 | SPAR treandiadeertamp Prod esi norm i stl when fuses are burned 0TM 9—1430—S33—12—1 Table #-£, Main Fuse Panel—Controls and Indicators (Fig. £-£)—Comtinued Key Ponce 11 | +90, +300 PWR SUPPLY fose Provide phase cireult overload protection; indicator lampe illuminate ‘and indicator lamps when fuses are burried out. 12 | ~100V +150V +250V PWR SUPPLY Provide phase circuit overload protection; indieator lampe illuminate fuse and indicator lampe when fuses are burned out. 18 | MOTOR GENERATOR Applies or removes operating power from motor-generator; circuit breaker ‘automatically opens cireuit when overload is present. 44 | LEAD ANGLE COMPUTER MOTORS fuse Provides cireult overload protection; indiator lamp illuminates when ‘and indicator lamp fuse in burned out. 18 | CONV OUTLET fuseand Provides circuit overload protection; Indicator lamp fuse is burned out. 1s | 15 vAC— OO ,I Oo Note Perform this check monthly, or when a new tunable master oscillator tube has been installed. 11. Check Master Oscillator Frequency. a Wavemeter test set METER SENSITIVITY control , fig. 3-20). full counterclockwise, b Connect coaxial cable (RG-8) between rf transmitter assembly DC2J1 (82, fig. 8-19) wavereter test set and RF INPUT connector (4, fig. 8-20). « METER SENSITIVITY control. rotate clockwise until sensitivity meter (1, fig. 8-20) indicates 8/4 of a Wavemeter test set FREQUENCY - MC control aT (3, fig. 3-20) rotate until sensitivity meter indicates a sharp null. e Refer to master oscillator frequency correlation chart (fig. 3-21). Master oscillator is tuned to the assigned frequency + 2 scale indications on ‘wavemeter test set. MASTER OSC ASSIGNED FREQUENCY switch is set to the position that corresponds to assigned frequency. Set MASTER OSC ASSIGNED FREQUENCY switch to the correct position and repeat steps 10e and 10f. f ‘Wavemeter test set. . disconnect and secure. 12, Adjust Master Oscillator Frequency. NOTE ‘This procedure is to be performed only when a change in frequency is desired. a Adjust the idler cavity (center adjusting screw) (25, fig. 3-19) fully counterclockwise and output cavity (upper adjusting screw) (26, fig. 8-19) fully clockwise using the power amplifier tuning tool. 3-43TH 9—1430—533—12—1 a Optom Seep ‘Normal Indication Carte procure 120. Wavemeter test set METER SENSITIVITY control 6, fig. 3-20). rotate full counterclockwise. cs Connect coaxial cable (RG-8) between rf transmitter assembly DC2-J1 (82, fig. 8-19) axl) wavemeter test set RF INPUT connector (4, fig. 8-20). a METER SENSITIVITY control 8-20) indicates 3/4 of @ Wavemeter test set FREQUENCY - MC control ae (8, fig. 3-20) rotate until frequency indicator indicates desired | frequency f Refer to master oscillator frequency correlation chart (fig-8-21) for the approximate ting of master oscillator tuning control needed to obtain desired frequency. go Carefully adjust master oscillator tuning control (81, fig. 3-19) clockwise and counterelc wise with wavemeter tuning tool until sensitivity meter indicates a sharp null. h MASTER OSC ASSIGNED FREQUENCY switch (12, fig. 2-6) position that corresponds desired frequency. i Forward rf power switch (9, fig. 2-7)... PA. he Input cavity (lower adjusting screw) (24, fig. 3-19) adjust until: REFLECTED RF POWER meter (2, fig. 2-7), null in green ares. Perform table 8-7, TM 9— 1430—583—12—4 (VOL. V). k Output cavity (upper adjusting screw) adjust until: FORWARD RF POWER meter (3, fig. 2-7). 0... 06006 eee eeeeecttesten ++ topof blue area. NOTE If indication in step kis not obtained, adjust idler cavity clockwise until indication is attained. Perform table 8-7, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). L Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch .....-....-+++0+5+ position 2(XTAL BALANCE). mM. Are detector crystal attenuator. . adjust until: ‘Transmitter teat set FUNCTION MONITOR seseeseeseens 25 MAL Perform table 8-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). Output cavity (upper adjusting screw).. adjust until FORWARD ™ eee RF POWER meter indicates a peak. 3-461 9—1430—533—12-1 Table 8-16, Tranemitter Check — Continued Operation Normal Indieation Correct ize. Idler cavity (center adjusting screw)..............0s0005 adjust until FORWARD RF POWER meter indicates junction of yellow and green areas. P. Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch. . position 3 (SW MONITOR). @. ARC DETECTOR TEST pushbutton (10, fig. 2-7). press and hold. FORWARD RF POWER meter... drops to blue area. Perform table 8-5, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). FUNCTION MONITOR meter. .......+.++ yellow area. Perform table 8-7, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). r. ARC DETECTOR TEST pushbutton. .. release. s. Idler cavity (center adjusting screw)..........00.sce0005 adjust until FORWARD RF POWER meter peak in the green area. NOTE ‘Two peaks can be attained. Select for highest peak indieation (first peak obtained when adjusting idler cavity CW from full CCW position). t. SELECTOR switch. Position 2 (XTAL BALANCE). FUNCTION MONITOR meter............. indicates green area. Perform table 8-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). 4 Degeneration function SELECTOR switch (8, fig. 2-7)... LO POWER. Degeneration function MONITOR meter... _ steady indication within two minutes. (1) Adjust local oscillator attenuator (20, fig. 8-19) fully clock- wise. (2) Observe steady indication on degeneration function MONI- TOR meter within two minutes. (8) Carefully adjust REPELLER V ADJ (16, fig. 2-9) for a peak on degeneration function MONITOR meter. Perform table 9-1, TM 9—1430—583—12—4 (VOL. V). w ‘Observe degeneration function MONITOR meter. Degeneration function MONITOR meter ... upper orange area. Adjust local oscillator attenuator for above indication. Perform table 9-1, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. V). w. Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch... . position 1 (OFF). Perform degeneration loop alinement procedure, table 3-19. a-45T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 3-17. Receiver Check Operon Sp Normal ndleaton Corrective prcedare NOTE Close all IHIPIR drawers, compartment doors, and housing covers during normal radar operatice to eliminate potential IPAR rf interference. When it becomes necessary to open compartment doors, drawers, and housing covers and an abnomal indication is observed, request that the IPAR be placed in STANDBY to determine if it is causing the abnormal indication. If the IPAR in not the source of interference, perform the rf leakage text in paragraph 4-17. 1. Check Preparations. a Radar to radiate. b BATTLE SHORT switch NORMAL. 6 Coding switch CODING OFF. a TOJ switch. . . :. DISABLE. @ IPAR is not radiating while checks in this table are being performed. 2 Check Receiver Reference Level and Local Oscillator Power. The IHIPIR transmits a very powerful beam, exposure to which is harmful to body tissue. Make certain that all personnel remain clear of transmitter beam. a Insure that ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 1500 mils up. b MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker. OFF. © PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. SAFE. a Manually lower antenna to 400 mil Refer to par. 4-18. e Elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14)... BRAKE position. f Remove receiver housing cover and insure that reference interlock plunger is not locked i 0. Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch. position 2 (REF LEVEL). Receiver test set function meter... orange or green ares. h Control-indicator panel receiver functions selector switch (17, fig. 2-1)... REF LEVEL. Control-indicator panel RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter (15, fig. 2-1). green area. Perform table 11-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VD ‘ Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch. . position 4 (LO POWER). Receiver test set function meter.......... upper orange area. Carefully adjust REPELLER V ADJ (4, fig. 3-16) for: peak. Adjust local oscillator rf attenuator control (15, fig. 2-10) fo upper orange area. Perform table 11-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI).cw ™ 91490-83312 Table 3-17. Receiver Check — Continued Correct prosedare 3. Check Feedthra. a Receiver teat set TEST FUNCTION switch. . position 5 (MAIN CHAN- NEL FEEDTHRU). Receiver test set function meter........ +s blue ares. rs Control-indieator panel receiver functions selector switch. ... MAIN FEED. Control-indicator panel RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter..... ++ blue area, Perform table 12-1, TM 9—1430—588—12—4 (VOL. VD. « Ferrite modulator driver amplifier no. 1 BAL. 1 pushbutton (11, fig. 2-10)... press and hold Receiver test set function meter. deflects. RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter. ++ deflects. Adjust BAL 1 control R7 (8, fig. 8-16) to insure that both meters deflect, and then adjust for null. Perform table 12-1, TM 9—1430—588—12—4 (VOL. VD. BAL 1 pushbutton, .. release. « TEST FUNCTION switch. position 6 (SIDE CHAN- NEL FEEDTHRU). Receiver test set function meter.......... blue area, SIDE LOBE, blue area. Perform table 12-2, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VD. o Ferrite modulator driver amplifier no. 2 BAL 1 pushbutton. press and hold, Receiver test set function meter. deflects. RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter........+++ deflects. Adjust BAL 1 control R7 (, fig. 3-16) to insure that both meters deflect, and then adjust for null. Perform table 12-2, TM 9—1430—538—12—4 (VOL. VD). A BAL 1 pushbutton release. 4 ‘Check Spin Motor. a Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch. . position 16 (REF GEN). 2-47Tm 91430533121 ow Teble 38-17, Receiver Check — Continued SWEEP switch (1, fig. 2-10). OFF. MOTOR SPEED meter (2, fig. 2-10). maximum vibration of center Slowly adjust MOTOR SPEED ADJ control (2, fig. 8-16) for above indication. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VD. The receiver test set function meter indicates the orange area. 2 Record the receiver test set function meter indication. SWEEP switch (1, fig. 2-10)... Receiver test set function meter . .. ON. .. varies a total of 5 to 8 ua from the reading in ¢ abore. Adjust the SWEEP ADJ control (1, fig. 3-16) for the above indication. Perform table 13-1, TM 9-1430-533—-12-4 (VOL. V1). . OFF. ‘SWEEP switch (1, fig. 2-10) .. position 19 (DOPPLER OUT CAL). MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons (B and 4, fig. 2-10). DOPPLER ADJ control (1, fig. 8-17). Receiver test set function meter. NOTE Close al IHIPIR drawers, compartment doors and housing cover during normal radar operation to eliminate potential IPAR rf interference. When it becomes necessary to open compartment doors, drawers, and housing covers and an abnormal indication is observed, request that IPAR be placed in STANDBY to determine if it is causing the abnormal indication. If the IPA te not ‘the source of interference, perform the rf leakage teat in paragraph 4-17. Perform table 14-1, TM 9—1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VD. Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch.............. position 20 (DOPPLER OUT NF). press and hold. adjust until: stable indication of 16 wa. NOISE TUBE START pushbutton (18, fig. 2-10). press and hold for 2 seconds minimum and then release. Receiver test set function meter. green or yellow ares. Perform table 14-1, TM 9—1430—588—12—4 (VOL. VD. NOISE TUBE STOP pushbutton (17, fig.2-10)........... press and release. 3-48cs T™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 Table 3-17. Receiver Check—Continued MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons. Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switel release. position 1 (OFF) Check Side Channel Noise Figure. a ‘Tranmmitter housing cover. ... remove. b SPACE GATE switch (7, fig. 2-11) DISABLE. « Simulator control group TEST switch (8, fig. 2-11). position 6 (DOPPLER OUTCAL). a MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons. ...... press and hold. 3-481YDigitT™ 91490533121 cn Toble 8-17. Receiver Check — Continued press and release. ‘To prevent coaxial cable damage, use a 8/8-inch open-end wrench to loosen retaining nut while insuring that body of connector does not rotate. Disconnect connector W1P21 (10, fig. 8-17) from delay line switch connector J2 and con- neet it to OUTPUT LO jack (8, fig. 8-17). ‘Disconnect connector W1P19 (11, fig. 8-17) from receiver nulling block connector ABJ2 and connect it to REF OUTPUT NO. 1 jack (6, fig. 8-17). Receiver IF test set APPROACH/RECEDE switch (18, fig. 2-10) APPROACH. Receiver IF teat set POWER switch (14, fig. 2-10)... ON. Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch. .. position 2 (REF LEVEL). Receiver test set function meter. orange or green ares. Perform table 14-8, TM 9—1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VI). Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch. position 20 (DOPPLER OUT NF). MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons. . . press and hold. DOPPLER ADJ control. adjust until: Receiver test set function meter. 15 to 45 ua and record. Perform table 14-8, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VI). MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons. release. APPROACH/RECEDE switch. RECEDE. Disconnect connector W1P21 from OUTPUT LO jack and connect it to OUTPUT HI jack (4, fig. 3-17). MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons. press and hold. Receiver test set function meter. . Joes than value recorded in step Tk Slowly adjust MAIN REJECT control (6, fig. 8-16) for » ‘null indication. Adjust BAL 1 control R7 and BAL 2 control R5S (8, and 9, fig. 8-16) for s null indication. Perform table 14-8, TM 9—1480—538—12—4 (VOL. VD. MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons....... release.TM 91430533121 Table 3-17. Receiver Check — Continued Normal Indeston (Corrective procedure w sear Check Side Channel Recede Target Rejection. Disconnect connector W1P21 from OUTPUT HI jack and reconnect it to J2. Disconnect connector W1P20 (12, fig. 3-17) from receiver nulling block connector A5J3, and connect it to OUTPUT LO jack. APPROACH/RECEDE switch. APPROACH. Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch............++ position 21 (SIDE CAL). SIDE AGC SHORT, MAIN TEST, and PILOT SHORT pushbuttons. press and hold. DOPPLER ADJ control adjust until: Receiver test set function met 15 to 45 ua and record. Perform table 14-4, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VD. SIDE AGC SHORT, MAIN TEST, AND PILOT SHORT puhbuttons. release. APPROACH/RECEDE switch. RECEDE. Disconnect connector W1P20 from OUTPUT LO jack and connect it to OUTPUT HI jack. SIDE AGC SHORT, MAIN TEST, and PILOT SHORT pushbuttons. press and hold. Jess than value recorded in step 8f Slowly adjust the SIDE REJECT control (6, fig. 3-16) for » null indication. Adjust BAL 1 R7 and BAL 2 R56 controls (3 and 12, fig. 3-16) for a null indication. Perform table 14-4, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VD. SIDE AGC SHORT, MAIN TEST, and PILOT SHORT pushbuttons. Disconnect W1P20 from OUTPUT HI jack and reconnect it to A5J3. Disconnect W1P19 from REF OUTPUT NO. 1 jack and reconnect it to A5J2. Receiver IF test set POWER switch... OFF. Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch. position 1 (OFF). Receiver test set function meter.T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 ow Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check Operation up Normalindiation (Corrective procedure NOTE Close all HIPIR drawers, compartment doors, and housing covers during normal radar operate: to-eliminate potential PAR rf interference. If an abnormal indication is observed when it becomes necessary to open compartment doors, drawers, and covers, request that the PAR be placed iz STANDBY to determine if it is causing the abnormal indication. If the PAR is not the source of interference, perform the rf leakage test in paragraph 4-17. NOTE ‘The SERVO FIELD CURRENT meters may fluctuate £10 scale divisions from midscale when the auto manual switch is set to MAN TRACK and the BCC data cables are connected to the radar. However, if in addition to the meter fluctuations, the antenna oscillates, replace the appropriate electronic control amplifier (ECA). 1 Check Preparation. a STANDBY pushbutton (21, fig. 2-5). press and release. b Elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14). release. PEDESTAL SAFETY switch (1, fig. 2-14). OPERATE. ‘Make certain that all personnel and equipment are clear of antenna area before setting MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to ON, and insure that they remain clear during these procedures. a MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2)...... ON. Perform table 2-1, TM 9—1430—638—12—4 (VOL. ID. e Master oscillator and power amplifier BEAM circuit breakers... ON. f RADIATE pushbutton (18, fig. 2-6) press and release. o Verify that antenna is at 1500 mils position. h MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker. OFF. é Allow three minutes for the motor generator to coast to a stop. NOTE Pause lock rate check must be conducted with all data cables connected between the HIPIR and BCC or PCP, the LOCAL/REMOTE switch on the ADP set to REMOTE position, and the ADP energized. In the event that these conditions cannot be satisified, the pause lock rage check may be performed as stated, but this same check must be repeated whenever the above stated condi- tions can be met. NOTE In the next series of checks, if an abnormal indication is observed, request that the PAR be placed in STANDBY to determine if it is eausing interference. NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior 10 replacing tracker 1 or 2. 2. Check the Pause Lock Rate. a Lock switeh. NORMAL. b Auto-manual switch. MAN TRACK.™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Normal Indication CCorretive procedure Close and secure all radar set group drawers and receiver compartment cover for this step. LOCK lamp. . flashes 5 to 15 times per minute. NOTE If LOCK lamp does not flash at least once and TARGET SPEED meter is not fluctuating, place the radar in standby and then back to radiate before adjusting the PAUSE LOCK control. Adjust the PAUSE LOCK A13R14 control (13, fig. 8-12) in tracker 1. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1480—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. Record number of times per minute that LOCK lamp flashes. Remove the LEAD ANGLE COMPUTER MOTORS fuse (14, fig. 2-2) from main fuse panel. Allow three minutes for nutating scanner motor to coast to a stop. LOCK lamp. . flashes more than 0.2 times reading recorded in step 2d. Replace nutating scanner assembly (1, fig. 6-11). Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1430—633—12—4 (VOL. VID. Install LEAD ANGLE COMPUTER MOTORS fuse removed in step 2¢. NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 oF 2. Check Lock Hold. Lock awitch (6, fig. 2-1).......cceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees LOCK HOLD. LOCK lamp (3, fig. 2-1) + illuminates. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. NORMAL. NOTE ‘The following checks should not be performed until radar has been in radiate mode for at least 16 minutes. . NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 oF 2. 3153T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Seep Normal indleion Corrective procedure 4. Check Speedgate Lock a Perform interlock bypass procedure (table 3-16, tep 4d) to open 200-vde power supply wer. b Ranging switch (24, fig. 2-1). . RANGING OFF. © EXERCISE SWITCH (1, fig. 2 2-12)... position 4 (AZ LEAD ANGLE). LOCK lamp.....60s.csseeeeeeee seeesseee illuminates, Perform table 15-1, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. ......... green area. NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 oF 2. 5. Check Lock Disable. Lock switch. LOCK DISABLE. LOCK lamp......esseessseesesseeeeeess extinguishes. Perform table 15-1, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4(VOL. VID. NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 or 2. 6. Check Manual Speed. a Lock switch. NORMAL. b TARGET SPEED ewitch. set and hold to X1. TARGET SPEED mete 1200 to 1500. « Record TARGET SPEED meter indication for reference. a TARGET SPEED switch. ........0000cc0c0seeesseeees release. @ MANUAL SPEED. f LOCK DISABLE and beet toNORMAL. illuminates. Perform table 15-4, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. 0. TARGET SPEED switch. set and hold to X1. TARGET SPEED mete: + 50 of indication recorded in step ¢. Adjust FINE LONG SWEEP ZERO A8R7 (22, fig. 3-12) in tracker 1. Perform table 15-4, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. h TARGET SPEED switch. .......0.0.00s000eseeesseeees release.7 T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table $-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Normal ladication Corrective procedure NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 or 2. 1h a LOCK DISABLE. 4 AUTO DESIGNATE. « TARGET SPEED ewitch. set and hold to X1. TARGET SPEED meter. 200 of indication recorded in step 6c. Adjust short sweep zero A8R16 (24, fig. 3-12) in tracker 1. Perform table 15-4, TM 9—1480—538—12—4 (VOL. VID. 4 TARGET SPEED switch. release. « EXERCISE SWITCH (1, fig. 2-12) position 7 (MAX DOPPLER). f Lock Switch NORMAL. If the LOCK lamp does not illuminate insure the IBCC is not supplying a range designation by requesting that the range and rate handwheels be rotated fully counterclockwise. LOCK lamp. .. illuminate TARGET SPEED meter .. 1800 minimum. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 or 2, 8. Check High and Low Velocity Targets. a Speed-designate switch. NORMAL. a EXERCISE SWITCH. position 6 (HIGH VELOCITY TGT). « Lock switch. LOCK DISABLE and back to NORMAL. LOCK lamp.......sseeseseeeeeeseeeeeees illuminates. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1430—633—12—4 (VOL. VID. Failure to close the 300-vde power supply drawer could result in seriou shock. a 300-vde power supply drawer. close.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 ar Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operon Step Normal Indieaion Corrective procedure Be. Output test indicator switch (9, fig. 2-3)...........c0006 position 7. OUTPUT TEST INDICATOR lamp (8, fig. 2-3)... ...ceseeeee seseceseee illuminates. Perform table 16-6, TM 9—1430—633—12—4 (VOL. VID. £ Lock switeh. LOCK DISABLE. OUTPUT TEST INDICATOR lamp. . extinguishes. Perform table 16-5, TM 9—1430—688—12—4 (VOL. VID. 0 Speed-designate switch. AUTO DESIGNATE. h Lock switch. NORMAL. OUTPUT TEST INDICATOR lamp......... remains extinguished Perform table 15-5, TM 9—1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. i Speed-designate switch. MANUAL SPEED. OUTPUT TEST INDICATOR lamp. . + remains extinguished. Perform table 15-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. 3 Pestana the interlock bypass procedure (table 8-16, step 4d) for 300-vde power supply rawer. k EXERCISE SWITCH. . position 6 (EL LEAD ANGLE). L Speed-designate switch. NORMAL. m Loek switch. LOCK DISABLE and bath to NORMAL. illuminates. Perform table 15-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. OUTPUT TEST INDICATOR lamp....:.... remains extinguished Perform table 15-6, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. n TARGET SPEED switch. ++ set and hold to X1. TARGET SPEED meter............0.066. 010400, Perform table 16-4, TM 9— 1430—633—12—4 (VOL. VII. ° TARGET SPEED switch. release. NOTE | If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-20, step 22. \ Repeat step 9. 9. Check ML-1, SL-1,ML-2, and SL. a PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. SAFE. b Manually lower antenna to 400 mi1 9—1430—533—12—1 Table $-18, Radar Set Group Check—Continued Sup 9c. BRAKE a AUTO. TOJ ENABLE. e Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH........... position 20 (ML1). SPECIAL LOCK lamp......-+ss0+++++e0++ illuminates or illuminates intermittently. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VD. f EXERCISE SWITCH. position 21 (SLI). SPECIAL LOCK lamp. . ses extinguishes. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1430—533—-12—4 (VOL. VD. o EXERCISE SWITCH. position 22 (ML2). h Open receiver housing cover. i Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch. .........2..5 position 23 (TOS BLANKING ADJ). i TOJ/BLANK switch (25, fig. 2-10)........000eeeeeeeee TO. Receiver test set function meter........... greater than 35 ya. Perform table 14-6, TM 9—1480—633—12—4 (VOL. VD. k LOCK DISABLE and back toNORMAL.Table $-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operation Normal Indication T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 OL ‘TOS switch (26, fig. 2-1. DISABLE. SPECIAL LOCK lamp. ses extinguishes. Perform table 14-6, TM 9—1480—583—12—4 (VOL. VD. m TOS switch. ENABLE. n EXERCISE SWITCH. position 28 (SL2). Receiver test set function meter........... less than 10 ya. Perform table 14-6, TM 9—1480—633—12—4. (VOL. VI). Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch Position 1 (OFF). p. AUTO/MAN switch. MAN. NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 or 2 10. Check Side Lobe Inhibit. a Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH........... position 16 (SLTGT INHIBIT), LOCK lamp........escceeeeeesseesseeeee illuminates, Perform table 15-11, TM 9— 1480—633—12—4 (VOL. VID. XMTR NOISE pushbutton (26, fig. 2-10).....0.....000008 press and hold. « Lock switch, LOCK DISABLE and back to NORMAL. LOCK lamp....sssssssesssseseesseeeeees cycles on and off. Perform table 16-11, TM 9—1430—688—12—4 (VOL. VID). a XMTR NOISE pushbutton. ........0000ccccsseeeeseeee release e Close receiver housing cover. f Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. position 2 (SYSTEMS TEST). LOCK lamp. .....0.sssssssseeeeseeeeeees illuminates. Perform table 15-1, TM 9— 1480—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 or 2. iM. Check AFC Hold Enable. a Radar set group test set INDICATOR SWITCH @, fig. 2-12), LEAD ANGLE COMMAND TEST. 3-57TM 9—1430—533—12—1 ow Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operation [Normal Indiention Corrective procedure Doe . Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. . position 6 (HIGH VELOCITY TGT). LOCK lamp.......ssssseceeeeesessseeeee illuminates, Perform table 15-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vil) TARGET SPEED meter. 1300 to 1700 (X2). Perform table 15-4, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). Record TARGET SPEED meter indication for reference. Tracker 2 AFC HOLD TEST switch (4, fig. 8-18) ....... set and hold to ON. Tracker 2 AFCHOLD lamp (A19DS1)...... extinguished. Perform table 15-14, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vil). AFC HOLD TEST switch. .............. 200 ee eee eee release CMD TEST pushbutton (10, fig. 2-12)... press and hold. Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. position 14 (INTERFERING TCT? MEMORY lamp.........600csceeeeeeees illuminates. Perform table 15-14, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter.............++ fluctuates in yellow or rl ares, Perform table 15-14, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. TARGET SPEED meter.........2s0000008 steady, and indicates sane value recorded in step¢ Perform table 15-14, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII. CMD TEST pushbutton. ... release. MEMORY lamp. extinguishes. Perform table 15-14, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. LOCK lamp...... secesseeeeeseeee Femains illuminated. Perform table 15-14, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID TARGET SPEED meter.........2..00005 sweeps about value re- corded in step ¢. Perform table 15-14, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. Radar set group test set INDICATOR SWITCH (2, fig. 2-12) ....7 TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operation Step Normal Indeation CCorretive procedure NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 or 2. 12. Check Range Functions. NOTE In order to provide correlation between local and integrated system range designation checks, all major item interconnecting cables must be connected during range functions checks. release. OPERATE. a Elevation brake. b PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. . 3-58.1Digtized by Googleize . oo paegrr T™ 9—1490—533—13—-1 Tadle 3-18, Radar Set Group Check — Continned, MOTOR GENERATOR cireuit breaker. ON. Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. position 8 (RANGE CAL). Lock switch. .. LOCK DISABLE RANGE dial. 39 to 41 APPROACH Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VID. Receiver functions selector switch (17, fig. 2-1), RANGE NULL. ‘Tracker 1 awitch 85 (20, fig. 8-12). RANGE PHASE TEST Speod-designate switch....... AUTO DESIGNATE ‘Tracker 1 RANGE TEST pushbutton 84 (4, fig. 8-12). press and hold. RANGE PHASE ADJ A16R9 (2, fig. 8-12) adjust for following indica- tion, null, Perform table 16-12, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VII). release NORMAL. NORMAL. AUTO TRACK. RANGING ON illuminates. Perform table 16-12, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VII). 28 to 32 APPROACH Aajust the RANGE ADJ A16R18 control (17, fig. 8-12) for Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VII). Radar ot group tet sat REC TARGET pushbutton (7, fig. 2-12)... press and hold. 28 to 32 RECEDE. NOTE I RECEDE RANGE is incorrect, just TRACKER ? RANGE ZERO AL(RIS control (, fig. 8-18) for one-half range error. Release REC tenand popes ecops12pand unl RANGE inaienton betwen 28 Sod 82 APPROACH and RECEDE; ie. if RANGE indicator dial indleates 40 RECEDE, adjust A1ARI8 for 85 RECEDE. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VID. ‘TIME OF FLIGHT indicator dial.......... 82 or more Perform table 17-4, TM 9—1480—538—12—4 (VOL. VIID.™ 91490533121 on Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued rma Sateen Corretve probes Rage inteclock computer OUT OF IGE lamp (2, fig. 3-6).. illuminates Perform table 17-4, TM 9—1430—683—12—4 (VOL. VIID. @ REC TARGET pushbutton. release r Speed/designate switch (28, fig. 2-1) AUTO DESIGNATE. * een LOCK DISABLE. t ‘Tracker 1 RANGE TEST pushbutton (14, fig. 8-12). press and hold RANGE indicator dial........+ + 38 to 4S RECEDE. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VID. If AUTO RANGE DES A9R25 (16, fig. 8-12) has been adjusted during integrated system checks, do not readjust at this time, Otherwise, adjust AQR25 for 40 RECEDE. * RANGE TEST pushbutton. release ® ‘Tracker 1 30KM switch (1, fig. 8-12). press and hold. RANGE indicator dial, . + 28 to 82 APPROACH Adjust the RANGE DES A9R11 control (8, fig. 8-12) Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VID. ~. NORMAL e KICKOUT PHASE TEST. blue area. Adjust KICKOUT AMPLITUDE NULL A9R86 control (4, fig. 8-12) and KICKOUT PHASE NULL A17R#4 contra (16, fig. 8-12) for null. FINE ADJ pushbutton (16, fig. 2-1)... press and hold KICKOUT AMPLITUDE NULL and KICKOUT PHASE NULL... continue adjust- ing for null. release. illuminates (does not flash). Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—583— 12-4 (VOL. VID. ” 80 KM ewitch, release. * Lock switch. . LOCK DISABLE aa. 40 KM switch (21, fig. 8-12)... press and hold.cis ™ 91430533121 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued When RANGE indicator dial indicates 40, set lock switch to. NORMAL. (1) Adjust tracker 1 RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A17R19 (6, fig. 8-12) slowly counterclockwise until LOCK lamp just illuminates continously. (2) Adjust RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A17R19 an additional 1/2 turn counterclockwise. Perform table 16-12, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VID). ae, release. ad. Auto-manual switch MAN TRACK. as, Lock switch ... LOCK DISABLE, then NORMAL. eyeles on and off. (1) Adjust tracker 1 RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A17R19 25 turns clockwise, (2) Lock switch .... (8) 40 KM switch .. press and hold, (4) When RANGE indicator dial indicates 40, set lock switch toNORMAL. LOCK lamp ++ eyeles om and off. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL, VII). (5) Slowly adjust tracker 1 RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A1TR19 counterclockwise until: LOCK lamp just illuminates continuously. (6) Adjust tracker 1 RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A17R19 an additional 14 turn counterclockwise. (1) 40 KM switch . . Telease. of. press and hold. ++ {illuminates continuously. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—888—12—4 (VOL. VII), ag. 80 KM switch . release. ah, Speed-designate switch . NORMAL. ai. Radar set group test set EXERCISE switch . position 1 (off). 3-61TM 9—1430—533—12—1 cs Table 8-18 Radar Set Group Check — Continued Check Azimuth Servo Amplifier. a STANDBY pushbutton. press and release, a Master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker. OFF. © Power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker OFF. rod MOTOR GENERATOR cireuit breaker. OFF. « RADIATE pushbutton. press and release t Connect two jumper ler4s from junction of J1-L and 09 (1, fig. 8-11) in elevation and azimuth control amplifiers to ground. ra Auto-manual switch (34, fig. 2-1). AUTO TRACK. h Lock switeh (6, fig. 2-1)...... LOCK HOLD. é Servo field current awitch (40, fig. 2-1 AZ. SERVO FIELD CURRENT meters (A, fig. 2-1)... Adjust R70 and R142 (6 and 11, fig. 8-11) in the asimuth control amplifier (right side of antenna control drawer). Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VID. 4 Check Elevation Servo Amplifier. Set the servo field current switch to EL. SERVO FIELD CURRENT meters......... +4 scale divisions of midecale Adjust R70 and R142 (6 and 11, fig. 8-11) in the elevation control amplifier (left side of antenna control drawer). Perform table 16-2, TM 9—1480—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. Auto-manual switch. Check Azimuth Synchro Error. a FUNCTION SWITCH (4, fig. 2-12).........00csesesseee position 6 (AZ SYNCHRO ERROR). ‘Auto-manual switch. AUTO TRACK. Azimuth control amplifier pushbutton $1 (18, fig. 8-11) 3-6216 TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued ne oven ermal tdieton Corrective provadare 18d. Azimuth handwheel (18, fig. 2-1) rotate until: Radar set test set FUNCTION METER fg 212) : - Ona. Perform table 16-1, TM 9-1430—533—12-4 (VOL, VII). « Record indication of azimuth handwheel. f ‘Slowly rotate the azimuth handwheel cw 20 mils beyond indication just recorded. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER ...... eft hand 18 to 22 pa. Adjust azimuth control amplifier R2. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1430—688—12—4 (VOL. VID. o Azimuth control amplifier pushbutton SI... . release. 16, Check Elevation Synchro Error. a FUNCTION SWITCH. position 8 (EL SYNCHRO ERROR). Elevation control amplifier pushbutton S1 (13, fig.3-11).... press and hold. Elevation handwheel (87, fig. 2-1). rotate until: Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER + Ona. Perform table 16-2, TM 9—1430—588—12—4 (VOL. VIID. a Record elevation handwheel indication. 3-621voxesw Google™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 3-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operon seep Normal Inetion Corre procedure l6e Slowly rotate elevation handwheel cw 20 mils beyond indication just recorded. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER . 18 to 22 ya. Adjust elevation control amplifier R2. Perform table 16-2, TM 9— 1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VIID. f Elevation control amplifier pushbutton S1. release. 9. Auto-manual switch. MAN TRACK. h MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker. ON. i FUNCTION SWITCH ..... 0-00 sees e cece e eee eeeee ene position 1 (OFF). 17. Check Elevation Antenna Balance. a Connect DMM between J2 and J3 of elevation control amplifier (8 and 7, fig. 3-11). b Lock switeh .. LOCK HOLD. C Auto-manual switch AUTO TRACK. DMM Jess than 5 vde for 30 seconds. Adjust elevation control amplifier R142 (11, fig. 3-11) and momentarily set auto-manual switch to MAN TRACK and then back to AUTO TRACK. Perform table 16-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIII). a Auto-manual switch MAN TRACK. 18. ‘Check Azimuth Antenna Balance. a Connect DMM between J2 and J3 of azimuth control amplifier (8 and 7, fig. 3-11). b Lock switch . LOCK HOLD. e Auto-manual switch AUTO TRACK. DMM Jess than 5 vde for 30 seconds. Adjust azimuth control amplifier R142 (11, fig. 3-11) and momentarily set auto-manual switch to MAN TRACK and then back to AUTO TRACK. Perform table 16-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIII). ad Auto-manual switch MAN TRACK.™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 on Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operation Norma Indlestion Corrective procedure 19, Check Azimuth and Elevation Manual Operation. a Azimuth handwheel. rotate in both directions and observe that Antenna follows smoothly in correct direction. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. | b Elevation handwheel. rotate cew to 800 mils and then ew to 1200 mils and observe that Antenna follows smoothly in correct direction. Perform table 16-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vill. © Elevation handwheel. .........00000cccceseseeesseeeees rotate until ELEVATION mil indieator dial indicates Omils, and verify that Antenna is at —7 to +7 mils on elevation indicator scale (9, fig. 214) Perform table 16-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIII). 20. Check Elevation High Search. NOTE If search limits have been adjusted in remote do not readjust. a Lock switch. LOCK DISABLE. b FUNCTION SWITCH position 10 (EL TACH VOLTAGE). Ge Elevation handwheel . rotate until antenna elevation indicator scale @, fig. 2-14) indicates 400 mils. a HIGH/ROTATE pushbutton (3, fig. 3-10)... press and hold. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER . varies from left-hand yelov area to right-hand yellor area and back, Adjust R106 (10, fig. 8-11). Perform table 16-3, TM 9— 1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. Antenna elevation indicator scale.......... equal deflection above and below 400 mils. Adjust R68 (1, fig. 3-10) Perform table 16-3, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII. | 3-64cu T 9—1430—$33—12—1 Table $-18. Radar Set Growp Check — Continued Nermalndeton Corrcie provera Antenna elevation indicator scale .......... varies from low limit between -10 and 10 mils, to high limit between 760 and 840 mils. Adjust ELEV SEARCH HIGH LIM (10, fig. 8-10). Perform table 16-3, TM 9— 1480—583—12—4 (VOL. VIID. Antenna asimuth indicator scale (7, fig. 2-14) . 18 to 22 mil sector width Adjust R107 (9, fig. 8-11) Perform table 16-8, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (Vol. VIID. Record azimuth indicator acale sector width indication. HIGH/ROTATE pushbutton. release. rotate until antenna elevation indicator acale indicates 180 mils. press and hold. varies from the low limit between -10 and 10 mils, =e Adjust ELEV SEARCH MED LIM (13, fig. 3-10) Perform table 16-3, TM 9—1480—538—12—4 (VOL. VIID. MEDIUM/WIDE pushbutton. . . . ‘Check Elevation Low Search. Elevation handwheel . rotate unti] antenna elevation indicator scale indicates 50 mils. LOW/NARROW pushbutton (11, fig. 8-10)............005 press and hold. Elevation control amplifier search rate control R106....... adjust until antenna ‘searches in elevation at an extremely low search rate. ‘The antenna elevation indicator scale low limit reading indicates —20 to 0 mils, Perform table 16-8, TM 9—1480—683—12-4 (VOL. VIII).cu ‘TM 9—1490—533—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued a ermal dition ocrntiepromedere 220, ‘The antenna elevation indicator scale upper limit reading indicates 95 to Cont. 125 mils, : Adjust ELEV SEARCH LOW LIM (12, fig. 8-10). Perform table 16-8, TM 9—1480—683—12—4 (VOL. VIID. a LOW/NARROW pushbutton release. « f HIGH/ROTATE pushbutton. .. o Elevation control amplifier search rate control R106, ...... adjust until: Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER Perform table 16-8, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VIID. A HIGH/ROTATE pushbutton, .. 23, ‘Check Secant Amplifier Search Sector Width, a Elevation handwheel. rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 1066 mils, & LOW/NARROW pushbutton. .. press and hold. Antenna asimuth indicator........+++ same as recorded in step 208, Perform table 16-8, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VIII). e ADP/HPI switch (19, fig. 2-1) sevseeee ADP, Antenna asimuth indicator......s..ss004 80-10 40-mil sector width. Perform table 16-8, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VIID. a ADP/HPI switch .. « LOW/NARROW pushbutton. .. 3-66T™ 9—1430—533—12-1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Step Normal Indetion 23s. rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 400 mils. 24. Check Azimuth 60-Degree Search a LOW/NARROW pushbutton. ........-.60cseeseeerseees press and hold. b. AZIMUTH SEARCH pushbutton (7, fig. 3-10) ........... press and hold. Antenna azimuth indicator ..............+ 1030 to 1110-mil search. Adjust +t 30 DEG SEARCH control (6, fig. 3-10). Perform table 16-8, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIII). Antenna elevation indicator. ..........++++ 18- to 22-mil sector width. Adjust azimuth control amplifier R107 (9, fig. 3-11). Perform table 16-3, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIID. e LOW/NARROW and AZIMUTH SEARCH pushbuttons... release. 2s. Check Azimuth 120-Degree Search a FUNCTION SWITCH. .. Position 11 (AZ TACH VOLT). b@ MEDIUM/WIDE pushbutton. press and hold. e AZIMUTH SEARCH pushbutton. press and hold. Antenna azimuth indicator. ..... seeseesees 2090 to 2190-mil search. Adjust + 60 DEG SEARCH control (4, fig. 3-10). Perform table 16-3, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIID. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER 00.0... 0ecceeeeeeesseeeeeeee varies from left-hand yellow area to right-hand yellow area, Adjust azimuth control amplifier R106 (10, fig. 3-11). Perform table 16-8, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIID. a MEDIUM/WIDE and AZIMUTH SEARCH pushbuttons.. release. 26, Check Radar Error. a STANDBY pushbutton (21, fig. 2-5)... press and release & MASTER OSCILLATOR BEAM circuit breaker (21, fig. 2-6) ON. e POWER AMPLIFIER BEAM cireuit breaker (14, fig. 2-6), ON. 267™M 9—1430—533—12—1 ou Table $-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued ‘Operation ‘Step ‘Normal Indication Corrective procedure 26d. PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. ...........000000ssseeeee SAFE. @ Remove transmitter housing cover. f Simulator control group TEST SWITCH. position 18 (EL AM GAIN). 0 PEDESTAL SAFETY switch...........000000eeeee000 OPERATE. h Elevation handwheel. . rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 1500. i RADIATE pushbutton (18, fig. 2-6). ......0000ccccse0005 press and release. Zh Lock awitch. NORMAL. LOCK lamp (3, fig. 2-1 + illuminates. Perform table 15-1, TM 9—1480—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter (4, fig.2-1).... green or yellow area. Perform table 15-9, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. k MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker....... OFF. NOTE Insure that antenna does not move in azimuth or elevation. L Remove two jumper leads from junction of J1-L and C9 (1, fig. 3-11) to ground in elevation and azimuth control amplifiers. To prevent coaxial cable damage, use a 3/8-inch open-end wrench to loosen the retaining nut while insuring that the body of the connector does not rotate. m Disconnect P2 from tracker 1 jack J4 (9, fig. 3-12). n Auto-manual switch. AUTO TRACK. o. Set the radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH to position 9 (EL RADAR ERROR). Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER. . 221025 wa. Adjust elevation control amplifier R57 (6, fig. 3-11). Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. P. Set the radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH to position 7 (AZ RADAR ERROR) Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER. ....... see -Tto+T uacu RSPR ERT RRS 27. ‘TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table $-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued ‘Norma bet Corrective procedure Replace azimuth control amplifier. PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. SAFE. Simulator control group TEST SWITCH. position 19 (AZ AM GAIN). PEDESTAL SAFETY switch OPERATE. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER. 221025 pa, Adjust azimuth control amplifier R57 (6, fig. 8-11). Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VII). Radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER. -7 to+7 ua. position 9 (EL RADAR ERROR). Replace ELEVATION control amplifier. Auto-manual switeh. . MAN TRACK. STANDBY pushbutton. press and release. PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. SAFE. Manually lower the antenna to 400 mils. Elevation brake. BRAKE. Simulator control group TEST SWITCH. position 1 (OFF). Re-install transmitter housing cover. Release elevation brake. PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. OPERATE. Radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH. . POSITION 1 (OFF). Reconnect tracker 1 P2 to J4. MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker . ON. press and release. Check Angular Rate to ADP. Radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH. position 15 (ANGULAR RATE - AZ ADP). Rader oot group tnt ot FUNCTION twat ye Adjust azimuth control amplifier R159 (8, fig. 8-11).™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 cs Table $-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued omni arma ain a Corrective procedure 27 ANGULAR VEL CAL pushbutton (6, fig. 2.-12).......... press and hold. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER —2to+2ua, Adjust asimuth control amplifier R169 (8, fig. 8-11) for Ova. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1480-533-12—4 (VOL. VI. « ANGULAR VEL CAL pushbutton. release. a ‘Azimuth control amplifer ANG RATE switeh (2 fi. ain. press and hold. Radar ot prop teat st FUNCTION METER ..... left-hand yellow area within one second. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1480-588-12-4 (VOL. VII) « ‘ANG RATE switch .... release. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER ................. crosses —S ya within 2 seconds. Replace azimuth control amplifier. f FUNCTION SWITCH. position 16 (ANGULAR RATE-EL-ADP). Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER cesses -Btot2 ua, Adjust R159 (8, fig. 3-11) in elevation control amplifier. Perform table 16-2, TM 9—1430-633—12-4 (VOL. VIN). 0 ANGULAR VEL CAL pushbutton, press and hold. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER —2to+2ua, Adjust R159 in elevation control amplifier for 0 a. Perform table 16-2, TM 9-1430—633-12-4 (VOL. VI). A ANGULAR VEL CAL pushbutton. release. i Elevation control amplifier ANG RATE switch (2, fig. 8-11) press and hold. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER 0... sessssssssseeeeeeeeeeee left-hand yellow area within one second. Perform table 16-2, TM 9-1430-583—12-4 (VOL. VII). i. release. ‘Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER .. crosses —5 pa within seconds. 2 Replace elevation control amplifier . 3-70cw TH 9—1430—$33—12—-1 Table $-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued 22, Chock Lead Angle Command. )MMAND TEST. 3-701Digitcia TM 9—1430—S33—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continad. SEQUENCE CONTROL pushbutton (9, fig. 2-12)........ press and hold for ‘approximately five seconds. TEST FUNCTION INDICATOR lamp (11, fig. 2-12), ... + flashes once within spproximately 15 seconds. NOTE radar eat group wast st FUNCTION METER tndlates 00. adjst 22 SEC ADJ control counterclockwise to obtain above indication. if FUN METER indicates right-hand yellow arva, adjust 82 SEC ADJ const ck wise to obtain above indication. Adjust the 8.2 SEC ADJ control (8, fig. 8-10). Perform table 15-14, TM 9-1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). I 29, Check Delay Lock Test. a INDICATOR SWITCH. DELAY LOCK TEST. a Auto-manual switeh. AUTO TRACK. « . NORMAL a RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton (6, fig. 8-12)........... press and hold. « SEQUENCER CONTROL pushbutton for approximately 6 seconds. press and hold. TEST FUNCTION INDICATOR lamp...... flashes once within approximately 5 seconds. Note Insure that 800-vde power supply output is normal. Note ‘Ifthe radar set group test set FUNCTION METER indicates 0 ja, adjust the 2 SEC ADJ control counterclockwise to obtain the above indication. If the FUNCTION METER indicates the right-hand yellow area, adjust the 2 SEC ADJ control clockwise to obtain the above indication. Adjust the 2 SEC ADJ control (16, fig. 8-10). Perform table 16-2, TM 9—1430—683—12—4 (VOL. VII). t RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton . release. ‘Auto-manual ewitch MAN TRACK. INDICATOR SWITCH. OFF. ‘Check Recede Command. a Radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH .. position 4 (RECEDE CMD). a APPROACH/RECEDE switch (8, fig 8-6) .. set and hold range interlock computer to RECEDE. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER ..s.sesssesseessesseesseeseess 171025 pasTH 91430833121 ry Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued op ‘Normal Indication (Corrective procedare 30d. WARNING } Failure to close 800-vde power supply drawer could result in serious electrical shock. e Close 800-vde power supply drawer. a Output test indleator switch (9, fig 2-8) ... position 6, OUTPUT TEST INDICATOR lamp (8, fig. 2-3). does not illuminate. « Output test indicator switeh . + position 7, OUTPUT TEST INDICATOR lamp........ illuminates. f Output test indicator switeh . + position 8. OUTPUT TEST INDICATOR lamp . + Mluminates, o APPROACH/RECEDE switch release. h Output test indicator switch ......ssesseesesseeeeeee OFF. é Perform 800-vde power supply drawer interlock bypass procedure (table 8-15, step 4d. é FUNCTION SWITCH.. testeeersseeessees position 1 OFF). 31. Cheak ovation Lead Angle Goat a Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH........... position 1 (OFF). o STANDBY pushbutton .. press and release, e Master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker OFF. a Power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker. OFF, « RADIATE pushbutton ress and release, t Range interlock computer APPROACH/RECEDE AWIECH ss eessesesseesssseeetsseeersseeessseesssees — bttand hold to RECEDE, ‘ Elevation handwhee! slowly rotate cew until ‘computer ELEVATION Indicator dial (4, fig. 2-8) deflects upward. between 48 and 58 mils. Perform table 17-8, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VIID. h APPROACH/RECEDE switch ......... cesses Poloage, Elevation handwheel .. rotate until control- indicator panel ELEVATION mill indicator dial indicates 100. i tS i 3.72cw T™ 9—1430—533—121 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Check Azimuth Lead Angle Designation. ADP. a ADP/HPI switch ..........04+ ee a Range and azimuth control amplifier switch 81 4, fig. 8-5) set and hold to CW and then CCW. Computer AZIMUTH indicator dial (1, fig. 2-3)... sesecsscseeseees equal but opposite in direction for each position. Adjust R49 (7, fig. 8-5). Perform table 17-1, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VIII). e Range and azimuth control amplifier switch $1... set and hold to CW. Computer AZIMUTH indicator dial . 300 mils, Adjust R62 (6, fig. 8-5). Perform table 17-1, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VIID. a Range and azimuth control amplifier switch S1.... release. Check Elevation and Time-of-Flight Lead Angle Calibration. ns ADP/HPI switch 8 Lock switch ... e Auto-manual switch TIME OF FLIGHT indicator dial (8, fig. 2-8) .....0 = 509. a Elevation and time-of-flight control amplifier switch 81 @, fig. 8-8) Computer ELEVATION indicator dial zero mils. Adjust R49 (4, fig. 8-8). Perform table 17-2, TM 9-1430—583-12-4 (VOL. VI). ] « Set and hold switch 81 to the GAIN position. Computer ELEVATION indicator dial...... 500 mils UP. ‘Adjust RB2 (8, fig. 8-8). Perform table 17-2, TM 9-1430—683-12-4 (VOL. VII). | f Elevation and time-of-flight control amplifier switch S1 release. 0. Lock switch ... NORMAL. A ‘Auto-manual switch MAN TRACK. Check Target Inverter Test. Radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH .... position 17 (RECEDE TGT VEL). 3-73™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Gn Table 3-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operation ep 4b, ‘Comparator and minimum el pushbutton (2, fig. 8-7). Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER .....0..0.000eeeeeee One Adjust ZERO ADJ control (3. fig. 3-7). Perform table 17-4, TM 9-1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vl. e TGT VEL TEST pushbutton (6. fig. 2-12) ......00-e20005 press and hold. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER + Ope Adjust ZERO ADJ control. Perform table 17-4, TM 9-1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIII. 4. TEST and TGT VEL TEST pushbuttons .. release. 35. Check Approaching Target. a. ADP/HPI switch HPI. b Auto-manual switch . MAN TRACK. Elevation handwheel rotate until control- indicator panel ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 200 mils. a Range interlock computer APPROACH! RECEDE SWITCH (3. fig. 3-6) APPROACH. RANGE indicator dial (2. fig. 2-3) .. between 24 and 26 APPROACH range. Computer AZIMUTH indicator dial .. between 225 and 275 CW mils, TIME OF FLIGHT indicator dial .. between 44 and 50. IN RANGE lamp (1. fig. 3-6)... illuminates. OUT OF RANGE lamp (2. fig. 3-6) extinguishes. Computer ELEVATION indicator dial -3t0 +78. e APPROACH/RECEDE switch . release. Perf 430-533-124 (VOL. VII. 36. Check Receding Target. 3-74 APPROACH/RECEDE switch ... set and hold to RECEDE RANGE indicator dial between 24 and 26 RECEDE range. Computer AZIMUTH indicator dial . . between 225 and 275CW mils. TIME OF FLIGHT indicator dial between 60 and 68. OUT OF RANGE lamp...... extinguishes.7 ™ 91430533121 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operon si Neem aden corrective procedure Ba. INRANGE lamp .. seeceeees illuminates, a Computer ELEVATION indicator dial...... 120 to 200 mils UP. & APPROACH/RECEDE switch release. Perform table 17-4, TM 9-1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIII). 3. Check Minimum Launch Angle. a APPROACH/RECEDE switch set and hold to APPROACH. Computer ELEVATION indicator dial .. -5t0 +75, Perform table 17-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIII). b APPROACH/RECEDE switch . release. « Observe that the indication on the stowed synchro (4, fig. 3-7) in comparator and minimum elevation cutout is set to prescribed battery minimum launch angle. Make certain that all personnel and equipment are clear of antenna area. dad Rotate the elevation handwheel clockwise for an additional 100 mils above stowed synchro indication, then slowly counterclockwise until DS1 (1, fig. 3-7) illuminates. Antenna elevation mil indicator dial indication added to the computer ELEVATION indicator dial indication equals the stowed synchro indication +25 mils. Perform table 17-3, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIII). 38, Check Memory. a Elevation handwheel rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 1500. b STANDBY pushbutton press and release. ra Master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker... ON. da Power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker ... ON. e RADIATE pushbutton .. press and release. J. | Auto-manual switeh AUTO TRACK. s. | BXERCISESWITCH. position 4 (AZ LEAD ANGLE.) LOCK lamp. illuminates. Perform table 15-1, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. 3-75TM 9—1430—$33—12-1 cal Table $-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operon sep Normal aden Corrective Prcedre | Bie. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter .........+00++ green or yellow aren. | it. ” Perform table 15-9, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vil. A Tracker 1 RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton 6, fig. 3-12) ... press and hold. MEMORY lamp (7, fig. 2-1) illuminates for 8 to 12 seconds, then extinguishes, NOTE Insure that 300-vde power supply output is normal. Adjust 10 SEC ADJ control (14, fig. 3-10). Connect multimeter between the junction of R24 and Ri (46, fig. 3-10) to ground in the radar set control. Adjust tt MEM SEN control (2, fig. 3-10) for -20 vde. Diseonneet the multimeter and repeat step h. Perform table 15-13, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vil) i RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton release. i Auto-manual switch, MAN TRACK. k Elevation handwheel rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicate 400 mils. L Auto-manual switch. .. AUTO TRACK. Antenna. seeeeeeeeeeeees tracks in azimuth within30 seconds. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vil m. Tracker 1 RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton 6, fig. 3-12) press and hold as antenna moves in azimuth. Rarge dial remains between 28 and 32 and antenna continues to tra smoothly in azimuth in one direction while MEMORY lamp illumintc. When MEMORY lamp extinguishes, range dial returns to 39 to $1 and antenna returns to its azimuth indication dial setting. Perform table 15-13, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vil. n RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton .... release. °. Auto-manual switch. MAN TRACK. P. EXERCISE switeh . position 5 (EL LEAD ANGLE). @ Auto-manual switch. .. AUTO TRACK. 3-76 Antenna tracks in elevation within 30 seconds. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—533—4 (VOL VID.T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operation [Normal Indication (Corrective procedure RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton. ................0.005 press and hold as antenna moves in elevation. Antenna stops tracking while MEMORY lamp is illuminated. When MEMO- RY lamp extinguishes, the antenna returns to its elevation indicator dial setting. Perform table 15-13, TM 9— 1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VID). RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton. EXERCISE switch. release. position 1 (OFF). NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior to replacing tracker 1 or 2. ‘Check Scan Buckoff. STANDBY pushbutton press and release. PEDESTAL SAFETY switeh. SAFE. Remove transmitter housing cover. Simulator control group test set TEST SWITCH. . position 22 (SCAN BUCKOFF). PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. .... OPERATE. Elevation handwheel............----0.0s0eeeeeeeeeeeee rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 1500. RADIATE pushbutton . press and release. MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker. OFF. Allow three minutes for the motor generator to coast toa stop. LOCK lamp. .....s0seeeeeee ++ illuminates Perform table 15-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL VID. NOTE Ingure that antenna does not move when performing steps 39 through 40. Auto-manual switeh. AUTO TRACK. Radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH . ition 7 (RADAR ERROR-AZ). Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER. + less than 10 pa, Perform table 15-10, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. MAN TRACK. Auto-manual switch, 3-77T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 a Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operation Step [Normal Indication Corrective procedure NOTE If an abnormal indication is observed while performing this step, perform table 3-21 prior o replacing tracker 1 oF 2. Check Buckoff Threshold. a PEDESTAL SAFETY switch ............-----0e0ee00e SAFE. b Simulator control group TEST switch. ..........000.2006 position 23 (BUCK-OFF THRESHOLD). « PEDESTAL SAFETY switch . OPERATE. a ‘Auto-manual switch. AUTO TRACK. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER... approximately 9 ua. Perform table 15-10, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII) @ Auto-manual switch..... MAN TRACK. al. Check Wideband Con Sean Gain. a PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. b Disconnect P2 from tracker 1 jack J4 (9, fig. 3-12). © Simulator control group TEST switch. . position 24 (WB CON SCAN GAIN). a PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. OPERATE. @ Auto-manual switch. . AUTO TRACK. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER.........cs00e00000+ 221025 pa Adjust tracker 2 WB CON SCAN GAIN AIRI4 ents @, fig. 3-13). Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—633—12—4 (VOL Vil f PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. SAFE. 9. Reconnect P2 to J4 of Tracker 1. h Simulator control group TEST SWITCH. . position 1 (OFF). i PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. OPERATE.ce T™ 9—1430—533—12-1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued oo Normal lndienton (Corrective aij. Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH... +++ position 17 (CON SCAN 1), LOCK lamp.....ssseeeessseeeseeeeseees illuminates, Perform table 16-1, TM 9— 1480—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER............ does not vary more than -1010-+10 painS seconds. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VII). k Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH... position 18 (CON SCAN 2). LOCK lamp... +++ illuminates. Perform table 14-5, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI. SPECIAL LOCK lamp (6, fig. 2-1).......+. illuminates or illuminates intermittently. Perform table 14-5, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VD. TARGET SPEED meter... sweeps up and down. Perform table 14-5, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VD. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER...........s04se0++ does not vary more than -8 to +8 ye. Perform table 16-10, TM 9—1480—633—12—4 (VOL. VID. L Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH . . position 19 (CON SCAN 8). LOCK lamp... +++ illuminates. Perform table 14-5, TM 9— 1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V1). SPECIAL LOCK lamp.......s0ssese+se++ illuminates or illuminates intermittently. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). Redar set group test set FUNCTION METER...........0css0000+ varies to left and right of zero with a minimum excursion of 15 wa. Perform table 16-10, TM 9—1430—633—12—4 (VOL. VII). m Auto-manual ewitch. MAN TRACK. . MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker. on. o. Elevation handwheel rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 400. Pp ‘Auto-manual switch. AUTO TRACK. Antenna tracks beck and forth in azimuth. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID). 3-79T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 on vo Onion 41g. Auto-manusl switch. MAN TRACK. n Elevation handwheel rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 1500. * PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. SAFE. t Manually ower antenna to 400 mils and set elevation brake to BRAKE. “ Replace transmitter housing cover. w Release elevation brake. w. PEDESTAL SAFETY switch. OPERATE. a Elevation handwheel. rotate until the ELEVA- TION mil indicator dial indicates 400. 42, Check Asimuth Lead Angle. a Disconnect P2 from J4 (9, fig. 8-12) of tracker 1. 8 Radar sot group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. . position 4 (AZ LEAD ANGLE). « Auto-manual switch. AUTO TRACK. a ‘Lock switch. NORMAL. LOCK lamp... {lluminates. Perform table 15-1, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter..........++.+ green ares, Perform table 15-9, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. RANGE indicator dial. . sesseseess 28 to 32 APPROACH. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID). Computer AZIMUTH indicator dial........ varies between 150 to 400 clockwise and 150 to 400 counterclockwise. Perform table 17-1, TM 9—1490—588—12—4 (VOL. VIID. ‘TIME OF FLIGHT indicator dial. .. 31 37. Perform table 17-4, TM 9—1480—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. Computer ELEVATION indicator dial...... 200 to 300 UP. Perform table 17-2, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VIID. Antenna tracks in azimuth within 30 seconds. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID.2 T™ 9—1430—533—12—-1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued ‘Step Goma) ‘Normal Indlestion Corrective proadare 43. Check Elevation Lead Angle Recede. a Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. .......... position 5 (EL LEAD ANGLE). & REC TARGET pushbutton (7, fig. 2-12). press and hold. LOCK lamp........ illuminates. Perform table 16-1, TM 9—1430—583—12—4 (VOL. VID. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. . teeeees green area, Perform table 15-9, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VID. RANGE indicator dial....... + 28 to 82 RECEDE. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. TIME OF FLIGHT indicator dial.......... varies between 58 and 81. Perform table 17-4, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIID. Computer ELEVATION indicator dial...... varies up and down. Perform table 17-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VIID. Antenna tracks in elevation within 30 seconds. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VID. « REC TARGET pushbutton. release. “ Check Elevation Lead Angle Approach. Lock switch. LOCK DISABLE then back to NORMAL. illuminates. LOCK lamp. ....ssesseeesees Perform table 15-1, TM 9—1480—538—12—4 (VOL. VID. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter........ + green area. Perform table 15-9, TM 9—1430—588—12—4 (VOL. VID. RANGE indicator dial......... 28 to 32 APPROACH. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. TIME OF FLIGHT indicator dial... «++ varies between 50 and 70. Perform table 17-4, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VIID. Computer ELEVATION indicator dial...... varies from less than 200 UP to more than 500 UP. Perform table 17-2, TM 9—1430—5838—12—4 (VOL. VIID. Antenna tracks in elevation within 30 seconds. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1480—683—12—4 (VOL. VII). 3-81T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Normal Indication (Corrective procedure Check Strong Targets. a Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH............ position 8 (STRONG TARGET). LOCK lamp. . seseseee illuminates. Perform table 15-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter............... green area. Perform table 15-9, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII. Antenna tracks in azimuth within 30 seconds. | Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IN. Check Maximum Clutter. Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. .......... position 9 (MAX CLUT- TER). Receiver functions selector switch (17, fig. 2-1) MAIN FEED. RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter (15, fig. 2-1) blue area. Perform table 12-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. WD SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. sees green or yellow area, Receiver functions selector switch. . .. SIDELOBE. RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter........... blue area. Perform table 12-2, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. VI. Reconnect P2 to tracker 1 J4. Check TOJ. a Coding switch. CODING ON. b Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. position 11 (TOJ1). LOCK lamp... ++ MMuminates. Perform table 14-6, TM 9-1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI SIGNAL STRENGTH meter. green or yellow ares Perform table 14-6, TM 9—1430—533—12~<4 (VOL. VIL Antenna tracks in azimuth, 6 Transmitter test set SELECTOR switeh (11, fig. 2-8)..... position 20 (% MODULA: TION). ‘Transmitter test set FUNCTION I MONITOR meter (1, fig. 2-8). 5to20 pa Perform table 14-6, TM 9-1430—533-12—4 (VOL. ¥ 3-82cu Tm 9—1430—$33—12-1 * Table 8-18 Radar Set Group Check — Continued a ermal notion Corectve prcnere aid. Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH........... position 18 (TOJ 8). LOCK lamp......+.+ illuminates. Perform table 14-6, TM 9-1430-533—12—4 (VOL. VI). SPECIAL LOCK lamp may illuminate intermittently. Perform table 14-6, TM 9—1430-533—12—4 (VOL. VI). ‘Transmitter test eet FUNCTION Perform table 14-6, TM 9-1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). Redar tracks smoothly in azimuth. Perform table 14-6, TM 9-1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). « Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch. position 1 (OFF). f Auto-manual switch. MAN TRACK. 43. Check Ground Speed Computer Calibration. a Connect jumper lad between TEST J2 and TEST J8 (4 and, fig 8-6) if IHIPIR i not connected to the IBCC. a CALIBRATION SELECTOR switch (1, fig. 3-9). . START. « CALIBRATE switch (9, fg. 3-8). Bross and bold to CALIBR- a CALIBRATION SELECTOR switch. . after 5 seconds BALANCE CALIBRATE meter (2, fig. 3-9)... Adjust BALANCE ADJ control (3, fig. 8-9) until meter indicates zero center. Perform table 15-6, TM 9—1480—688—12—4 (VOL. VID. « CALIBRATION SELECTOR switch. . GAIN ADJ. CALIBRATE meter.........0.+ssse+++0++ 2 scale divisions of sero center. Adjust GAIN ADJ control (6, fig. 8-9) until meter indicates sero center. Perform table 15-6, TM 9—1480—588—12—4 (VOL. VII). f CALIBRATE switch. . release. 0 Repeat steps bthrough fabove until both indications are correct. a CALIBRATE switch. Bree and bold to CALIBR.Ti 91430533121 ce Table -18. Radar Set Group Chack — Continued 4st. SENSITIVITY EQUAL. + within +2 scale divisions of zero center. Adjust SENSITIVITY EQUAL control (6, fig. 3-8) until meter indicates zero center. Perform table 15-6, TM 9—1480—683—12—4 (VOL. VID. Zé CALIBRATION SELECTOR switch. alternately to QUAD- RATURE ADJ Gower) and QUADRATURE ADJ (upper) position. CALIBRATE meter... deffection to left of sero in lower QUADRATURE ADJ position is equal to deflection to right of sero in upper QUADRATURE ADJ position. Adjust the QUADRATURE ADS control (8, fig. 8-9). Perform table 15-6, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. + within 1 major scale divi- sion of zero center for cech switch position Adjust the GAIN ADJ control (6, fig. 8-9). Perform table 15-6, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. NOTE ‘Do not reset CALIBRATE SELECTOR switch to GAIN ADJ position and attempt to obtain step: @e normal Indication. CALIBRATE switch. release. L Remove jumper lead, if used. ™ Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH. . position 8 (STRONG. TARGET). Clear all personne! and equipment from antenna area. 5 Azimuth handwheel. rotate until antenna is posi- tioned to safe clear ares. o Elevation handwheel. rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 400 mils. BR Disconnect IBCC cable from radar set group A843, if connected. « Set multimeter to measure de, and connect test leads between TEST J2 (4, fig. 8-9) and ground.T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-18. Radar Set Group Check — Continued Operate Seep Normal inletion Corrective procedure 48r. ‘Auto-manual switch. AUTO TRACK. Multimeter. .. + between —3.80 and —4.85 vde after five seconds, Have DS and GS personnel aline or replace elevation resistor (OA1A3AIR2). ® Auto-manual switch. MAN TRACK. t Elevation handwheel. . rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 1070 mils. “ Auto-manual switch. ... . AUTOTRACK. Multimeter. tttessseeeeessseeeees 77.0 and —9.0 vde after five seconds. Have DS and GS personnel aline or replace elevation resistor (@OA1A3AIR2). ® Auto-manual switch. MAN TRACK. w. Elevation handwheel. . rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 400 mils. 2 Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH........... position 6 (EL LEAD ANGLE). ¥. APPROACH/RECEDE switch, set and hold to RECEDE. £ Auto-manual switch. AUTO TRACK. Multimeter... between —2.10 and —2.65 vde after five seconds. Perform table 15-6, TM 9—1430—633—12—4 (VOL. VID). a, | APPROACH/RECEDE switch. release. ab. Remove multimeter test lead. | set group test set EXERCISE switch ............ position 1 (OFF). 9. ‘Check Local Systems. a Lock switch LOCK DISABLE. b Elevation handwheel 400 mils. é LOCAL SYSTEMS TEST switch ON. a HIGH/ROTATE pushbutton press and hold. ‘Antenna searches approximately 0 to 800 mils elevs aTM 9—1430—533—12—1 ov Table $-18. Radar Set Group Check—Continued 49¢. nr RS aR oRS NORMAL. Antenna servos to 300 to 500 mils elevation. LOCK lamp .. illuminates. TEST FUNCTION INDICATOR lamp .. illuminates. RANGE dial 28 to 32 APPROACH. If excessive pause lock occurs at the lower portion of the search pattern, turn tracker 1 PAUSE LOCK AI3R14 (13, fig. 3-12) in 1/4 turn increments (not to exceed 1 full turn) until excessive pause locks are eliminated. Perform local system check. Repeat steps a through e. Insure simulator control group TARGET LEVEL is still 16 pa (table 3-20, steps 6 and 7). HIGH/ROTATE pushbutton .. release. ‘Auto-manual switch MAN TRACK. LOCAL SYSTEMS TEST switch OFF. STANDBY pushbutton press and release. Open receiver housing cover. SWEEP switch (1, fig. 2-10) ON. Close receiver housing cover. FUNCTION SWITCH . position 1 (OFF). Elevation handwheel rotate until ELEVATION mil indicator dial indicates 800 mils. NOTE If present, remove the jumper lead between the radar set group test set 28 V return jack (fig. 2-12) and chassis ground. Reconnect BCC cable to radar set group A3J3. Close and secure all drawers. RADIATE pushbutton press and release. NOTE Insure that all data eables and connectors which have been removed during checks are reconnected and are tight. NOTE After completing check procedures, notify BCC/PCP personnel that check procedures for HIPIR are completed and that the radar is ready for remote operation. 3-86T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Section Ill.1_ ALINEMENT PROCEDURES -14.1. General a. This paragraph contains alinement procedures at can be used to supplement the weekly check rocedures. Improper or less-than-optimum opera- on may be caused by poorly adjusted equipment ather than equipment malfunction. The alinement rocedures check whether adjustments can be eaked within given tolerances and if this cannot be one indicates corrective action. b. Tables 3-19 through 3-21 contain the alinement rocedures. All alinement procedure steps must be erformed in the sequence given. When the correc- ive procedure indicates the performance of fault solation or a replacement of a unit, make sure that ll controls are correctly set when returning to the finement procedure. ¢. The alinement procedures require organization- al maintenance personnel with assistance from an operator. At least two men are required for safety and convenience when performing the alinement procedures. Several steps in the alinement procedures require that the miniature coaxial con- nectors be removed or installed in the process of performing a procedure. Care must be taken to prevent damage to the miniature coaxial cable. Always use a 3/8-inch open-end wrench to loosen or tighten the retaining nut while holding the body of the connector to prevent rotating and flexing of the cable. Table $-19. Degeneration Loop Alinement Procedure 1 Radar Preconditions. a Radar .. radiate. NOTE Insure that antenna is at 400 mils elevation. & Auto-manual switch (34, fig. 2-1) MAN TRACK. @ Ranging switch (24, fig. 2-1) RANGING OFF. ad Coding switch (25, fig. 2-1) CODING OFF. 3-87™ 9—1430—533—12—1 an Table $-19. Degeneration Loop Alinement Procedure sie ee 2. Cheek Cavity Lock and Bridge Nulling. a Remove high and low frequency amplifier (5, fig. 1-2). b Adjust CAVITY SERVO ZERO ADS (6, fig. 2-9) 1/4 turn cew from fall ew limit. « Degeneration function SELECTOR switch (8, fig. 2-7) .. CAVITY XTAL. Perform interlock bypass procedure (table 8-16, step 1a) to open transmitter panel 3. CAVITY UNLOCK pushbutton (21, fig. 2-9) press for 3 seconds and release. Cavity tuning shaft (18, fig. 3-19) moe rotates and reverses directa when limits are reached. Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—-4 (VOL. V). f Disconnect W1P21 from cavity tuner assembly J1 (17, fig. 3-19) when degeneration functia MONITOR meter approaches a peak indication. a Manually tune cavity tuning shaft for a peak indication on degeneration function MONITOR meter. h Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch (11, fig. 2-8) position 9. t Adjust phase shifter (10, fig. 3-19) .. full eew. i Adjust phase shifter two turns ew. k Adjust CROSS COUPLING ADJ (8, fig. 2-9) until: ‘Transmitter test set FUNCTION meter (1, fig. 2-8) « 510 45 ua. L Adjust phase shifter green area. NOTE It may be necessary to repeat steps j through ! until a normal indication is obtained. If a normal indication is not obtained after phase shifter is fully ew, perform table 9-2, TM 9—1490—533—12-4 (VOL. ¥). m Degeneration function SELECTOR switch BRIDGE NULL. n Alternately adjust PH NULL and AMP NULL until: Degeneration function MONITOR meter... minimum indication in blee area. Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL V). °. Degeneration function SELECTOR switch (8, fig. 2-7) CAVITY XTAL. Connect W1P21 to cavity tuner assembly J1 (17, fig. 3-19). @ Slowly adjust CAVITY SERVO ZERO ADJ (6, fig. 2-9) until: Degeneration function MONITOR meter (4y fig. 2-7) indicates peak in orange, green or yellow area.7 TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table $-19. Degeneration Loop Alinement Procedure—Continued oy Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1480—533—12—4 (VOL. V) ‘Transmitter test set FUNCTION MONITOR: meter. green area. Disconnect W1P21 from cavity tuner assembly J1 (17, fig. 3-19). Adjust phase shifter for 25 ua. Connect W1P21 to cavity tuner assembly J1. Repeat step 2q until degeneration function MONITOR meter indicates peak in orange, green or yellow area and transmitter test set FUNCTION MONITOR meter is in green area, Re-adjust CAVITY SERVO ZERO ADS for peak indication on degeneration function MONITOR meter. 3. Check Isomodulator Bias. a ‘Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch (11, fig. 2-8) position 5. b Adjust ISOLATION MOD BIAS AD4J (4, fig. 3-19) cw or cew until a meter deflection is observed. @ Adjust ISOLATION MOD BIAS ADJ until: ‘Transmitter test set FUNCTION MONITOR meter 1, fig. 2-8) nulls in blue area. Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). ‘4 Check Monitor Amplifier Gain. « Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch position 6. b Adjust transmitter test set LEVEL ADS (7, fig. 2-8) until: ‘Transmitter test set FUNCTION MONITOR meter «. 16 pa. Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1430—593—12—4 (VOL. V). é Monitor amplifier MONITOR TEST pushbutton (2, fig. 2-9) press and hold. ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter (1, fig. 2-7) Adjust monitor amplifier GAIN ADJUST (10, fig. 2-9). Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). 27 to 29 pa. a MONITOR TEST pushbutton release.™ 9—1430—533—12—1 o - 3-90 Table 3-19. Degeneration Loop Alinement Procedure—Continued Correcting procadare Cheek Cross Coupling. ‘Transmitter noise switch (11, fig. 2-7) ... set to AM and hold. ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter .. 2 ya maximam. Adjust CROSS COUPLING ADJ (8, fig. 2-9). Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). Transmitter noise switch release. Check Master Oveillator Ripple. ‘Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch position 7. MONITOR TEST pushbutton (26, fig. 2-9) press and hold. ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter MONITOR TEST pushbutto ess than 15 ya. release. Check Power Amplifier Ripple Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch MONITOR TEST pushbutton .. ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter ‘Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch Install the high and low frequency amplifier drawer. position 8 press and hold. Jess than 20 ua. release. Check Isomodulator Short Adjust. Degeneration function SELECTOR switch (8, fig. 2-7) Degeneration function MONITOR meter (4, fig. 2-7) ‘Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch Adjust transmitter test set LEVEL ADJ (7, fig. 2-8) unti ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter ... 45 us. Loosen knurled and wing lock nuts and adjust isomodlt" short adjust (33, fig. 3-19) until a stable indication is on the TRANSMITTER NOISE meter. Repeat step 8. BRIDGE NULL. stable indication. position 14.7 T™ 9—1430—533—121 Table $-19. Degeneration Loop Alinement Procedure—Continued an ermal ndeton Corrective procedure ad ‘Loosen knurled and wing lock nuts and adjust isomodulator short adjust (83, fig. 3-19) until: TRANSMITTER NOISE meter null. NOTE It may be necessary to readjust the LEVEL ADJ one or more ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter in order to obtain the best null indi 8 for 45 ua indication on tion. Check Degeneration Loop. a Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch (11, fig. 2-8) position 12. b HF DISABLE and LF DISABLE pushbuttons (1 and 8, fig. 2-9) press and hold. « Adjust transmitter test set LEVEL ADJ (7, fig. 2-8) until: ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter (1, fig. 2-7) ‘50 ya. Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). ad LF DISABLE pushbutton (3, fig. 2-9) releast ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter Jess than 25 ya. Repeat steps 2k through n and, if necessary, perform table 9-2, ‘TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). @ HF DISABLE pushbutton (1, fig. 2-9) ‘TRANSMITTER NOISE meter release. Jess than 6 a. Perform table 9-2, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. V). Close and secure transmitter panel 3. Ranging switch (24, fig. 2-1) Coding switch (25, fig. 2-1) Transmitter test set SELECTOR switch RANGING ON. CODING ON. position 1. nee 3-91T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Ci Table $-20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure eS Sa Opraon so Sent epatet L Radar Preconditions. a LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) LOCAL. b Elevation handwheel (37, fig. 2-1) 1600 mils. e Radar standby. a Auto-normal switch (34, fig. 2-1) MAN TRACK. e TOJ switch (26, fig. 2-1) DISABLE. f Elevation handwheel .. 400 mils. o MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) .. ON. h Elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) released. i PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) OPERATE. é Radar radiate. NOTE Insure that antenna is at 400 mils elevation. k Elevation brake ... BRAKE. L PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH .. SAFE. m MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker OFF. If transmitter housing cover is left open for a long period of time, the triple IP chassis may be damaged due to excessive heat. NOTE Close all HIPIR drawers, compartment doors, and housing covers during normal radar operation to eliminate potential PAR rf interference. When it becomes necessary to open compartment doors, drawers, and housing covers and an abnormal indication is observed, request that the PAR be placed in STANDBY to determine if it is causing the abnormal indication. n Open transmitter housing cover. 0 Open receiver housing cover. 2. ‘Check EXERCISE SWITCH. a Simulator control group SPACE GATE switch (7, fig. 2-11) DISABLE. b Simulator control group TEST switch (8, fig. 2-11) position 2.” T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table $-20, Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure — Continued omens Nema indioion Corrective procedare 2c. Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH (10, fig. 2-11) ... slowly rotate through its 24 positions. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER (15, fig. 2-11) momentarily deflects upscale, then returns to blue area in each position and the 204B, 404B, SIDE 1, SIDE 2, CLUTTER and RANGE lamps (2,4,3,5,18 and 14, fig. 2-11) illuminates as shown below. NOTE Disregard the SPACE GATE lamp (1, fig. 2-11) indications, EXERCISE Lamp Indications Reamer 20DB SIDE1 SIDE2 | GLUTTER | RANGE Lamp Lamp Lamp Lamp Lamp All lamps are extinguished. x All lamps are extinguished. x Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). Simulator control group TEST switch position 1. Perform interlock by-pass procedure (table 3-15, step 4d) to open 300-vde power supply drawer. 3-93™ 9—1430—533—121 ow Table $.20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure—Continued Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH (1, fig. 2-12) ..... slowly rotate through its 4 positions. ‘Simulator control group FUNCTION METER momentarily deflects upese then returns to blue ares in each posit Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH position 1. Check +50-Vde Power Supply. Simulator control group TEST switch (8, fig. 2-11) .. Position 3. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER (15, fig. 2-11) . ren area. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). Simulator control group TEST switch position 4. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... green area. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). 4 Cheek jingle Sideband Adjust. a Simulator control group TEST switch position 5. ® Simulator control group TARGET LEVEL (11, fig. 2-11) fully ew. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER (1S, fig. 2-11) Jess than 7 pa. Alternately adjust BAL and PHASE ADJ (16, 17 fig. 2-11) a less than 7 na indication. NOTE If the meter pegs, readjust the TARGET LEVEL for an on sale indication. Continue adjusting TARGET LEVEL after each nallis attained until itis fully clockwise. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). 5. Check Target Levels. a Simulator control group TEST switeh (8, fig. 2-11) .. position 11. b Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH (10, fig. 2-11) ... position 4. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... green or yellow area. Replace simulator control group. 3-94T™ 9—1430—533—12-1 Table $20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure—Continued “ Nemetitietee — Garactive proendare Se Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH ... position 5. ‘Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... green area or higher. Replace simulator control group. a Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH ... . position 6. ‘Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... orange, green or yellow area. Replace simulator control group. @ Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH position 7. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... orange, green or yellow area. Replace simulator control group. t Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH ... position & Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... green or yellow area. Replace simulator control group. 6 Check Doppler Calibrate. a Simulator control group TEST switch (8, fig. 2-11) position 6. b Dual doppler amplifier MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons (3,4 fig. 2-10) .. press and hold. e Adjust simulator control group METER ADJ (9, fig. 2-11) until: ‘Simulator control group FUNCTION METER (IS, fig. 2-11) 16 ua. NOTE If the indication is unstable due to battery interference, request that the PAR be operated in the standby mode. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). L Cheek Target Level Adjust. a Simulator control group TEST switch .. position 7. Adjust simulator control group TARGET LEVEL unt Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ...... 16 ua. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons release. 3.95TM 9—1430—533—12—-1 cnt Table $-20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure—Continued 8. Cheek Clutter Level Adjust. a Simulator control group TEST switch position 9. b Adjust simulator control group CLUTTER LEVEL (13, fig. 2-11) until: Simulator control group FUNCTION METER 25 ua. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). 9. Cheek Interfering Targets. | Simulator control group TEST switch position 12. | Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... indication stabilizes between | 12 and 45 pa within 30 see. Replace simulator control group. 10. Check Interfering Target Modulation. Simulator control group TEST switch position 13. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER sweeps from below 15 yao above 35 ua. Replace simulator control group. : L. Cheek Pulse Rate 1. ; Simulator control group TEST switch position 14. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER sweeps in green area withia one minute. Replace simulator control group. 12. Check Pulse Rate 2. Simulator control group TEST switch position 15. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ...._stabilizes in greem ares withis one minute, Replace simulator control group. 13. Cheek Duty Cycle 1. Simulator control group TEST switch position 16. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER stabilizes in green area withis one minute. Replace simulator control group. 14. ‘Check Duty Cyele 2. Simulator control group TEST switch .. ‘Simulator control group FUNCTION METER position 17. stabilizes in green area withis \ ‘one minute. Replace simulator control group. i7 ™ 9—1430—533—12-1 Table $-20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure—Continued Corrective procedare 15, Cheek Elevation Amplifier Gain. Simulator control group TEST switch .. position 18. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER .... green area. Replace simulator control group. 16. ‘Check Azimuth Amplifier Gain. Simulator control group TEST switch . Simulator control group FUNCTION METER Replace simulator control group. position 19. green area. rt Check Spacegate. a Simulator control group TEST switch .. position 20. b SPACE GATE switch (7, fig. 2-11) ACTIVE, Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... sweeps from 0 ua to green or yellow area and then to 0 ya. Replace simulator control group. ‘Simulator control group FUNCTION METER when meter pointer passes through 30 to 36 ua on upswing, SPACE GATE lamp illuminates. Before pointer reaches orange area on downswing, SPACE GATE Jamp extinguishes. Adjust SPACE GATE LEVEL (6, fig. 2-11). Replace simulator control group. 18. ‘Cheek Antenna Rate. @ SPACE GATE switch (7, fig. 2-11) DISABLE. & Simulator control group TEST switch (8, fig. 2-11) position 21. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER (AS, fig. 2-11) ‘sweeps from 0 a to more than 16 va and then to 0 ya. NOTE ‘An abnormal indication (on alternate scans the meter deflection ‘will be down) will occur if the antenna has been manually moved in azimuth or elevation. Perform the following steps to correct antenna positioning. 3:97T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 oy Table $-20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure—Continued Release elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14). PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to OPERATE (1, fig. 214), MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to ON. Allow anteus| to slew to its designated positions (13, fig. 2-2). Set elevation brake to BRAKE position. PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE (1, fig. 2-14). MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to OFF (13, fig. 22. Insure that antenna is not manually moved for the remainde | of the checks. Replace simulator control group. Check Sean Buckoff. Simulator control group TEST switch (8, fig. 2-11) Simulator control group FUNCTION METER (AS, fig. 2-11) position 22. green area. Replace simulator control group. Check Buckoff Threshold. Simulator control group TEST switch .. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ...... green area. Replace simulator control group. 21. Cheek Wideband Con Sean. Simulator control group TEST switch ... Position 24. Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... green area. Replace simulator control group. 22, Cheek Comparator. a Simulator control group TEST switch b Dual doppler amplifier MAIN TEST and MAIN AGC SHORT pushbuttons (3 and 4, fig. 2-10) . position 6. press and hold. 3-987 TM 914305331: Table $20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure—Continued 2c, Adjust simulator control group METER ADJ (9, fig. 2-11) until: Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... 16 ya. NOTE If the indication is unstable due to battery interference, request that the PAR be operated in the standby mode. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). a Simulator control group TEST switch .. position 8. XMTR NOISE pushbutton (26, fig. 2-10) ... press and hold. fi Adjust simulator control group NOISE LEVEL (12, fig. 2-11) until: Simulator control group FUNCTION METER .... 16 ua, Replace simulator control group. a XMTR NOISE pushbutton .. release. h Adjust simulator control group METER ADS (9, fig. 2-11) until: Simulator control group FUNCTION METER ..... 45 ua. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). i XMTR NOISE pushbutton .. press and hold. i Adjust NOISE LEVEL until: FUNCTION METER ... 45 ua. Replace simulator control group. k MAIN AGC SHORT, MAIN TEST and XMTR NOISE pushbuttons release. L ‘TOS switch (26, fig. 2-1 enable. n ‘TOJ/BLANK switch (25, fig. 2-10) TOU. ” Adjust BLANKING THRESHOLD (10, fig. 3-16) 5 turns ew. 0 Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch (28, fig. 2-10) un... position 23. BR Adjust TOJ THRESHOLD (11, fig. 3-16) 5 turns cew. Receiver test set function meter (20, fig. 2-10) ... Ona. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—-4 (VOL. VI). 8-99TM 9—1430—533—12—1 o 229. 3-100 Table $-20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure—Continued ermal nition ' Corrective procedure Adjust TOJ THRESHOLD ew until: Receiver test set funetion meter .. THRESHOLD produces 20 increase in function meter indication. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). Record function meter indication for reference. Adjust TOJ THRESHOLD cew until: Receiver test set funetion meter ... indicates one-half the indication recorded in sep. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1490—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). Adjust NOISE LEVEL (12, fig. 2-11) until: Receiver test set function meter ddicates 15 ya greater than \dication in step s. NOTE Ifthe NOISE LEVEL control reaches the maximum ew limit before the above indication is obtained, leave the NOISE LEVEL control at maximum ew and adjust TOJ THRESHOLD ew until the function meter indication is 15 aa greater than the indication in step ». Adjust BLANKING THRESHOLD (10, fig. 3-16) cew until: Receiver test set function meter Opa. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). ‘TOJ/BLANK switch (25, fig. 2-10) BLANK. Adjust BLANKING THRESHOLD ew until: Receiver test set function meter ... Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). . TO. position 2. position 20. TOJ/BLANK switch ... Simulator control group TEST switch Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH (10, Receiver test set funetion meter (20, fig. 2-10) not less than 15 ya. Replace simulator control group.nr eR RP eR TM 9—1490—533—12—-1 Table $-20. Simulator Control Group Alinement Procedure—Continued Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH position 21. Receiver test set function meter not more than 10 ya. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH position 22. Receiver test set function meter not less than 35 ya. Perform table 14-5, TM 9—1490—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH position 23. ction meter Receiver test set f not more than 10 ya. Replace simulator control group. Simulator control group TEST switch .. Simulator control group EXERCISE SWITCH position 1. Close and secure transmitter housing cover. Receiver test set TEST FUNCTION switch (28, fig. 2-10) position 1. Close and secure receiver housing cover. Elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14 release. PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) OPERATE. MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2+ ON. Table 21, Tracker 1 and 2 Alinement Procedure oe Nettie arc prentare Radar and Tracker Preconditions. LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) .. LOCAL. Elevation handwheel (37, fig. 2-1) . 1600 mils. Radar standby. PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) OPERATE. Elevation handwheel 400 mils. MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) ON. TEST LOCAL/REMOTE switch (20, fig. 2-1) TEST LOCAL. ADP/HPI switch (19, fig. 2-1) HPI. Auto-manual switch (34, fig. 2-1) MAN TRACK. Radar radiate. 3-101TH 9—1430—533—12—-1 CT] Omran uy Nett pa 1 Cont. NOTE Insure that the antenna is at 400 mils elevation. k Perform interlock by-pass procedure (table 3-15, step 4d) to open 300-vde power supply drare, L Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH (1, fig. 2-12) .... position 1. m ‘Tracker 1 FINE LONG SWEEP ZERO ASR7 (22, fig. 3-12) ..... 25 turns ew. n ‘Tracker 1 SPEED METER ZERO A8R29 (18, fig. 3-12) 25 turns cew. °. ‘Tracker 1 TGT VEL SLOPE A8Ré2 (19, fig. 3-12) 25 turns ew. Pp Tracker 1 INHIBIT THRESHOLD A5R13 *(AD)! (14, fig. 8-12) . 25 turns ew. or Tracker 1 INHIBIT THRESHOLD A1R9 *(AE)! (11, fig. 8-12) .. .. 25 turns cow. @ Tracker 1 RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A17R19 (6, fig. 3-12) 25 turns ecw. 2. Check Recycle Zero. Lock switch (5, fig. 2-1) LOCK DISABLE. SIGNAL STRENGTH meter (4, fig. 2-1) lower edge of red ares. Adjust RECYCLE ZERO A14R23 (8, fig. 9-12). Perform table 15-9, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VID. 3. ‘Check Pause Lock Rat a Lock awiteh . NORMAL. & Speed-designate switch (23, fig. 2-1) . NORMAL. LOCK lamp (3, fig. 2-1) .. flashes 1 to 4 times in 15 seconds. Adjust PAUSE lock A13R14 (13, fig. 3-12) ew to increase past lock rate and cow to decrease pause lock rate. Perform table 15-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). 4 Check Speedgate Lock. a Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH (1, fig. 2-12) ..... position 6. LOCK lamp (3, fig. 2-1) .. illuminates Refer to appendix D for serial number effectivity. 3-102TH 91430533121 Table $-21. Tracker 1 and 2 Alinement Procedure—Continued Corrective procedure a Adjust FINE LONG SWEEP ZERO A8R7 (22, fig. 3-12) cew in one-turn increments until the LOCK lamp illuminates and SIGNAL STRENGTH meter indicates green area or higher. Perform table 3-20, steps 6 and 7. FINE LONG SWEEP ZERO A8R7 .. Lock switch (5, fig. 2-1) two turns cew. . LOCK DISABLE then NORMAL. extinguished. LOCK lamp ... NOTE It will be necessary to repeat steps b and c until a normal indication is obtained. If a normal indication is not obtained after 25 turns cew of FINE LONG SWEEP ZERO ‘ASR7, replace Tracker 1. Slowly readjust FINE LONG SWEEP ZERO A8R7 ew until: LOCK lamp SIGNAL STRENGTH meter (4, fig. 2-1) Adjust FINE TARGET SWEEP ZERO ASRT (22, fig. 9-12) two additional turns ew. TARGET SPEED meter (8, fig. 2-1) 1500. Adjust TGT VEL SLOPE A8RA2 (19, fig. 9-12) cew. Perform table 15-4, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH (1, fig. 2-12) Lock switch illuminates. green area. position 5. LOCK DISABLE, then NORMAL. illuminates. green area, LOCK lamp SIGNAL STRENGTH meter . NOTE If the doppler tone is not audible, perform table 18-1, sheet 16, TM 9~1490—583—12—4 (VOL. IX). TARGET SPEED switch (22, fig. 2-1) X1 and hold. TARGET SPEED meter 150 to 200. Adjust SPEED METER ZERO A8R29 (18, fig. 3-12) cw. Perform table 15-4, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). TARGET SPEED switch . release. 3-103TH 9—1430—$3312—1 o Table $21. Tracker 1 and 2 Alinement Procedure—Continued Operation | LJ Normal edition Corrective procedure 5. Check Manual Speed. a Speed-designate switch (23, fig. 2-1) .. MANUAL SPEED. b Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH (1, fig. 2-12) Position 6. TARGET SPEED meter (8, fig. 2-1) .. 1400 to 1600. Adjust MANUAL ZERO A8R19 (23, fig. 3-12) cew if TARGET SPEED meter is less than 1400 and cw if more than 1600. Perform table 15-4, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). Slowly adjust MANUAL ZERO A8R19 until: SIGNAL STRENGTH meter (4, fig. 2-1) ... maximum indication in gree. area. Replace Tracker 1. Check Auto Designate. a Speed-designate switch (23, fig. 2-1) .. AUTO DESIGNATE. b Lock switch (5, fig. 2-1) LOCK DISABLE. TARGET SPEED meter 1400 to 1600. Adjust SHORT SWEEP ZERO A8RIG6 (located directly abore MANUAL SPEED ZERO A8R19) cew if TARGET SPEED meter indicates less than 1400 and ew if more than 1600. Perform table 15-4, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). a ‘Check Noise Balance. a Speed-designate switch . NORMAL. b Lock switch NORMAL. « Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH (I, fig. 2-12) .... position 4. LOCK lamp (3, fig. 2-1) illuminates. Replace simulator control group. a Lock switeh LOCK HOLD. e Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH .. position 1. does not drift out of 30010 1200 range within 15 seconds. Adjust NOISE BALANCE A10R23 (7, fig. 8-12) cew if drift is upscale and ew if drift is downscale. Set the lock switch to NORMAL and repeat steps c through ¢ Replace Tracker 1. TARGET SPEED meter (8, fig. 2-1) 3-104v TM 9—1430—$33—12—-1 Table $21. Tracker 1 and 2 Alinement Procedure—Continued ‘Sep one Normal indication Corrective prvodors 8. Check Side Lobe Inhibit. a Lock switch .. NORMAL. b Radar set group test set EXERCISE SWITCH position 16. LOCK lamp .. illuminates. Perform table 18-1, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. IX). 6 Adjust INHIBIT THRESHOLD ADJ A5R13 *(AD)! (11.1, fig. 3-12) eew or INHIBIT THRESH- OLD ADJ A1R9 *(AE)! (11, fig. 3-12) ew until: LOCK INHIBIT ASDS1 lamp (12, fig. 3-12) ..... just extinguishes. Perform table 15-11, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). LOCK DISABLE then NORMAL. a Lock switch LOCK lamp .. illuminates and extinguishes. Adjust INHIBIT THRESHOLD ADJ A5R13 *(AD)! 1 turn cow or INHIBIT THRESHOLD ADJ A1R9 *(AE)! 1 turn ew. Repeat step d. Replace Tracker 1. e Slowly adjust INHIBIT THRESHOLD ADJ A5R13 *(AD)! ew or INHIBIT THRESHOLD ADJ A1R9 *(AE)! cew until the LOCK lamp illuminates. f Lock switeh .. LOCK DISABLE then NORMAL. LOCK lamp .. illuminates. Adjust INHIBIT THRESHOLD ADJ A5R13 *(AD)! one-half turn ew or INHIBIT THRESHOLD ADJ A1R9 *(AE)! one-half turn cew. Repeat step f. 0 Lock switeh .. LOCK DISABLE. Ah Elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) BRAKE, é PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) SAFE. i Open receiver housing cover. k XMTR NOISE pushbutton (26, fig. 2-10) ... press and hold. L Lock switeh .. NORMAL. LOCK lamp . illuminates and extinguishes. Perform table 15-11, TM 9—1430—538—12—4 (VOL. VII). m XMTR NOISE pushbutton .. release. ” Close and secure receiver housing cover. ‘Weler to appendix D for serial number effectivity. 3-105T™ 9—1430—533—12—-1 ow me Re oR Pe 23 3-106 ermal nnn Corrective procedare Cheek Range Functions Receiver functions selector switch (17, fig. 2-1) RANGE NULL. Lock switch (5, fig. 2-1) LOCK DISABLE. ‘Speed-designate switch (23, fig. 2-1) AUTO DESIGNATE. Tracker 1 switeh $5 (20, fig. 3-12) .. RANGE PHASE TEST. Tracker 1 RANGE TEST pushbutton S4 (14, fig. 3-12) ‘Tracker 1 RANGE PHASE ADJ A16R9 (2, fig. 3-12) .. indication. RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter (15, fig. 2-1)... null. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). RANGE TEST pushbutton release. Lock switch .. NORMAL. Speed-designate switch NORMAL. Radar set group test set EXERCISE switch (1, fig. 2-12) position 3. Ranging switch (24, fig. 2-1 RANGING OFF. Auto-manual switch (34, fig. 2-1) AUTO TRACK. Adjust tracker 2 RANGE ZERO A14R18 (2, fig. 3-13) until: RANGE indicator dial (2, fig. 2-3) O+2KM. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI). Ranging switch RANGING ON. Lock switch .. LOCK DISABLE, then NORMAL. Allow RANGE indicator dial (2, fig. 2-8) to stabilize. Adjust tracker 1 RANGE ADJUST A16R18 (17, fig. 9-12) until: RANGE indicator dial 30 KM APPROACH. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). Radar set group test set REC TARGET pushbutton (7, fig. 2-12) . press and hold. RANGE indicator dial 30 + 2KM RECEDE. Adjust RANGE ZERO A14R18 for one-half the range error referenced to 30 KM. Release REC TARGET pushbutton and repeat steps q and r until range indication is between 28 and KM in APPROACH and RECEDE; ie., if RANGE indicator dial indicates 40 KM RECEDE, adjust A14R18 for 35 EM RECEDE. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). release. REC TARGET pushbuttonre RR SE T™ 9—1430—533—12-1 Table $-21. Tracker 1 and 2 Alinement Procedure—Continued Corrective procedure LOCK DISABLE. AUTO DESIGNATE. press and hold. ‘35 to 45 KM RECEDE. Lock switch Speed-designate switch ‘Tracker 1 RANGE TEST pushbutton S4 (14, fig. 3-12) RANGE indicator di NOTE If AUTO RANGE DES A9R25 (16, fig. 8-12) has been adjusted during integrated systems check, do not readjust at this time. Otherwise adjust AOR25 for 40 KM RECEDE. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). RANGE TEST pushbutton release. Tracker 1 30 KM switch S2 (1, fig. 3-12) press and hold. RANGE indicator dial 28 to 32 KM APPROACH. Adjust RANGE DES A9R11 (3, fig. 3-12) for 30 KM AP- PROACH indication. Replace Tracker 1. Lock switch NORMAL. Tracker 1 switch S5 (20, fig. 3-12) KICKOUT PHASE TEST. RECEIVER FUNCTIONS meter (15, fig. 2-1) .... blue area. Adjust KICKOUT AMPLITUDE NULL A9R36 (4, fig. 3-12) and KICKOUT PHASE NULL A17R34 (15, fig. 3-12) for minimum indication. FINE ADJ pushbutton (16, fig. 2-1) press and hold. KICKOUT AMPLITUDE NULL A9R36 and KICKOUT PHASE NULL A17R34 continue to adjust for minimum indication. FINE ADJ pushbutton . release. LOCK lamp illuminated. Perform table 15-12, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. Vil). 30 KM owitch S2 (1, fig. 3-12) release. Lock switch LOCK DISABLE. Adjust RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A17R19 (5, fig. 3-12) 25 turns ew. 40 KM switch S3 (21, fig. 3-12) press and hold. 3-106.1™ 9—1430—533—12—1 a Table $-21. Tracker 1 and £ Alinement Procedure—Continued LO onion Normal icon Corrective procedure ae. When RANGE indicator dial indicates 40 KM, set lock switch to NORMAL. LOCK lamp illuminates and extinguishes: Replace Tracker 1. of. Adjust RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A17R19 in one-turn increments cew until: LOCK lamp just illuminates. Replace Tracker 1. ag. Lock switch LOCK DISABLE, then NORMAL. LOCK lamp illuminates. Adjust RANGE KICKOUT THRESH A17R19 one-half tn cow. Repeat step ag. ah, 40 KM switch $3 release. ai. 30 KM switch S2 (1, fig. 3-12) press and hold. LOCK lamp. ai. 80 KM switch (1, fig. 3-12) ak, Speed-designate switch (23, fig. 2-1) al Auto-manual switch (34, fig. 2-1) MAN TRACK. 10. ‘Check Con Sean Buckoff. a Remove transmitter housing cover. b Simulator control group TEST switch (8, fig. position 22. 6 Elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) release. a PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) OPERATE. e Elevation handwheel (37, fig. 2-1) 1500 mils. f MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. OFF. 0 Allow three minutes for motor generator to coast to a stop. h Adjust BUCK OFF THRESHOLD A18R3 (1, fig. 3-18) 25 turns ew. i Auto-manual switch (34, fig. 2-1) AUTO TRACK. j Radar set group test set FUNCTION SWITCH (4, fi position 7. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER (3, fig. 2-12) Ons. Adjust SCAN BUCK OFF A3R1S5 (10, fig. 3-12) for 0# indication. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VI}. k Auto-manual switch MAN TRACK. ——+ 3-106.2= ere =P re DAR os TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table $-21. Tracker 1 and 2 Alinement Procedure—Continued rae Neral indeton Corrective procdare ‘Cheek Buckoff Threshold. Simulator control group TEST SWITCH Position 23. Adjust BUCK OFF THRESHOLD A18R3 25 turns cew. Auto-manual switch AUTO TRACK. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER approximately 9ua. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). Adjust BUCK OFF THRESHOLD A18R3 ew until: Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER decreases to 0 ya. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). Slowly adjust BUCK OFF THRESHOLD A18R3 cew un’ Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER. just deflects to approximately 9 us. Auto-manual switch (85, fig. 2-1) .. MAN TRACK. MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) ON. Elevation handwheel (37, fig. 2-1) 400 mils. Elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) .. BRAKE. Cheek Wideband Con Sean Gs Remove receiver housing cover. Disconnect W1P20 from frequency converter J8 (12, fig. 3-17) and connect to receiver IF signal generator NO OUTPUT jack J4 (2, fig. 3-17). Simulator control group TEST SWITCH (8, fig. 2-11) position 24. Elevation brake release. Elevation handwheel 1500. MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker OFF. Allow three minutes for motor generator to coast to a stop. Auto-manual switch AUTO TRACK. Radar set group test set FUNCTION METER (3, fig. 2-12) 22 to 25 pa. Adjust WB CONSCAN GAIN A1R14 (3, fig. 3-13) for 22 to 25 ya indication. Perform table 15-10, TM 9—1430—533—12—4 (VOL. VII). Auto-manual switch MAN TRACK. MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker ON. Elevation handwheel 400 mils. Elevation brake BRAKE. 3-1106.3TH 9—1430—533—12—-1 ) Table $-21. Tracker 1 and 2 Alinement Procedure—Continued Operation so Seite gant 12m. Simulator control group TEST SWITCH position 1. n Re-install transmitter housing cover. °. Disconnect W1P20 from receiver IF signal generator NO OUTPUT jack J4 and connet frequency converter J3. Pp Re-install receiver housing cover. | Section Ill.2. SILENT MODE SYSTEM REDEPLOYMENT CHECKS, 3-14.2 General 3-143. Preparation This section contains information pertaining to When directed to prepare the HIPIR for thesilst the silent mode system redeployment checks. These mode redeployment checks by the BCC or PC? checks are performed by the BCC/PCP personnel to _ personnel, perform table 3-22. establish integrated system confidence following emplacement without placing system radars in the radiate mode. Table 3-22. Silent Mode Redeployment Check Preparation energized to false radiate condition. WARNING } Insure all personnel are clear of the antenna area before performing step 2 below. 2 PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH OPERATE. 214 1 3 LOCAL-REMOTE switch REMOTE. a | a 4. MASTER OSC ASSIGNED FREQUENCY 246 B switeh .. record current setting and set to ASSIGN FREQ. 1. | 5. Report completion of HIPIR preparation to BCC/PCP personnel and await further instruction. 3-106.412 Section IV. ILLUSTRATIONS I 3-15. General IHIPIR. The illustrations are presented in a logical order for easy reference to the controls, indicators, ‘This section contains the illustrations necessary for operator and organizational maintenance of the __‘€st Points, and adjustments. Pinre 8-1. | _Receiver exhaust vent ‘2 Transmitter set group door exhaust vent Radar set group exhaust vent 4-Motor generar intake and exhaust vent ; Radar set group exhaust vent, 2 Liquid cooler intake vent 6 Radar set group intake vent. 3 Transmitter set group intake vent Pedestal intake vent 4--Blevation drivemotor air vent plug Exterval radar (left xide)—air intakex and exhanaty. Figure 3-2. External radar (right site)—uir intuhex una eshanats, 3-107TM 9—1490—533—12—1 MS 313711 1—ADJ-100 control 2-ADY +250 control 3-ADJ +160 control 4-ADI +63 control Figure 33. Tranamitterlove-voltage power aupply—adjuatments LN L_ LJ O® Negative terminal (ease terminal) of C4 2Test point 1 Figure 3-4. $00., 90, 28-Vde power supply—test points. 3-108‘Tw: 9—1430-$33—12-1 . . ‘ MI 646444 1 2Junetion of R22 and RO ‘SJunetion of R3 and RA 4-Switeh $1 sRi6 eoRse 1 8—RANGE BAL jacks 9—AZIMUTH BAL jacks ‘Figures. Range nd arimuth control amplifier—test points and adjustments, ‘109TH9—1490—$33—12—1‘Tm 9—1490—639—12—-1 00 oon C4 C4 sc co a4 MI 64647A 1—Junetion of R12 and R13, 2a aoe Re S-ELEV BAL jacks 6—TOF BAL jacks Re 8-Switeh $1 ‘9 Junction of Ré and RS Figure 3-8, Elevation and time-offlight control amplifier—test points and adjustments, annaTM 9—1430—$33—12—1 1—CALIBRATION SELECTOR ewiteh 6-SENSITIVITY EQUAL coatrol 2-CALIBRATE meter ‘1TEST 38 S-BALANCE ADS control 8—QUADRATURE ADS control ‘S—CALIBRATE ewiteh MI 646494 1—Res (balance adjust) 8-BREAK LOCK lamp 2—MEM SEN contro! 10—ELEV SEARCH HIGH LIM control SCHIGHROTATE pushbutton 11—LOWNARROW pushbutton 4800 DEG SEARCH control 12—ELEV SEARCH LOW LIM control IEDIUM/WIDE PUSHBUTTON 13 ELEV SEARCH MED LIM control 6290 DEG SEARCH control 14—108EC ADJ control ‘AZIMUTH SEARCH pushbutton 15—2SEC ADI control ©-8.288C ADI contro! 16—Junetion R24, R25 ‘Figure 3-10, Redor et controt—controls and indicators. anaTM9—1490—533—12—1 Foy 2 ; 4 59 7278 9 10 1 —Junetion of J1-L and 09 2—ANG RATE awiteh ‘3-180 oR ooRET eR cm on e-Riot 10-R106 NOR 12 R1e 18—Pushbutton 81 Figure $-t1, Asimuth-elevation control amplifer—controls, teat points, and adjustments,ce T 91490533121 24: 23 a0 22 meer 2400 uW 21 20: —— 18: ce MI 646518 12-LOCK INHIBIT ASDS1 agee muvee 2 18_-PAUSE LOCK AISRI4 2-RANGE PHASE ADJ A16R9 TCRANGE TEST pushbutton 84 Patera diaesapslt 15—KICKOUT PHASE NULL AIR 4-KICKOUT AMPLITUDE NULL ASR96 IGCAUTO RANGE DES ASRIS: S—RANGE KICKOUT THRESH AI7RI9 TCRANOB ADS Algnis 6 RECYCLE DISABLE pushbutton 81 18—SPEED METER ZERO ASR20 ‘7—NOISE BALANCE A10R23 18—TCT VEL SLOPE AgRA2 ‘8-RECYCLE ZERO AlAReS. Boseka Be ene 2140 KM switch 88 ae ecae ue one ee . ‘22—FINE LONG SWEEP ZERO ASRT 25 HIRE THR EEO ADT Re ee) '23-MANUAL ZERO A8R19 (bottom variable resistor) 11,1—INHIBIT THRESHOLD ADJ ASR18 *(AD)! ee aanis Figure 3.12, Tracker 1—controls, indicators, test points, and adjustments, "Rater to appendix D for serial number effectivity. a‘TM 91430833121 Fier 28. Tracker $—odjatments a6ea MI 69627 1-6.3V ADJ PED 2-6.3V ADJ CONSOLE Figure 3-14, 6.3-Vde power supply *(N)'—adjustments. 1-6.8V ADS contro! 2-6.3V ADI coatrol te power supplies *(M)'—edjustments, 3° 2 1 ‘MI 70981 1-R36 aR 3-R57 Figure $-14.2. ~100-, 150, 260-Vde power supply *(T)'—edjustmenta, Rafer to appendix D for serial number effectivity. TM 9—1490—539—12—1 7TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 A-SWEEP ADJ control ‘1—PHASE ADS control ‘2-MOTOR SPEED ADJ control S-BAL J control R7 S-BAL 1 control RT 9—BAL Zeontrol RSS 4 REPELLER V ADJ control 10—BLANKING THRESHOLD contro! 5—SIDE REJECT control 11—TOJ THRESHOLD control 6—MAIN REJECT control 12—BAL 2eontrol RSS Figure 416. Raulur receiver tayper section) —udjuntments "Rafer to appendix D for serial number effectivity. auscw Tm 9—1430—533—12—1 ass 7. a 3 =. tone MI 646568 1—DOPPLER ADJ control 8.1—Waveguide mounting bracket screws, 2—NO OUTPUT jack 8.2—Delay line awitch 8—OUTPUT LO jack ‘9—Cavity contro! 4—OUTPUT HI jack 10—Connector W1P21 5—REF OUTPUT NO. 2 jack ‘1—Connector W1P19_ 6—REF OUTPUT NO. 1 jack 12—Connector W1P20_ ‘1—OUTPUT NO. 1 jack ‘18—Receiver test set S_OUTPUT NO. 2 jack Figure $17. Radar receiver (lower section)—controls, test points, and adjustments 3119 GoogTM9—1430—$33—12—1 1-FIL TEST meter 2-FIL TEST switch 3-HI VOLT TEST meter 4-HI VOLT TEST switch ‘5—Cable connector W1P2 6—Cable connector W10P2 ‘7—Cable connector W12P2 8Connector W152 9Cable connector W13P2 10—Cable connector W1P6 11—Cable connector A7P1 12-Cable connector A7P2 MI 646570 13-PA teat adapter 14—MO test adapter 18—Cable connector A20P4 16—Cable connector A20P3 Figure 3-18, High-voltoge power supply area—controls, indicators, and adjustments, 3-120 av 3435 1 2 3 (SEE NOTE) 24 1—XTAL BAL JACK 2-IONIZATION TEST switch 3—CODE BIAS VOLT jack 4—ISOLATION MOD BIAS ADJ 5—CODE BIAS ADJ 6-ISOLATION MOD 1 jack 7—GRD jack 8-RADIATE INTLK OPEN IND lamp 9-RADIATE INTLK RESET pushbutton 10—Phase shifter 11—OUTPUT NO. 1 jack 12-OUTPUT NO. 2 jack 13-REF OUTPUT jack 14—NO OUTPUT jack 15—-POWER switch 16-ION PROBE TEST SWITCH 17—Cavity plug A731 ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 1s 14 13 NOTE: REFER TO APPENDIX D FOR SERIAL NUMBER EFFECTIVITY. (SEE NOTE) Mi 64656E 19~Degeneration-block connector A6J1 20—Loeal oscillator attenuator 21—Local oscillator tuning shaft 22-Connector J1 for local oscillator ‘23—Degeneration-block connector AGJ2 24—Input cavity 25—Idler cavity ‘26—-Output cavity 27—Are detector crystal attenuator 28-Connector A7J1 (rear) 29-Connector A7J4 (front) ‘30—Power amplifier collector test point ‘81—Master oscillator tuning control 32-DC2J1 33—Isomodulator short adjust 34—W11P1 (rear) ‘35—W9PI (front) Figure 3-19. Rf transmitter assembly, ferrite switch control and power supply— controls, indicators, and adjustments. 3.21™ 9—1430—533—12—-1 qa 5 4 Mi 64659 1—Sensitivity meter 2_Frequency indicator 3-FREQUENCY—MC control 4—RF INPUT connector 5-METER SENSITIVITY control Figure 3-20, Waremeter test wet—contrals and indicators Alened Bwiich Potion Frequency va 1 [os Ta) 2 0 1 On On | O se a 2 ort On | an 3. On On On dal 4. ott on | BE o 5. On ot | o: 2 a 6 ort oft | Be 2] 7 On Ott | Oo ga a 8. Off Off | Oo Bw 9 On on | of] aseseTarwies |e fo t350 on oo to 11. f= +525 On On | off) mecrmcy 12, t= +700 oft On | off 13. f= +87.5 On ont | on) 14 f= +105.0 ont ont | ot 15. f= 4122.5 On oft | of) ‘MI 646604 Figure 3-21. Master oscillator frequency correlation chart. 3122TM9—1490—533—12—1 ‘QRn a neo Une RED ve. nD 7 ve RED RW A-LINE VOLT, master oscillator BEAM VOLTAGE, power amplifier BEAM VOLTAGE, power amplifier PILAMENT VOLTAGE, and high-voltage power supply test set HI VOLT TEST meters 2-LV PWR SUPPLIES and degeneration power supply MONITOR meters ‘3-RECEIVER FUNCTIONS and degeneration function MONITOR meters 4-RP POWER OUTPUT and FORWARD RF POWER metere S_NOISE and TRANSMITTER NOISE meters REFLECTED RF POWER meter ‘SIGNAL STRENGTH meter ‘8—Tranamitter test set FUNCTION MONITOR, receiver test set, simulator control group FUNCTION METER and, £126, £60, +100 vde power supply VOLTAGE MONITOR meters 9_Radar set group test set FUNCTION MONITOR meter 10—-High-voltage power supply tet set PIL TEST meter Figure 3.22, Meter colored arcas, 3-12310 TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Section L REPAIR PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS, AND EQUIPMENT 41. General damaged, or otherwise unserviceable, providing Repair parts, special tools, and equipment are insued to the using organization for operating and maintaining the IHIPIR. 4-2. Repair Parts Repair parts are supplied to the using organization for replacement of those parts that become worn, replacement of these parts is within their scope. TM 9—1430—533—U4P is the authority for requisitioning replacement parts for the IHIPIR. 4-3. Special Tools and Test Equipment 1 ‘The special tools and test equipment required for organizational maintenance of the IHIPIR are listed in chapter 3. Section Il, SERVICE UPON RECEIPT - GENERAL I 43.1. Scope a. When a new or reconditioned IHIPIR is first received by the using organization, itis the responsi- bility of the officer-in-charge to determine whether the materiel has been properly prepared for serv- ice, and to insure that it is in condition to perform ite assigned mission when placed in service. For this Purpose, a visual inspection will be made of all major components, assemblies, subassemblies, and accessories to make sure that they are present, properly assembled, secured, and clean. Equipment records will be checked to determine that the major item has been correctly adjusted and lubricated. }, This chapter presents general and detailed services to be performed upon receipt of each THIPIR. Service upon receipt depends upon the level of preshipment processing, which is explained in paragraph 4-3.3. 4-3.2. General Service Procedures a. TM 88~T50 lists the applicable forms, records, and reports to be used for inspection. Check the serial number of the IHIPIR with the number recorded in the logbook. Examine the log- book for the IHIPIR to determine the general maintenance background of the materiel. . Check all tags attached to the materiel for information pertaining to lubrication required be- fore the adjustment of parts. Check the tags, or other indicators of used or reconditioned equip- ment, for any changes. Immediately transfer to the system logbook and appropriate manuals all the information found on such tags or indicators. c. Make certain that all hardware is secure, cabling not frayed, and cable conductors not exposed. d. Make sure that all major component parts are present. Check to insure that leveling jacks are present and in good condition. Look for missing or loose bolts, screws, and rivets. Check the shielding ‘and ground connections. Make sure the nameplates ‘are present and secured in their proper places. e. Check all items of equipment to determine whether they are in good operating condition. Check to determine that all exterior surfaces are intact and properly assembled, noting excessive ‘grease, oil, or foreign matter that might interfere with proper operation. f. Visual checks of the equipment give an indi- cation of its condition. Steps (1) through (23) below list these checks. Any deficiencies noted should be corrected before operation of the equip- ment. (1) Check the materiel against the accom- panying lubrication orders for proper lubrication. (2) Make sure that sealing is complete on all sealed parts of the equipment. (3) Check all indexes, scales, division and nameplates, warning, danger, and caution plates to see that they are clear and easy to read. (4) Look for bare spots or damaged finish to see if any unprotected metal surfaces are exposed to corrosion or rust. Det e whether a touchup: or complete refinishing job should be accomplished. onT™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 (5) Inspect movable metal parts such as bear- ings, hinges, sliding surfaces, and latches to deter- mine whether they are clean, properly lubricated, and free from rust and foreign matter. (6) Look for moisture or rust producing conditions. (1) Check the service tags of fire extinguishers for current servicing. (8) Make sure flammable liquids are in author- ized containers only. (9) Look for excessive or uneven wear, play, or backlash in geartrains, bearing surfaces, dials, and knobs. (10) Check the contacts of connectors for looseness, corrosion, or dirt. (11) Look for solder filings, stray bits of solder, and cold-solder joints. (12) See that the solder connections are not bulky with excess solder but are neat, smooth and shiny, and coated with anti-fungus varnish. (13) Inspect all the insulation for signs of dis- coloration, carbonization, mildew, or fungus growth. (14) See that there is no chafing, or possibility of chafing, of the insulation. (15) Look for bent, broken, loose, or missing contacts on plugin components. Make sure that the contacts are clean. (16) Remove all the dry batteries from equip- ment not in use. (17) Check the capacitors for evidence of heat- ing (discoloration, swelling, cracked, or melted wax). (18) Check the resistors for discoloration, cracks, breaks, and signs of overheating. 10 (19) Look for indications of burned, pitted, or corroded contacts on switches, relays, and circuit breakers. Check the contacts for cleanliness. Make sure the switch detents have a positive mechanical action. (20) Ceramic parts should be clean and without, cracks or breaks. (21) Check the wiring and cabling for proper support where required. Runs should be short and have only enough slack to relieve stress on leads. (22) Examine the wires near terminals for frayed or loose strands that can cause shorts. (23) Visually inspect the lenses, prisms, reticles, and windows to make sure that they are free of scratches, pits, dirt, and chips which would inter- fere with the optical performance of the equip: ment. Any breakdown or excessive discoloration of cement between elements of the compound lenses which affects optical performance in the field is cause for rejection of the instrument. Do not bese rejection on the lack of reflection-reducing costing for the optical elements of instruments already in the field. There must be no parallax, abnormal, or double vision. If errors cannot be brought into specified tolerances as determined by the system alinement requirements, the optical instrument is considered unserviceable. &. Remove the tape from all glass surfaces, such as meter windows, reflectors, instrument dials, lights, and windows over cathode-ray tubes. ‘h. Remove the sealing tape trom vents, doors, covers, and other tape-sealed areas. Section lil. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF THE IHIPIR: 4-3.3. General Service upon receipt of the IHIPIR depends up- on whether it has been processed for overseas, extended storage, or use within 30 days by the using organization. The level at which an item is shipped is clearly marked on it. The main levels of processing for shipment are presented in subpara- graphs a through c below. a. Level A military package provides preserva- tion and packaging for adequate protection against corrosion, deterioration, and physical damage dur- ing shipment, handling, indeterminate storage, and world-wide redistribution. b. Level B limited military package furnishes preservation and packaging for adequate protection against corrosion, deterioration, and physical dam- age during multiple domestic shipments, handling, and covered storage. a2 cc, Level C minimum military package prepares for preservation and packaging for adequate protec- tion against corrosion, deterioration, and physical damage during shipment from the supply source to the first receiving activity for immediate use. The supplier’s commercial practice will be accepted when such practice meets the requirements of level C. 4-34, Service Upon Receipt of the IHIPIR Refer to paragraphs 4-3.1 and 4-3.2 for general service-upon-receipt information. In addition, the procedures listed in subparagraphs a through / be- low must be performed upon receiving the IHIPIR. a. Trailer. Refer to TM 9-2330—235-14 for service upon receipt of the M390 trailer. 0. Motor-Generator Assembly. Remove the pro- tective tape, if any, from the cover. Remove the27 over by releasing the snap fasteners along the vottom edges. Remove the desiccant units and ecuring tape. Any barrier material used with the nits for shipping purposes should be removed. Re- sove the humidity indicator on or near the motor. f the motors are shockmounted but have been ecured for shipment, remove the securing devices nd place the motors in the shockmounted position. teplace the cover and secure it in the locked posi- ion with the snap fasteners. ¢. Radar Set Group. All chassis within the con- ‘ole should be locked in their respective positions with the turnlock studs on the individual panels. Sheck the cover locking device for proper opera- ion. Remove the protective tape from the dials and knobs. Remove the desiccant units and associ- ated packaging material located near the motor area. Remove the humidity indicator on or adjacent to the inside area of the console unit cover. 4. Radar Set Group Exterior. If the electrical connections are taped, remove the tape from the exposed ends of the cables, harnesses, plugs, cable openings, sockets, receptacles, terminals, junction boxes, and electrical openings. Remove the secur- ing wire from the ground rod attached to the con- sole exterior. Do not confuse securing wire with the' heavy ground wire attached to the rod. If the metal surfaces are preserved with oil or grease, re- move excessive amounts. ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 e. Pedestal. Remove the barrier material and desiccant in the conical section of the pedestal blower area. Remove the humidity indicator fixed to the lower inside rim of the blower access port frame. The humidity indicator might be located in some.other position within the blower area, but is always as far away as possible from the desiccant. f. Azimuth Mil Ring Indicator. Remove any tape or cotton covering the mil ring indicator. & Elevation Mil Indicator. Remove any tape or cotton covering the mil indicator. Remove any pad- ding between the mil indicator and the elevation head assembly. h. Telescope Mount. Remove any padding or tape covering the telescope mount. i. Fire Extinguisher. Remove the fire extin- tinguisher from the packaging container, Remove all tape and padding material. i. Protective Covers. Remove the protective covers on the HIPIR antennas. k. Check Procedures. Perform the check proce- dures for the HIPIR (chapter 3). Section IV. LUBRICATION 4-4. General Lubrication Instructions Lubrication intervals are based on normal 8-hour day operation. These intervals may be reduced to compensate for abnormal operation, severe condi- tions, or the discovery of contaminated lubricants. During inactive periods the intervals may be ex- tended, commensurate with adequate preservation. After washing or fording, the HIPIR must be lubricated. Parts should be cleaned with volatile mineral spirits, paint thinner (TPM), or dry clean- ing solvent (PD-680, type 1). All lubrication points should be dried before applying the lubricant. 4-5. Lubrication Chart Lubrication chart LC 9-1430—533-12 (fig. 4.0.1) prescribes lubricating instructions as to location, intervals, and proper materials for the HIPIR. It also contains the specific procedures to be performed NOTE Refer to TM 9-2330-235—14 for preventive ‘maintenance checks and services and lubrica- tion instructions for trailer M390. Section V. MAINTENANCE SERVICES 46. General This section contains the instructions required for the maintenance of the HIPIR. For instructions not contained in this manual, refer to TM 9-1425—525—12—4. 4-7. Desiccator Replacement Remove and install the pedestal and the transmitter housing desiccators as shown in figures ‘land 4-2. 4-71. Absorption Paper Roll Replacement Remove the absorption paper rolls from the locations shown in figures 4-3 and 5-7, and replace. 47.2. Coolant Hose Replacement a. Purge the cooling system as described in paragraph 4-10, steps a through p, but do not in- stall the lock wire in step p. If purging cannot be accomplished, disassemble and clean the filters. 42.4™™ 91430533121 >. Drain the cooling systems as described in Paragraph 4-8b and clean all components, ¢. After the hoses have been replaced, purge the cooling system as described in paragraph 4-10, steps k through g. 42.2 o 48. Filing and Draining the Cooling Syim NOTE Coolant 5959151, 6850-00-078-4459 (Unica Carbide PM-3961), is the only authorised Placement for the HIPIR cooling system,TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 LUBRICATION CHART LO9-1430-533-12 RADAR SET AN/MPQ-46 (XO-1) HIPIR (HAWK AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM) GMD — GREASE, | Bu aShEAee Movbdonm deuce | disulfide | Bu aShEAee Movbdonm deuce | -G-21164) LUBRICANTS — ALL TEMPERATURES MS 1647108 Figure 4-0.1. Lubrication chart (sheet 1 of 2). 42.2.1Google __T™ 91430533121 - NOTES - 1. ELEVATION DRIVE GEAR — To reach elevation GMD to the teeth of the gear. Do not mix graphite ‘with hibricant. 2. AZIMUTH DRIVE GEAR — To reach azimuth 3. OIL CAN POINTS — Monthly, lubricate all ‘cabinet latches and hinges with OAl. 4. DATA GEARS — Do not lubricate. 5, MOTOR.GENERATOR (DIEHL CONFIGURA. TION ONLY) — Lubricate after every 1000 hours of operation. Use lubricant GMD. Remove the four ‘threaded inserts from grease drain holes at the bottom of the motor generator. Retain the inserts Remove the four grease cups and fil with grease. emetol the cape and sew them down td greece ‘ones fom the drain holes. Reietal the tweaded inworts. 6. TRAILER LUBRICATION — Refer to TM 9— 2330—235—14, MS 1647114 Figure 4-0.1. Lubrication chart (sheet 2 of 2). 423TM 9—1430—533—12—1 1 ~ Desiceator (spare) 2-Clip 3 — Desiccator Figure 4-1. Replacement of the desiceator in the antenna pedestal. Desiccator 2 - Holder Figure 4.2. Replacement of the desiccator in the transmitter housing. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown belo figure 4-3 unless otherwise parentheses refer to jeated. a. Cooling System Filling. (1) Make certain that all coolant lines are con- nected and tightened. (2) Fill the reservoir with clean coolant. 424 an (3) Clean all residue from spilled coolant in- mediately with a dry cloth. (4) Energize the HIPIR (par. 3-12), and opente | the pump for 15 seconds. (5) Repeat steps (2), (3), and (4) above until the reservoir remains full while the pump is operating (6) With the pump operating, press and hol the indicator valve knob (5) until the coolant passig through the sight tube (6) is free of air bubbles Release the knob. (7) Make certain that the GLYCOL LIQUD LEVEL WARNING lamp (29, fig. 2-5) is e tinguished. b. Cooling System Draining. (1) Loosen the filler cap (1) to vent the systen. | NOTE Use locally available material to divert the coolant flow from the equipment to the draining receptacles, (2) Open the draincock (2) and allow the system to drain. Periodically press and hold the indicator valve knob (5) allowing the heat exchanger to con- pletely drain. 49. Cleaning the Filter Elements in the Liquid Coolant Filter Assembly NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses referto figure 43. a. Remove the quick-disconnects (4) from the filter assembly (3). Replace with stainless steel type filters (10105739) and elements (SP1314) only. NOTE ‘The filter elements must be inspected for damage. If ‘damaged, they must be replaced. Spare elements at contained in filter assembly repair kit 5969133 NOTE ‘The filter assembly (3) need not be removed from its ‘mount in order to clean the filter elements. b. Refer to figure 4-4 for the cleaning operation. ¢. Connect the quick-disconnects (4). d. Fill the cooling system as described it paragraph 4-80.To check for proper coolant flow through the filters while the cooling system is operating, press and release the bypass indicator (7) and note that it does not move more than 1/8 inch upward. 1—Filler cap 2—Draincock 3Filter assembly 3.1—Absorption paper 4—Quick-disconnects ‘5—Indieator valve knob ‘7—Bypass indicator Figure 4.3. Cooling system filer cap ‘and indicator valve. 410. Purging the Cooling System ‘The following procedure is for purging the cooling system. In performing the following purging Procedure, the pump must be operated without the required lubrication provided by the coolant; as a result, the life of the pump is affected. Therefore, it TM9—1430—533. erative that operation of the pump not exceed the time noted in the following Procedure. a. Drain the cooling system as described in paragraph 4-86. 6. Clean the filter assembly but do not lockwire the bolt to the housing. ¢. Make certain that all coolant lines are connected and tightened. 4. Fill the reservoir with methanol (6810-275-6010). Do not energize the heaters with methanol in the system. Check that the GLYCOL PREHEAT circuit breaker (27, fig. 2-5) is off. e, Energize the HIPIR (par. 3-12), and operate the pump for 15 seconds. Jf. Repeat steps d ande above until the reservoir remains full while the pump is operating. 9. Periodically press and hold the indicator valve knob (5, fig. 4-3) while the pump is operating. ‘h. Operate the cooling system for three minutes. i. Drain the cooling system as described in paragraph 4-86. J. Remove the filter assembly and inspect for contamination; if contamination exists, repeat the cleaning procedure shown in figure 4-4, but do not lockwire the bolt to the housing. k. Fill the reservoir with distilled water (O-B-41). . Turn the heaters on. Check that the GLYCOL PREHEAT circuit breaker is on. m. Allow the water to heat’ until the P.A. COLLECTOR LOW TEMP WARNING lamp (7, fig. 2- 5) extinguishes, n. Operate the cooling system for four to five minutes. o. Drain the cooling system as described in paragraph 4-8). p. Repeat steps k through o until there is no visible evidence of contamination (oil film) on the filter, then lockwire the bolt to the housing. q. Fill the cooling system as described in paragraph 4-82. 4-11. Inspection of the Motor-Generator Brushes a, Use figure 4-5 (configuration A) for the General Electric _motor-generator inspection. (1) Insure that the MOTOR GENERATOR cir- cuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) on the main fuse panel is set to OFF. a3T™ 9—1430—S33—12—| | ‘BOLT (2), AND REMOVE THE COVER AS- BATH AND BLOW OFF THE EXCESS SOLUTION SEMBLY (3), FROM THE HOUSING (4). WITH AN AIR HOSE. | REMOVE THE FILTER ELEMENTS FROM THE | eee i : a | 2. REMOVE THE RETAINING RING (5), AND 5. REMOVE THE PREFORMED PACKING (8) THE END PLATE (6), AND LIFT THE EIGHT FROM THE COVER ASSEMBLY (3) AND THE FILTER ELEMENTS (7) FROM THE COVER PREFORMED PACKING (9) FROM BOLT (2). | ASSEMBLY (3). REPLACE THEM WITH NEW PREFORMED WARNING: PROTECTIVE GLOVES SHOULD BE PACKINGS. WORN TO PREVENT SKIN IRRITATION WHEN USING THE CLEANING SOLUTION. AVOID CON- TACT WITH THE EYES. 3. PLACE THE FILTER ELEMENTS IN A BATH OF 6. WIPE THE INSIDE OF THE HOUSING (4) DRY CLEANING SOLVENT AND SOAK THEM WITH A CLEAN CLOTH. REPLACE THE FiL- FOR ABOUT 10 MINUTES. THEN REMOVE THE TER ELEMENTS, THE END PLATE AND THE ELEMENTS AND PLACE THEM IN A FRESH RETAINING RING ON THE COVER ASSEM- BATH, AGITATING THEM UNTIL CLEAN. BLY (3) AND INSTALL THE ASSEMBLY IN THE HOUSING (4). TIGHTEN THE BOLT (2) (50-75 INCH POUNDS) AND LOCKWIRE THE BOLT TO THE HOUSING. . mi 64392 Figure 4-4. Cleaning the filter elements in the liquid coolant filter assemb'y.c7 TM 9—1430—533—12—1 (2) Remove and inspect each of the four brushes (5) as shown in figure 4-5. (8) If the brushes are less than 5-16 inch long, replace them. 6. Use figure 4-6 (configuration B) for the Diehl motor-generator inspection. NOTE ~ ‘Toe key numbers shown below in parethees fet figure 4-6. 2 { 3 MT 646668 1 Motor generator SClnake port ‘3—Brush assembly Figure 4.6. Inspection of the motorgenerator rushes (configuration B) Figure 4-7. Deleted. u MI 64665A (1) Insure that the MOTOR GENERATOR cir- 1—Motor-generator cuit breaker on the main fuse panel (4, fig. 1-7) is aeeee set to OFF. 3—Gasket ¥ A ‘ceep (2) Remove the four intake ports (2) as shown ‘5—Brush assembly and inffct each of the four brushes (3). (8) If the brushes are less than 1/2 inch long, Figure 4.5. Inspection ofthe motor generator replace them. brushes (configuration A) (4) Replace the intake ports (2).T 9—1430—533—12—1 412. Inspection of the Liquid Cooler Unit Fan Assembly NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to @. The cooler unit should be inspected every 200 hours for evidence of contamination or corrosion. This may be accomplished by using a mirror to figure 4-8. observe the fan assembly and motor housing. 6. Close inspection is required, particularly at the tip of the impeller blade and the housing, for evidence of buildup of material that would reduce the tip clearance of the impeller (5). Any buildup of materi that would cause interference between the impeller and the housing (6) could result in motor burnout. ¢. If contamination or corrosion is present, replace If the PUMP circuit breaker (90, fig. 2-5) trips, it should not be held in the ON position. The unit should be inspected as above to insure that the impeller is free to rotate. Binding of the impeller on the housing can result in motor burnout par- ticularly if the circuit breaker is held ON. the fan assembly. 4-13. Filling the Dummy Load NOTE Coolant fluid, dielectric 0859 (MiI-C-47220 type 3) is the only authorized replacement for the IHIPIR dummy load Should the Mil-C-47220, type 3 coolant become sufficiently contaminated by water so as to appear milky, it becomes a flammable mixture and must be handled as such. Do not allow the coolant to come in contact with open cuts or sores. 1-Shroud 2 Gasket 3—Clamp @. Make certain that disconnects (3) are connected and tightened. 6. Remove the filler cap (1) and fill with clean coolant to the fill-level indicator (2). ¢. Clean all residue from spilled coolant im- mediately with a dry cloth. 4—Support S—Impeller 6—Housing Figure 4-8. Inspection of the fan assembly ‘and motor housing. Avoid getting excessive amounts of the coolant on any part of the equipment. The coolant has a silicate ester base and is sensitive to water. Even small quan- tities of water can react to produce a precipitate or sludge. Large quantities of water may produce a system-clogging gel. Avoid water contamination of the coolant at all times. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 4 I coolant lines and the quick-™ 91490-53312 Fiee 49. Dummy load fier cap (and flere indicator.1, Google _ - Qa.1-14. Cleaning and Alining the Antenna Pedestal Sliprings Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE and the MAIN POWER switch to OFF (1 and 4, fig. 2-14). NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 4-10. a Removal. (1) Remove the cover assembly (1), heater con- xol assembly (5), cover plate (4), and its related asket. (2) Disconnect connectors from the electrical contact brush holder assembly (7). (3) Remove the electrical contact brush housing assembly (3). (4) Inspect each brush (6 and 8) for damage and for less than 1/16-inch thickness at either end. Replace if necessary. b, Cleaning. (1) Sprinkle naphtha, TIN 9TTY1 (6810-00-228- 53), over a clean lint-free cloth. (2) Wring out excess naphtha so that the cloth isslightly dampened. (3) Brush off any residue that might have ‘ettled on the barriers. Rotate the antenna assembly through several revolutions to clean the barriers. (4) Starting with the top slipring (2), hold the cloth firmly against the contact surface of the slipring barrier and rotate the antenna assembly at least two revolutions. (5) Perform step (4) above for all remaining sliprings. Insure that a clean area of the cloth is used and that the antenna assembly is rotated at least two revolutions for each slipring surface. NOTE WU the sliprings are malfunctioning, re Personnel perform the slipring r S-190—533—34—2), st DS and GS ivity cheek (TM 1 9—1430—533—12—1 ¢. Installation and Alinement. Insure that all the brushes (6 and 8) are in contact with their respective sliprings pri- or to seating the electrical contact brush housing to the antenna pedestal. (1) Install the electrical contact brush housing (3). (2) Rotate the antenna assembly to insure that there is no binding and that the brushes ride freely in the grooves of the assembly (2). (3) Check the contact brushes (6 and 8): if they are misalined or riding on the slipring barrier, move the brushes off or away from the slipring barrier toward center of slipring contact groove. (4) Rotate the antenna in azimuth 6400 mils and recheck brushes (6 and 8), for alinement. If no brushes are misalined, proceed to step 9. If brushes are misalined, proceed to step (5). Loosen the contact brush screws just enough to move the contact brush. Loos- ening the screws too much could cause the retainer to drop into the pedestal base. (5) Loosen two retainer screws on the electrical contact brush holder assembly (7) of the brush to be alined. (6) Move the contact brush to the center of the contact groove. (1) Tighten both retainer screws. (8) Repeat steps (4) through (8) for the remain- ing misalined contact brushes in the electrical contact brush holder assembly. (9) Install the electrical contact brush holder assembly (7). (10) Connect the connectors to the electrical contact brush holder assembly. (11) Reinstall cover assembly (1), heater control assembly (5), cover plate (4), and its related gasket. 4-7TM 9—1430—533—12—1 cn 1—Cover assembly 5 Heater control assembly t 2—Blipring assembly 6—Brush SR68—SR75 10068290 Electrical contact brush housing 7—Electrical contact brush holder asemiiy 4—Cover plate 8—Brush SR1—SR67 10068231 Figure 4-10. Replacement of the electrical contact brushes.a7 » 414.1. Electrical Contact Brush Holder Assem- bly Alinement Procedure Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE and the main power switch to OFF (Land 4, fig. 2-14). NOTE The key numbers shown below refer to figure 4-10. a. Removal, (1) Remove cover assembly (3), heater control assembly (5, fig. 4-10), cover plate (6), and its related gasket (7). (2) Remove electrical contact brush housing (22) from pedestal base (23). (8) Remove branched wiring harness (12) from the electrical contact brush holder assembly (16). (4) Remove electrical contact brush holder assembly from electrical contact brush housing (22) by removing hardware (8, 9, 13, 14 and 15). b. Installation and Alinement. (1) Install the electrical contact brush housing to the pedestal base (23). (2) Rotate the antenna until no. 10 (190)-32 NF drilled and tapped hole can be located through the collar of the lowest part of the slipring assembly. (8) Insert threaded end of alinement tool into tapped hole and hand tighten. Center inside electri- cal contact brush housing (22) by moving the anten- na, (4) Carefully install and aline electrical contact brush holder assembly (16) to electrical contact brush housing (22) by passing the alinement tool installed in step (3) through the center hole at the bottom of electrical contact brush holder assembly. (5) Reinstall and tighten retaining hardware (8, 9, 18, 14 and 15). (6) Remove the alinement tool. (1) Safety wire the screws (8 and 13) at the top and bottom of the electrical contact brush holder assembly (16) using the safety wire technique outlined in TM 9—1425—525—12—4. (8) Reinstall the branched wiring harness. TM 9—1430—533—12- (9) Reinstall the electrical contact brush hous- ing. (10) Reinstall the cover plate (6) and its related gasket (7), heater control assembly and cover assem- bly (3). (11) Check brush alinement (par. 4-14c, steps (2) through (8)). 4-15. HVPS Connector Treatment Procedures NOTE Use the connector repair kit (package stock number 5421100) for these procedures. @. Remove all foreign matter from the silicon rubber inserts, using cleaning solvent MIL-C-81302, 6850-00-984-5853, and allow them to dry. b. Using one of the talcum bottles from the kit, dust the silicon inserts with taleum. ¢. Using the empty bottle, squeeze air over the inserts to remove excess talcum powder. d. Immediately connect the mating connectors to prevent entrapment of moisture in the talcum powder. 4-16. Repair of the Radar Set Group Weatherstrip NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 4-11. a, Remove the screws (1) and the metal strip (2) securing the canvas protective strip (3) to the equipment cabinet door (4). >. Inspect the weatherstrip at the junction of the equipment cabinet and the front panel (5) for gaps which would allow water to enter the cabinet. c. If necessary, apply a fine bead of R.T.V. 102 (8040-00-225-4548) to seal the gaps. d. After the R.T.V. 102 has dried, secure the canvas protective strip to the equipment cabinet door using the screws and metal strip removed in step a above.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 ar MI 646854 9—Shim Nut 10—Serew 18—Washer L—Serew 19—Washer 12—Wiring harness 2—Screw 13—Serew 21—Washer . 14—Washer 22—Blectrical contact brash hoasing 15—Washer 23—Pedestal base 16—Electrical contact ‘2A—Azimuth drive motor brush holder assembly Figure 4-10.1. Removal of the pedestal electrical contact brush holder assembly and housing. 4-8.2, 17. Radio-Frequency Leakage Detection Test Prolonged exposure to radio-frequency (rf) radiation of 10 mw/cm? or greater, as per AR 40-588, is a poten- tial health hazard. This test is used to determine if a hazard to health or equipment exists in the HIPIR. If an indication of rf leakage greater than 1 mw/cm’ is detected, the radar should be turned off immediately and repairs made. T™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 48.3“Google _.ce Tm 91430533121 MS 154692 4-Door ‘S—Junction of equipment ‘cabinet and front panel Figure 4-11. Repair of the radar set group woatheratrip. Physical sensation of heat on any por- tion of the body in the proximity of waveguide components may indicate an rf radiation leak of hazardous in- tensity. NOTE ‘An rf leakage level of leas than 1 mw/em? is ‘used as the acceptance level rather than the permissible 10 mw/cm? for the following rea- sons: It in difficult to perfectly aline the de- tector waveguide flange in a position very close to the potential leak; the accuracy of the measurement may vary by a factor of 0.5 to 2; leakage levels that exceed 1 mw/em? ‘may@egrade radar performance. @. Preparation for Test. (1) Assure that the LOCAL/REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) is set to LOCAL. (2) Deenergize the IHIPIR in accordance with table 8-18, (8) Set the BATTLE SHORT switch (7, fig. 2.8) to ON, the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH , fig. 2-14) to SAFE, and the MOTOR GENER- ATOR circuit breaker (18, fig. 2-2) to OFF. (4) Remove the access cover and gasket (2 and 8, fig. 5-14) from the back of the pedestal head assembly. (5) Open and remove the doors from the antenna receiver and transmitter compartments. (6) Remove the round bottom cover from beneath the pedestal base. -”TM 9—1430—533—12—1 (7) Remove protective cover from the wave- guide assembly between the transmitter console and the pedestal. The IHIPIR transmits a powerful beam, exposure to which is harmful to body tissue. Make certain all personnel remain clear of the transmitter beam when radiating. Failure to perform steps (8) and (9) below may pose a hazard to personnel. (8) Manually position the antenna to 800 mils elevation and apply the elevation brake. (9) Manually position the antenna to the specified safe azimuth. (10) Energize the radar to full radiate. Make certain that the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker is set to OFF and the elevation brake is set to BRAKE, (11) If an oscilloscope (AN/USM-281A or equivalent) is available, use test method 1 in sub- Paragraph b. If a multimeter (TS-505D/U) is available, use test method 2 in subparagraph ¢. », Test Method 1. (1) Obtain the following: (a) Oscilloscope AN/USM-281A, 6625-00- 228-2-1 or equivalent. (b) Rf detector, part no, 9082599, 4985- 00-006-0197. (c) Rf cable assembly, part no. 9195578, 4985-00-848-7584 or equivalent cable of sufficient length consisting of RG-58C/U coaxial cable with roperly attached male BNC connectors on both (2) Connect the rf cable assembly between the rf detector and the oscilloscope INPUT A. (8) Connect the oscilloscope power plug to a 115 VOLTS 400 CPS outlet on transmitter panel 2 (17, fig. 2-6). (4) Set the oscilloscope switches and controls to measure a signal level of approximately 1.2 vde. Refer to TM 9—4935—542-12, Make certain the polarity switch is set for a positive deflection. 4-10 (5) Hold the rf detector flange against a flat metal surface to block any rf input. Adjust the oscilloscope position control to place the sweep on the bottom graticule line. (6) Remove the protective cover from A1A1J1 located on the right side of transmitter panel 8 (8, fig. 1-2). (7) Place the opening of the rf detector as close as possible to the opening of J1 without touching. The oscilloscope sweep should deflect at least 0.6 vde. If the deflection is less than 0.6 vdc, check the position of the rf detector to connector J1 and, while observing the oscilloscope, move the detector from side to side. If the sweep still does not deflect at least 0.6 vde, replace the diode 1N28ER (9068252) located under the knurled screwcap of the rf detector and repeat step (7). (8) Replace the protective cover on ALAIJ1. (9) Proceed to paragraph d. ¢. Test Method 2. (1) Obtain the following: (a) Multimeter TS-505D/U, 6625-00-24%- 0562 or equivalent. (b) Rf detector, part no. 9082599, 4985- 00-06-0197. (c) Adapter UG-1085/U, 5985-00-807-8895 or equivalent dual banana-to-BNC. (2) Connect the adapter to the rf detector. (8) Connect the multimeter power plug toa 115 VOLTS 400 CPS utility outlet on transmitter panel 2 (17, fig. 2-6). (4) Set the multimeter FUNCTION switch to +DC and the RANGE switch to 2.5V/RX1. (5) Connect the multimeter DC and COM- ‘MON probes together and adjust the ZERO ADJ control for a 0.0-vde indication. (6) Connect the multimeter test leads to the appropriately colored terminals on adapter UG- 11086/U. (7) Remove the protective cover from A1A1J1 located on the right side of panel 8 (8, fig. 1-2). (8) Place the opening of the rf detector as close as possible to the opening of J1 without touching. The multimeter should indicate at least 0.6 vde. If the meter indicates less than 0.6 vie, check the position of the rf detector to connectorcs J1 and while observing the meter, move the de- tector from side to side. If the indication is still leas than 0.6 vde, replace the diode 1N23ER (9063252) located under the knurled screwcap of the rf detector and repeat step (8). (9) Replace the protective cover on ALA1J1. (10) Proceed to paragraph d. . Rf Leakage Testing Procedure. An indication of 1.2 vde or more on the multimeter or on the oscilloscope indi- cates rf leakage in excess of 1mw/cm*. This leakage poses a potential hazard to personnel and a possible detriment to equipment operation. The radar should be deenergized and repairs made, ‘The antenna must be positioned at the specified safe azimuth. Personnel must be prevented from passing within 111.5 m (366 ft) of the front of the antenna. Position WARNING signs to show the entire affected area, NOTE The open end of the rf detector is used to detect radiation, Rf waveguides or waveguii tional and polarized. The detector must be Positioned as indicated below. (1) Open transmitter panel 3 (3, fig. 1-2). (2) Test all waveguide flanges and rf com- Ponents on the rf pallet for leakage. Move the rf detector from side to side around the waveguide flange being tested, while observing the indication on the oscilloscope or multimeter. Refer to figure 412 for the correct orientation of the rf detector to the waveguide. Flexible waveguide (flexguide) must be tested over its entire length (view A, fig. 412) and rf joints must be tested on all sides (view B, fig. 4-12). Tm 91430533121 (8) Test the rotary joint and waveguide in the pedestal base, Test rotary joints around their entire circumference. (4) Test the waveguide between the trans. miter cabinet and the antenna pedestal. Test waveguide to bulkhead connections by holding the rf detector as shown in view C of fig. 4-12. (5) Test the flexguide and waveguide con- nections in the pedestal head assembly. (6) Test the rotary joint, flexguide, and waveguide connections located in the antenna transmitter compartment. (7) Test the waveguide and directional coupler connections in the antenna receiver com- partment. (8) Deenergize the radar, (9) Disconnect all test equipment. (10) Install and secure the gasket and cover on the pedestal head assembly, the antenna re- ceiver and transmitter compartment doors, the Protective cover for the waveguide between the transmitter console and the pedestal, and the round bottom cover from beneath the pedestal base. (11) Close and secure transmitter panel #3. (12) Set the BATTLE SHORT switch to OFF. 4-18. Replacement of the Counterbalance Assembly WARNING Deenergize the IHIPIR and disconnect the power cable. a, Removal. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in Parentheses refer to figure 4-14, unless otherwise indicated. (1) Elevate the antenna to 1600 mils and ‘engage the elevation brake. (2) Remove the elevation head assembly covers (1 and 3, fig. 4-13). an™ 9—1430—533—12—1 VIEW A VIEW C VIEW B MS 613678 Typical orientations for rf leakage testing. Figure 4-12.ce (3) Stutf rags into the tube housing to prevent hardware from falling into the lower pedestal hous- (4) Loosen the clamp on the motor-tachometer generator exhaust hose (2). Disconnect the hose from the generator and position it to gain access to the counterbalance assembly. (5) Move the wiring hamess for greater acceas to the assembly. NOTE It is not necestary to remove the cable clamp ‘secured to the waveguide assembly (5). (6) Disconnect P14, P15, and P16 from the power supply (4). (7) Loosen the four screws securing the power supply and remove the power supply from the head assembly. (8) Remove the four screws securing the wave- snide support bracket (6) and remove the bracket. (9) Remove the eight screws securing the waveguide (1) to the flexguide (3). Move the wave- guide away from the counterbalance assembly. ‘The waveguide will only move approxi- mately 1/4 inch. Do not force it fur- ther. ‘The counterbalance spring may be caught in a tensed or loaded position ‘and is hazardous to personnel if bro- ken. Use extreme caution while per- forming the following steps. (10) Remove the four self-locking bolts secur- ing the counterbalance assembly (5, fig. 4-13). (11) Pull the counterbalance assembly straight out as far as possible to disengage the splined end of the gearshaft. Rotate the counterbalance assem- bly downward to clear the waveguide assembly, and remove the counterbalance assembly. ’. Installation. (1) Coat the protruding gear teeth of the gear- shaft with grease MIL-G-23827 (9150-00-985- 7248). TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 (2) Install the counterbalance assembly (5, fig. 4-13) in the elevation head. Rotate the assembly to aline the housing mounting holes with the elevation head mounting holes. Push the assembly in to engage the gearshaft. (3) Install the four bolts which secure the counterbalance assembly. (4) Aline the waveguide (1) with the flexguide (3) and install the eight screws which secure them. (5) Install the waveguide support bracket (6) and secure it with the four screws. (6) Install the power supply (4) and secure it with the four screws. (1) Connect P14, P15, and P16 to the power supply. MS 313704 Cover 2-Seal 3—Cover 4—Gasket 5—Counterbalance assembly Figure 4-13, Removal of the counterbalance assembly. 413ce TM 91490533121 (8) Reposition the wiring harness. (10) Remove the rags from the tube housing (9) Connect the exhaust hose (2) to the motor _and install the covers (1 and 3, fig. 4-13). tachometer generator and secure the hose with its ¢. Test After Installation. Manually position the clamp. antenna to check for excessive tension. MS 313705 1—Waveguide 2—Exhaust hose 3—Plexguide 4—Power supply 5—Waveguide assembly (6—Waveguide support bracket Figure 4-14. Elevation heod assembly.ce TM 91430533121 CHAPTER 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE 5-1. General ‘This section provides maintenance instructions for authorized maintenance personnel of the IHIPIR. Hazardous rf radiation levels can leak from improperly joined waveguide flanges. This hazard can also be caused by damage such as dents and scratches on waveguide flange faces. The radar may be damaged by the introduction of foreign particles (dirt, dust, metal filings, ete.) into waveguide openings. Cap open waveguide fittings with dust covers as soon as possible after dis- connection. To prevent a potential per- sonnel hazard or degradation of radar performance, all waveguide, flexguide, and rf component flanges must be con- nected and disconnected exactly as spe- cified in the procedures contained in this chapter. 5-1.1. Waveguide Connections a. Installation. Failure to perform step (1) below could pose a hazard to personnel or equipment. (1) Inspect waveguide flanges for scratches or dents which extend from the waveguide open- ing to any screw hole or to the flange edge. Check for torn or damaged window material and for missing, cracked, or damaged “O” rings, (2) Before installing any screws, insure that ‘to undue force is required to mate the flanges. (8) Start all screws by hand, avoiding cross threading, before any screws are tightened. (4) In sequence (fig. 5-0.1) snug each screw until the flanges are touching. (5) In sequence, torque each screw to 26 to 80 ineh-pounds. ». Test After Installation. Perform the rf leak- age test (par. 4-17) immediately upon completion of any procedure requiring the connection of any waveguide flanges. Carefully test all waveguide connections made during repair and all disturbed flexible waveguides. 5-2. Replacement of the Frequency Converter I Deenergize the radar (table 3-18) and set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE before starting this procedure. ‘MS 613679 Figure 6.0.1. Torque sequence for waveguide connsotions. ffTM 91430533121 Before disassembling any waveguide fittings, inspect for the presence of shims. Retain for use in the same posi- tions during installation. [eaunon Cap waveguide fittings with dust covers as soon as possible after dis- connection. NOTE To ease replacement have the new frequency converter on hand before starting this pro- cedure, NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 6-1. a, Removal. (1) Remove the receiver test set (18, figure 8-17) by disconnecting five electrical connectors and loosening four mounting screws, (2) Disconnect cables from J2, J3, and J4 of the delay line switch (8.2, figure 3-17) and the cable from J4 of the frequency converter. Re- move the two mounting screws, the delay line switch, and the insulating spacer and retain. (8) Remove cables from J1, J2, and J8 of the frequency converter, (4) Disconnect four connectors (P1 through P4) from the connector mounting bracket at the rear of the frequency converter (12). (5) Remove waveguide bracket mounting screws (8.1, figure 3-17). (6) Disconnect cable connectors W6P1 (1) and P17 (2) on the forward rf reflection isolator. Disconnect waveguide flanges (8 through 5) and remove the forward rf reflection isolator assem- bly (6). (1) Disconnect waveguide flange (7) of the rear rf reflection isolator. (8) Disconnect both ends of the two wave- guide bandpass filters (8 and 9) and remove, (9) Completely remove four frequency con- verter mounting bolts (10 and 11). Retain all hardware and spacer sleeves. Do not use the rear rf reflection iso- lator as a handle. (10) Remove the frequency converter (12). (11) Remove the rear rf reflection isolator as). », Installation. | Insure that all waveguide shims are installed with their openings alined with the waveguide openings, not ‘across them. Common) When connecting coaxial cable con- nectors, avoid torquing the cable or the connector. Apply torque to the nut only. (1) Install the rear rf reflection isolator (18) on the new frequency converter (12). (2) Position the frequency converter for in- stallation and hand thread the two short mount- ing bolts (10) in the front mounting holes. Do not tighten. (8) Assemble the connector mounting bracket at the rear of the frequency converter, spacer sleeves, and long mounting bolts (11). Hand thread through the frequency converter rear ‘mounting holes. Do not tighten. (4) Connect the rear rf reflection isolator flange (7) to the waveguide assembly. (5) Install the forward rf reflection isolator assembly (6) by connecting three waveguide flanges (8 through 5). (8) Install and tighten waveguide bracket mounting screws (8.1, figure 8-17). (7) Tighten four frequency converter mount- ing bolts (10 and 11). (8) Connect ASP1 through A5P4 to W1J81, J88, J40, and J89 on the connector mounting bracket at the rear of the frequency converter. (9) Install and connect both ends of the two waveguide bandpass filters (8 and 9).TM 9—1430—533—12—1 flange 6—Forward rf reflection isolator assembly Figure 6.1. Replacement of the frequency converter (sheat 1 of #). MS 313688ce TM 9—1430—533—12—1 ‘1—Waveguide flange 8 Waveguide bandpass filter ‘9_Waveguide bandpass filter 10—Mounting bolts (short) (2) 11—Mounting bolts (long) (2) Figure 6-1. Replacement of the frequency converter (sheet # of 2). 5.2.2cs (10) Connect W5P1 (1) and P17 (2) to the appropriate connectors on the forward rf reflec- tion jsolator assembly. (11) Install the delay line switch (8.2, figure 3.17) and insulating spacer with two mounting screws. (12) Connect P27, P19, P20, and W8P2 to J1 through J4 on the frequency converter. (18) Connect P21, W4P1, and P21 (J4) (large connector) to J2 through J4 of the delay line switeh, (14) Install the receiver test set (18, figure 3:17) with four mounting screws and connect cables to J1 through J5. ¢. Test After Installation. Refer to table 8-17 for the check procedures. 5-3. Replacement of the High-Vohage Regulator Make certain that the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) is set to OFF before pertorm- ing maintenance of the high-voltage regulator. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-2. ‘4 Removal. Disconnect the two electrical connec- tors (1 and 2) and remove the high-voltage regulator . , Installation. Install the high-voltage regulator (H, and connect the two electrical connectors (1 and 2. 1 «. rest Aster Inatallation, Refer to table 8-16 for check procedures. 5-4, Replacement of the Master Oscillator Power Supply High voltage is present in the high voltage power supply assembly. Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF. TM 9—1430—533—12—1 ‘Do not add coolant to the HVPS modules. Coolant refill or replacement is authorized only at the DS and GS maintenance level. Catch any coolant that drains out of the coolant lines. Make certain that all residue from spilled coolant is thoroughly removed immediately with a dry cloth before applying power to the radar. i i 4 Mi 64672 1—Electrical connector AGJ7 (mates with W1P8) I 2--Electrcal connector AGUS (mates with W1P2) Externally relieved body screw 4—High-voltage regulator Figure 5-2. Replacement ofthe high-voltage repulator. 5.2.3TM 91430533121 NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-3. @ Removal. (1) Disconnect the electrical connectors (1 and 2) from the control indicator panel (8) and the electrical connectors (4 through 6) from the distribution box (7). (2) Disconnect the coolant hoses (8 and 9) from the bracket (10). (8) Pull the slide support (11) forward to its fully extended position. (4) Close the shutoff valve by turning the shutoff valve cap (12) clockwise. (5) Disconnect electrical connector Pl (18) of the control-indicator panel and Pi of electrical cable W2 a4). (6) Cover connectors J1 and J2 of the power supply, using the protective covers stored on the sides of the power supply. ce (7) Disconnect the coolant hoses from the quick. coupling halves (15 and 16). © Remove the master oscilator power supply ay 6. Installation. (1) Install the master oscillator power supply an. (2) Perform a continuity check to verify that a good connection exists between the module, the HVPS assembly, and system ground. (8) Connect the coolant hoses to their respective fittings, using the quick-disconnect coupling halves (15 and 16), (4) Remove the protective covers from connes- tora J1 and J2 and secure them to their respective storage areas on the sides of the power supply. (5) Connect electical connectors P1 (18) to the INPUT connector and P1 of electrical cable W2 (14) to the OUTPUT connector as shown in view A.The shutoff valve must be opened before resuming operation of the radar to prevent a pressure buildup within the power supp- ly assembly. (6) Open the shutoff valve by turning the shutoff salve cap (12) counterclockwise. (1) Retract the slide support (11) to the closed (8) Connect the quick-disconnects of the coolant teses (8 and 9) to their respective fittings on the bracket (10). (9) Connect the electrical connectors (4 through 6. ¢. Test After Installation. for check procedures. Refer to table 3-16 5-5. Replacement of the Power Amplifier Power Supply High voltage is present in the high-voltage power supply assembly. Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF. Do not add coolant to the HVPS modules. Coolant refill or replacement is authorized only at the DS and GS maintenance level. Catch any coolant that drains out of the collant lines. Make certain that all residue from spilled coolant is thoroughly removed immediately with a dry cloth before applying power to the radar. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parenthese refer to figure 5-3. NOTE * The master oscillator power supply must be removed ‘fore the power amplifier can be replaced |} @ Removat (1) Perform the procedures described in sub- ‘aragraph 5-4a for the removal of the master os- ‘ilar power supply. TM 9—1430—533—12—1 (2) Close the shutoff valve by turning the shutoff valve cap (18) clockwise. (8) Disconnect electrical connectors P2 (19) of the control indicator panel and P1 of electrical cable ‘WS (20). (4) Cover connectors J2 and J1 of the power supply. (5) Disconnect the coolant hose from the quick- disconnect coupling halves (21 and 22). (6) Remove the power amplifier power supply (23). 6. Installation. (1) Install che power amplifier power supply (23). (2) Perform a continuity check to verify that a good connection exists between the module, the HVPS assembly, and system ground. (8) Connect the coolant hoses to their respective fittings as shown in view A, using the quick- disconnect coupling halves (21 and 22). (4) Remove the protective covers from con- nectors J1 and J2 and secure them to their respective storage areas on the sides of the power supply. (5) Connect electrical connector P1 of electrical cable W3 (20) to the output connector and P2 (19) to the input connector. The shutoff valve must be opened before resuming operation of the radar to prevent a pressure buildup within the power supp- ly assembly. (6) Open the shutoff valve by turning the shutoff valve cap (18) counterclockwise. (1) Perform the procedures described in sub- paragraph 5-4b for the installation of the master oscillator power supply. c. Test After Installation. Refer to table 3-16 fj for check procedures. 5-6. Replacement of the Master Oscillator Filament Power Supply High voltage is present in the high-voltage power supply assembly. Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF. 5-3TM 9—1430—533—12—1 6 Electrical connector Pl Figure 5-8. Replacement of the high-voltage powers ‘Distribution box 8 Coolant hose ‘9—Coolant hose 10—Bracket 11—Slide supy 12Shutoff valve eap supply assemblies.18—Blectrcal connector P1 14—Bleetrical eable W2 15—Quick-disconnect coupling half 16—Quiek-disconnect coupling half Y1—-Master oscillator power supply 18_Shutoff valve cap 19—Blectrical connector P2 20—Blectrical cable W3 21—Quick-disconnect coupling half 22—Quiek-isconnect coupling half 23—Power amplifier power supply TM 9—1430—533—12—1 2A—Shutoft valve cap 25 Electrical connector P1 26—Quick-disconnect coupling half 21—Quick-disconnect coupling half 28 Master oscillator filament power supply 29—Shutoff valve cap ‘30—Electrical connector P2 31—Quick-disconnect coupling half '82—Quick-disconnect coupling half 83—Power amplifier filament power supply Figure $-$—Continued. ‘Do not add coolant to the HVPS modules. Coolant refill or replacement is authorized only at the DS and GS maintenance level. Catch any coolant that drains out of the coolant lines. Make certain that all residue from spilled coolant is thoroughly removed immediately with a dry cloth before applying power to the radar. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 53 a. Removal. (1) Disconnect the electrical connectors (1 and 2) from the control indicator panel (8) and the electrical connectors (4 through 6) from the distribution box (7). (2) Disconnect the coolant hoses (8 and 9) from the bracket (10). (3) Pull the slide support (11) forward to its fully ‘txtended position. (4) Close the shutoff valve by turning the shutoff valve cap (24) clockwise. (5) Disconnect electrical connectors P2 of elec- Weal eable W2 (14) and PI (25) of the distribution (6) Cover connectors J1 and J2 of the power ‘upply, using the protective covers stored on the sides of the power supply. __ (1) Disconnect the coolant hoses from the quick- iseonnect coupling halves (26 and 27). (8) Remove the master oscillator filament power ‘upply (28). Installation. (1) Install the master oscillator filament power ‘epply (28). (2) Perform a continuity check to verify that a good connection exists between the module, the HVPS assembly, and system ground. (3) Connect the coolant hoses to their respective fittings, using the quick-disconnect coupling halves (26 and 27). (4) Remove the protective covers from connec- tors J1 and J2 and secure them to their respective storage areas on the sides of the power supply. (8) Connect electrical connector P2 of electrical cable W2 (14) to the input connector and P1 (25) to the output connector as shown in view A. ‘The shutoff valve must be opened before resuming operation of the radar to prevent a pressure buildup within the power supp- ly assembly. (6) Open the shutoff valve by turning the shutoff valve cap (24) counterclockwise. (7) Retract the slide support (11) to the closed position. (8) Connect the quick-disconnects of coolant hoses (8 and 9) to their respective fittings on the bracket (10). (9) Connect the electrical connectors (4 through 6. ¢. Test After Installation. Refer to table 3-14 J for check procedures. 5-7. Replacement of the Power Amplifier Filament Power Supply High voltage is present in the high-voltage power supply assembly. Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF. 55TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Do not add coolant to the HVPS modules. Coolant refill or replacement is authorized only at the DS and GS maintenance level. Catch any coolant that drains out of the coolant lines. Make certain that all residue from spilled coolant is thoroughly removed immediately with a dry cloth before applying power to the radar. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 53. NOTE ‘The master oscillator filament power supply must be removed before the power amplifier filament power supply ean be replaced a. Removal. (1) Perform the procedi described in si wu ragraph 5-6a for the removal of the aataetons Eillator filament power supply. (2) Close the shutoff valve by turning the shutoff valve cap (29) clockwise. (8) Disconnect electrical connectors P2 of elec- pee cable W3 (20) and P2 (30) of the distribution (4) Cover connectors J2 and J1 of the power Supply, using the protective covers stored onthe sides e power supply. (5) Disconnect the coolant hose from the quick- disconnect coupling halves (31 and 32). (6) Remove the power amplifier filament power supply (33 . Installation. (1) Install the power amplifier filament power supply (33). (2) Perform a continuity check to verify that a goad connection ‘exists between the module, the IVPS assembly, and system ground. ___ (8) Connect the coolant hoses to their respective fittings as shown in view A, using the quick- disconnect coupling halves (31 and 32). (4) Remove the protective covers from connec- vera J1 and J2, and secure them to thelr reapetive storage areas on the sides of the power supply. (8) Connect electrical connector P2 of electrical cable W3 (20) to the input connector and P2 (30) to the output connector. The shutoff valve must be opened before resuming operation of the radar to prevent 4 pressure buildup within the power sup- ply assembly. 5-6 cr (6) Open the shutoff valve by turning the shutof valve cap (29) counterclockwise. (1) Perform the procedures described in sub Paragraph 5-6 for the installation of the maser oscillator filament power supply. ¢. Test After Installation, Refer to table 314 for check procedures. 5-8. Replacement of the Power Ampli [ware ) Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF and ground all points of high poten- tial before proceeding. Use only nonmagnetic tools when perfor- ming the following maintenance. Cap the coolant line fittings as soon as possible after disconnections. Make certain that all residue from spilled coolant is thoroughly removed immediately with a dry cloth before applying power to the radar. Cap the waveguide flanges with dust covers as soon as possible after the dis- connections have been made. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-4. a. Removal. NOTE tis not necessary to pull the rf transmitter assembly. out on slides to perform the following steps. (1) Disconnect the hose and tube assemblies (6 and 15). (2) Remove the power amplifier tube (7 and 16). b. Installation. (1) Install the power amplifier tube (7 and 16). (2) Connect the hose and tube assemblies (6 and 15).7 cc. Test After Installation. (1) Disconnect cable connectors A7P2 (12, fig. 3-18) from the HVPS A6J3, (2) Connect cable connector A20P4 (15, fig. 3:18) to the HVPS connector A6J3. (3) Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to ON. (4) Insure that the LINE VOLT meter (39, fig. 2-1) indicates the red line. (5) Press the STANDBY pushbutton (21, fig. 26). (6) Set the HVPS test set FIL TEST switch (2, fig. 3-18) in the PAg1, PAg2, and PAg3 posi- tions (positions 2, 3, and 4). The HVPS test set FIL TEST meter (1, fig. 3-18) should indicate red line in each switch position. If not, adjust the corresponding potentiometer R2, R6, and R10 (17, 18, and 19. fig. 3-18) accordingly. T™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 (7) Set the HVPS test set FIL TEST switch (2, fig. 3-18) in the PA FIL position (position 6). The HVPS test set FIL TEST meter (1, fig. 3-18) should indicate red line. If not, adjust the power amplifier filament control on transmitter panel 1 (18, fig. 2-5) accordingly. (8) The FILAMENT VOLTAGE meter on transmitter panel 1 (12, fig. 2-5) should indicate red line. If not, calibrate the FILAMENT VOLTAGE meter to the red line by adjusting the FIL METER CAL potentiometer (R1) on the right side panel of transmitter panel 1. (9) Disconnect cable connector A20P4 (15, fig. 3-18) from the HVPS connector A6J3. (10) Connect cable connector A7P2 (12, fig. 8-18) to the HVPS connector A6J3. (11) Refer to table 3-19 for the check of the power amplifier cavities. 5-61TM 9—1430—533—12—1 NOTE: REFER TO APPENDIX D FOR SERIAL NUMBER EFFECTIVITY. MI 646748 Figure 5-4. Replacement of the power amplifier tube, master oscillator, and af-rf amplifier. t Google iTM9—1430—533—12—1 Master oscillator (tunable) 2-At-f amplifier ‘3Hoee assembly 4—Hoee assembly ‘5—-Hoee assembly 6—Tube assembly ‘1—Power amplifier tube 8—Howe assembly 9—Howe assembly 10—Master oscillator (removed) 11—Preformed packing 12—Electrical connector A4P2 13—Af-rf amplifier (removed) an 14—Captive serew 15—Hove assembly 16—Power amplifier tube(removed) 17—Are detector erystal attenuator 18—Preformed packing 19—Connector P18 26—Connector P26 Figure 5-4—Continued. 5-9. Replacement of the Master Oscillator (Tunable) Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF and ground all points of high poten- tial before performing maintenance. Use only nonmagnetic tools when perfor- ming the following maintenance. Cap the waveguide fittings as soon as possible after disconnection. Cap the coolant line fittings as soon as possible after disconnection. Make certain that all residue from spilled coolant is thoroughly removed immediately with a dry cloth before applying power to the radar. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-4. a. Removal. Remove the master oscillator (tunable) (1 and 10). b. Installation. (1) Install the master oscillator (tunable) (1 and 10). NOTE Make certain that the specification informati the master oscillator (tunable) has been to the decals located on transmitter panel 1 (2) To obtain the approximate frequency setting of the tunable master oscillator tube, note the decal reading posted on transmitter panel 1. 58 (3) Refer to the master oscillator frequency correlation chart (fig. 3-21) to obtain the master oscillator tuning control setting. (4) Set the master oscillator tuning control dial to the appropriate setting. The exact frequency st- ting will be obtained when the test after installation is performed. c. Test After Installation. Perform the min power, power supplies, transmitter, and receiver weekly checks in chapter 3. 5-10. Replacement of the AF-RF Amplifier Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF and ground all points of high poten- tial before proceeding. Use only nonmagnetic tools when perfor ming the following maintenance. NoTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses referto figure 54 a. Removal. Remove the af-rf amplifier (2and 13. 6. Installation. Install the af-rf amplifier (2 and 13). c. Test After Installation. Refer to table 316 for check procedures. 5-11. Replacement of the Low-Pass Filter Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF and ground all points of high poten- tial before performing maintenance.Use only nonmagnetic tools when perfor- ming the following maintenance. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 55. a Removal. Remove the low-pass filter (5). b. Installation. Install the low-pass filter (5). c. Test After Installation. Refer to table 3-16 for heck procedures. 1-Blectrical connector P8 (mates with FL1J3) 2-Electrical connector P7 (mates with FL1J2) ‘3-Hlectrical connector P9 (mates with FL1J1) 4Captive screws S-Low-pass filter 6-RE transmitter assembly Figure 5-5. Replacement of the low:pats filter. TM 9—1430—S33—12—1 5-12. Replacement of the Degeneration Block Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF and ground all points of high poten- tial before performing maintenance. Use only nonmagnetic tools when perfor- ming the following maintenance. Cap the waveguide fittings with dust covers as soon as possible after discon- nection. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 6-6. a, Removal. (1) Disconnect electrical connectors (1) through (10). (2) Disconnect waveguide flange at upper tear of the degeneration block (11). Retain all hardware. (8) Remove and retain four base mounting screws and hardware. (4) Remove the degeneration block (11), be- ing careful to retain the preformed packing (12) for use with the new assembly. To prevent a potential hazard to per- sonnel or equipment make all wave- guide connections as described in par. B11. (1) Inspect preformed packing (12) as de- seribed for “O” rings in par. 6-1.1. (2) Position the degeneration block (11) for installation and start, but do not tighten, the four base mounting screws and hardware. 59TH 9—1430—$33—12-1 (8) Connect the waveguide flange at upper rear of the degeneration block (11) using retained hardware. (4) Tighten the four base mounting screws. /7 NOTE: REFER TO a ‘APPENDIX D FOR SERIAL NUMBER EFFECTIVITY MI 64676B 1—Hlectrieal connector P19 (mates with AdJ1) ‘2-Electrical connector P17 (mates with A3d1) ‘3~Electrical connector P16 (mates with A2d1) 4—Hlectrical connector P20 (mates with A14d1) 5—Electrical connector P21 (mates with A731) 6—Electrical connector P22 (mates with A14A1J1) ‘7—Electrical connector P10 (mates with A8d1) ‘8-Electrical connector P18 (mates with A9J1) % Electrical connector WAPI (mates with A6J1) 10-Bleetrical connector W5PI (mates with A6J2) 11—Degeneration block 12-Preformed packing 13-Loop clamp 14-Rf pallet Figure 5-6. Replacement of the degeneration block. ‘Refer to appendix D for serial number effeetivity. 5-10 a (5) Connect electrical connectors (1) through (10), ¢. Test After Installation. Refer to table 3.19 for test procedures. 5-13. Replacement of the RF Transmitter Assembly High voltage is used in the operation of the rf transmitter assembly. Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF before performing maintenance. When removing or installing the rf trans- mitter assembly, use only the pallet base for handholds. In units *(BN)! use the supplied handles. Do not use any of the components for a handhold, as this could cause serious damage to the unit. a. Removal, NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 541 (1) Remove the power amplifier tube (par. 5-8a). (2) Remove the waveguide cover (1) from the trailer pallet. (8) Remove the flexible waveguide flange (3) by removing eight socket head screws (2). Cover the waveguide flange with a dust cover as soon as possible after the discon- nection has been made. (4) Remove the inner bellows retainer (5) by removing six panhead screws (4). (5) Remove the preformed packing (6) from the rf transmitter assembly directional coupler (7). NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer ‘to figure 5-7.™ 9—1430—$33—12—-1 MS 432451 1—Waveguide cover 5—Inner bellows retainer 2—-Socket-head screw (8) 6—Preformed packing . 3—-Plexible waveguide flange ‘7-Rf transmitter assembly directional coupler 4—Panhead screw (6) Figure §-6.1. Removal of the rf transmitter assembly woaveguide. I™ 9—1430—533—12—1 ow NOTE: REFER TO APPENDIX D FOR SERIAL NUMBER ; EFFECTIVITY 168 Ms 432452 1-nDes Electrical connector JI (mates with AI7PI8) 2—WIP15 12—Electrical connector J2 (mates with A17P39) 43—Hove assembly (marker band “B") 18Electrical connector J3 (mates with WPL) 4—Hose assembly (marker band "C") lectrical connector AGJ2 (mates with W5P1) 5—Hose assembly (marker band “D") Electrical connector AGJI (mates with WAPI) (6—Hose assembly (marker band “E") 16—Quick-release pin (2) 1-—Hose assembly (marker band *F") 17—Slide (2) ‘8—Hose assembly (marker band 18—Hex-head screw (6) 9 Hose assembly (marker band 19—Rf transmitter assembly 10—Electrical connector W12S1 (mates with W6P1) ‘20—Abeorption paper Figure 6-7. Replacement af the rf transmitter assembly. 5-10.2»prevent damage to electrical connectors J1DC5(1) id W1P15(2) from glycol, cover the connectors with protective cloth. (6) Disconnect hose assemblies (3 through 9). Catch any coolant that drains out of the coolant lines and cap all lines and fittings ‘as soon as possible. Dispose of the coolant per local safety regulations. Make certain that all spilled coolant is thoroughly re- moved immediately with a dry cloth be- fore removing any electrical cables or applying power to the radar. (1) Disconnect electrical connectors (10 through 45) (8) Remove the two quick-release pins (16) and poll the rf transmitter assembly (19) until the irawer slides (17) are fully extended. Use at least four men when removing or installing the rf transmitter assembly to prevent injury to personnel. (9) Remove the master oscillator (tunable) (par. 59a). (10) Remove the rf transmitter assembly from the slides by removing six hex head screws (18). Cover the directional coupler flange with ‘a dust cover as soon as possible after the isconnection has been made. 4 Installation, Use at least four men when installing the rf transmitter assembly to prevent injury to personnel. ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 (1) Install the rf transmitter assembly on the slides. (2) Install the power amplifier tube (par. 5-8b). (8) Install the master oscillator (tunable) (par. 5-96). (4) Slide the rf transmitter assembly into the radar transmitter console and secure it using the two quick-release pins. (5) Connect electrical connectors (10 through 15). (6) Connect hose assemblies (3 through 9). (1) Install the preformed packing on the rf transmitter assembly directional coupler. (8) Install the inner bellows retainer using six panhead screws. (9) Install the flexible waveguide flange on the directional coupler using eight socket-head screws (par. 5-1.1). (10) Perform rf detection test (par. 4-17). (11) Install the waveguide cover. c. Test After Installation. Refer to table 3-16 for check procedures. 5-14. Replacement of the Liquid Cooler Unit WARNING } Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE and the main power switch to OFF (1 and 4, fig. 2-14) be- fore performing maintenance. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 6-8. a. Removal. (1) Open the liquid cooler door. (2) Drain the cooling systems as described in paragraph 4-8b and clean all components. (8) Disconnect the electrical connector (1).TM 9—1430—533—12—1 (2) Install the eight machine screws and washers (6 and 7). (8) Connect the rubber hose assemblies through 5). (4) Connect the electrical connector (1). (5) Fill the unit and check the coolant fal level (par. 4-82). (6) Close and secure the liquid cooler door, 5-15. Replacement of the High-Voltage Pown Supply Test Set Make certain that all spilled coolant is thoroughly removed immediately with a dry cloth before applying power to the radar. MI 64678A a. Removal and Installation. Remove and instal the high-voltage power supply test set (fig. 5-9). 1—Electrical connector 2 Rubber hove assembly b. Teat After Installation. Refer to table $1! '3—-Rubber hove assembly for check procedures, 4—-Rubber hove assembly ‘5—Rubber hose assembly 6—Machine screw (8) ‘7—Lock washer (8) 8—Liquid cooler unit 5-16. Replacement of the Rotary Pump Figure 5-8. Replacement of the liquid cooler unit WARNING } (4) Disconnect the rubber hose assemblies Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to (2 through 5) and catch the coolant fluid overflow SAFE and the main power switch to OFF in a container. (1 and 4, fig. 2-14) before performing maintenance. nore ‘Make certain that all spilled coolant Resae Ut Tenica oieeaios nds is thoroughly removed immediately ' with a dry cloth before applying power a. Removal to the radar. (1) Open the liquid cooler door. (5) Remove the eight machine screws and lock washers (6 and 7). (8) Remove the filler cap (1). (6) Remove the liquid cooler unit (8). (4) Open the draincock (7). . (5) Disconnect the rubber hose assembly (4 ¢ eames 5-8) from the liquid cooler unit and catch the cols (1) Install the liquid cooler unit (8). overflow in a container. 5-1216 ‘Make certain that all residue from spilled coolant is thoroughly removed immedi- ately with a dry cloth. Check before applying power to the radar. TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 NOTE ‘When the hose clamp (4) is removed, the entire contents of the coolant tank drain. Provide a ‘container of adequate size to catch the fluid. (8) Disconnect the hose assembly (5) and the preformed hose (2). (7) Disconnect the electrical connector (3). (8) Remove the rotary pump (8). 1 Bieta connector J (mates with wring harness AITPAB) 2 Blectreal onnetor 4 (mes wth cable taembly W18) Wiring tarnee ANT {Cable emembly WIB ‘5—Cable assembly W12 6—Cable assembly W10 Toeable Pe mates with J2 dummy ond Cable P ates with 1 dummy lad) $-Blctrlcal eonnector 8 (mates with abl assembly W12) 10—Electrical connector J3 (mates with cable assembly W10) Li—High-oltage power supply tat set 1 ieTurloc fester Figure 59, Replacement of the high-voltage ‘Power supply test set. 5-121Digitce 6. Installation. NOTE ‘Remove the shipping plugs from the rotary pump at the time of installation. (1) Install the rotary pump (8). (2) Reconnect the hose assemblies and electrical ‘connector. (8) Fill the cooling system (par. 4-82). (4) Install the air and rf filters. (6) Close the liquid cooler door. ¢. Test After Installation. Refer to table 8-14 for check procedures. 5-17. Replacement of the Nutating Scanner Assembly Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE and the main power switch to OFF (1 and 4, fig. 2-14). Cap the waveguide fittings with dust ‘covers as soon as possible after disconnec- tion. NOTE ‘Tae key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 6-11. a. Removal. (1) Remove the two waveguide assemblies (3 and (2) Disconnect the plug from electrical connector 1@. (8) Remove the nutating scanner assembly (1). b. Installation. NOTE Ingure that the slots on the motor-generator housing ‘and on the support bracket of the nutating scanner aeembly are alined, (1) Install the nutating scanner assembly (1) with electrical connector J1 (2) in the three o'clock position. ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 (2) Connect the plug to electrical connector J1. (8) Install the two waveguide assemblies (3 and 4). ¢. Test After Installation. Refer to table 8-17 for |f check procedures. 5-18. Replacement of the Secant Elevation Amplifier | WARNING } Set the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to OFF and ground all points of high poten- tial before performing maintenance. 11—Hoee and fitting assembly 12—Liquid cooler Figure 5-10, Replacement of the rotary pump.TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 4—Waveguide assembly 10111667 Figure 5-11. Replacement of the nutating scanner assembly. S14a. Removal. (1) Open the radar set group main fuse panel (4, ig LD. (2) Remove the secant elevation amplifier (fig. 5- 6, Installation. (1) Install the secant elevation amplifier (fig. 5- 12). (2) Close the radar set group main fuse panel. ¢. Test After Installation. Refer to table 3-18 for check procedures. 5:19. Replacement of the 100-, +50-, and #12.6-Vde Power Supply Assemblies a Removal and Installation. The removal and TH 9—1430—533—12—1 installation of the 100-, +50, +12.6-vde power supply (fig. 5-13) and its assemblies is obvious by illustration. Insure that the HIPIR is properly de- energized before attempting removal or installation. Adjustment of the 100-, +50-, +12.6-vde power supply outputs must be made at a slow rate and only up to the specified voltage value. Do not allow voltage out- puts to exceed the specified value from either maladjustment or rapid adjustment. Failure to observe these precautions will result in damage to circuits within trackers 1 and 2. 1Seeant elevation amplifier 2Electrical connector AZIJ1 (mates with A12P7) ‘8Electrieal connector A12P7(mates with AZ1J1) Figure 5-12, Replacement of the secant elevation amplifier. 5-15™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Ms 157497 1—Communications station (A8) ‘7— -12.6-Vde power supply (Ad) w 8~50-Vde power supply (A7) 3—Washer 9-100-Vde power supply (A5) 4—50-Vde power supply (A1) 10-Plate 5- -50-Vde power supply (A2) 11—Washer 6-12.6-Vde power supply (A3) 12-Serew Figure 5-13. Replacement of the communications station, 100-, +50-, and +12.6-vde ‘Power supply assemblies.b. Test After Installation. NOTE ‘The following power supply adjustments must, bbe made prior to application of power. (1) Set the +100V ADJ (9, fig. 2-4) fully counterclockwise, (2) Set the +50V ADJ RSG (10, fig. 2-4) fully counterclockwise. (3) Set the —50V ADJ (11, fig. 2-4) fully sounterclockwise. (4) Set the +50V ADJ RCVR (12, fig. 2-4) fully counterclockwise. (5) Set the —12.6V ADJ (13, fig. 2-4) fully counterclockwise. (6) Set the +12.6V ADJ (14, fig. 2-4) fully counterclockwise. (1) Reter to table 3-15, step 3 for the check procedures to be performed. 5191. Replacement of the Elevation Motor-Tachometer Generator a. Removal. Failure to perform step (1) could cause injury to personnel or damage to the equipment. (1) Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, {%.2-14) to the SAFE position, and the mainpower switch (4, fig. 2-14) to the OFF position. NOTE The key numbers shown below in parentheses reler to figure 5-14, (2) If necessary, remove the liquid cooler air intake cover (1) from its storage position on the elevation head. (3) Remove the pedestal head access cover (2) and the seal (3) from the elevation head (6). (4) Remove the ventilating hose (4) from the tr intake port of the motor-tachometer generator 6). (6) Identify, tag, and remove the electrical ads from the two terminal boards on the motor- ‘uchometer generator. (6) Remove the four self-locking bolts and {ut washers that secure the motor-tachometer frenator, MS 166353 Liquid cooler air intake cover (storage position) 2-Pedestal head access cover 3-Seal 4—Venttilating hose yn motor-tachometer generator head Figure 5-14. Replacement of the elevation motor-tachometer generator. (7) Remove the motor-tachometer generator by pulling straight out to allow spur gear on end of shaft to disengage from mating gear. ». Installation. Failure to perform steps (1) and (2) could cause damage to the equipment. (1) Remove dust cap from the air intake port of the replacement motor-tachometer generator. (2) Coat the gear teeth of the replacement motor-tachometer generator with grease 9160-00- 986-7246, 5-17TH 9—1490—533—12—1 (8) Install the replacement motor-tachometer Being careful to mesh the gears and secure with the four self-locking bolts and flat washers. (4) Connect the electrical leads to the two terminal boards of the motor-tachometer generator. (5) Connect the ventilating hose (4) to the air intake port of the motor-tachometer generator. (6) Install the pedestal head access cover (2) ‘and seal (3) to the elevation head (6). . Test After Installation. Refer to the antenna positioning checks in table 3-18 for check proce- dures. 5-19.2. Replacement of the Azimuth Motor-Tachometer Generator Removal, Failure to perform step (1) could cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment. (1) Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) to the SAFE position, and the main power switch (4, fig. 2-14) to the OFF position. ~~ NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses * refer to figure 5-18. -(2) Remove the cover (1) from the pedestal ‘base (4). (8) Identity, tag, and remove the electrical leads from the two terminal boards on the motor- tachometer generator (3). (4) Remove the bolts and flat washers that secure the motor-tachometer generator. (5) Remove the motor-tachometer generator by pulling straight out to allow spur gear on end of shaft to disengage from mating gear. 5-18 ®. Installation. Failure to perform steps (1) and (2) could cause damage to the equipment. (1) Remove dust cap from air intake port ( of the replacement motor-tachometer generator. (2) Coat the gear teeth of the replacema motor-tachometer generator with grease 9150-0 985-7246, (3) Install the replacement motor-tachomet generator being careful to mesh the gears and secu with the bolts and flat washers. (4) Connect the electrical leads to the tw terminal boards of themotor-tachometer generata (5) Install the cover (1) to the pedestal ba (4). ¢. Test After Installation. Refer to the antenn Positioning checks in table 3-18 for check pro cedures, 5-19.3. Replacement of the CONTROL INTER LOCK Pushbutton Switch on Transmit ter Panel No. 1 NOTE This procedure applies only to HIPIR’s 275001 ‘through 380001. a. Removal. Failure to perform step (1) could cause injury to personnel. (1) Set MAIN POWER circuit breaker (25, fig. 2-5) to off. (2) Open transmitter panels 1 and 2 (1 and 2, fig. 1-2). NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 5-16.T™ 9—1430—$33—12—-1 7 MS 166354 ‘1—Access door and cover 2-Air intake port 3-Motor-tachometer generator 4-Pedestal Figure 5-15. Replacement of the azimuth motor-tachometer generator. 5-181TH 9—1430—533—12—1 MS 432453 4—Transmitter panel 1 cover 5—-CONTROL INTERLOCK pushbutton switch (P/N 9176165) 6—CONTROL INTERLOCK pushbutton switch (P/N M8805/23-008) Figure §-16, Replacement of the CONTROL INTERLOCK pushbutton switch on transmitter panel no. 1. 5-182(3) Disconnect A17P7 from J2 (1). (4) Disconnect A17P8 from J3 (2). (5) Disconnect A17P6 from J4 (3). (6) Remove transmitter panel 1 cover (4). (1) If the existing switch is P/N 9176165 (5), move three screws from the switch. (8) If the existing switch is P/N M8805/23-003 '), remove the nut and lockwasher from the switch. (9) Tag and remove all wires from the switch. b Installation. (1) If the old switch was P/N 9176165 (5), fill te three unused screw mounting holes on transmit- srpanel 1 with epoxy (IC white) and spray paint the iled holes. (2) Reverse the anti-rotate tab ring on the new YNTROL INTERLOCK pushbutton switch (P/N 48805/23-003) so that the tab faces away from the ‘ounting panel. (3) Connect the tagged wires to the pushbutton witch. (4) Install threaded portion of the switch through the existing switch mounting hole and weure it with the supplied lockwasher and nut. 6) Replace transmitter panel 1 cover. (6) Connect A17P7 to J2. (1) Connect A17P8 to J3. (8) Connect A17P6 to J4. (9) Close transmitter panels 1 and 2. NOTE The CONTROL INTERLOCK pushbutton switch is activated by a plunger on the transmitter console ‘oor when the door is closed. (10) Adjust the door plunger so that it does not ‘nly excessive force on the plastic pushbutton when the oor is closed. T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 5-19.4, Replacement of the Radar Signal Simulator Deenergize the radar (table 3-13) and set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE before starting this procedure. Before disassembling any waveguide fit- tings, inspect for the presence of shims. Retain for use in the same position during installation. Cap open waveguide fittings with dust covers as soon as possible after disconnection. NOTE To ease replacement, have the new radar signal simulator on hand before starting this procedure. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below refer to figure 5-17. a, Removal. (1) Disconnect the electrical connectors (1 through 5). (2) Disconnect and cap the flexguide flanges (6 and 7). (3) Remove the flexguide assembly (8). Mount to the new radar signal simulator immediately. Cap the waveguide openings. Support the waveguide/flexguide assem- bly (9) for the entire time it is not clamped to protect the waveguide to radar signal simulator flexguide connection from excessive bending or stress. 5518.3™ 91430533121 fet = = Qo02 , Q008 1) Telter— ° ie 12 MS 432454 |—Electrial connector 4—Blectrical connector 5—Blectrical connector 6—Flexguide flange ‘1—Flexguide flange 8Flexguide assembly 9—Wavequide/flexquide assembly 10—Wavequide clamps 11—Hex-head bolts (4) 12—Connector bracket, 13—Flenguide Figure 5-17. Replacement af the radar signal simulator. 5-1847 (4) Remove and retain the three waveguide slamps (10) and clamp shims. Note shim positions. (5) Remove and retain the four hex-head bolts (11) and washers that secure the radar signal simulator. Move the connector bracket (12) out of the way. (6) Remove the radar signal simulator while supporting the waveguide/flexguide assembly on the left hand side. (1) Remove the waveguide/flexguide assembly and the flexguide (13) from the old radar signal simulator and install on the replacement unit. 6, Installation. Make all waveguide connections per par. 5-11 to avoid potential danger to person- nel or equipment. Insure that all waveguide shims are installed with their openings alined with the waveguide openings. T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 (1) Position the radar signal simulator while supporting the waveguide/flexguide assembly (9). Loosely install the three waveguide clamps (10) and clamp shims. (2) Position the connector bracket (12) and install the four hex-head bolts (11) and washers. Tighten. (8) Connect the waveguide flanges (6 and 7). (4) Tighten the three waveguide clamps left loose in (1) above. (5) Connect the loose end of flexguide assembly (8). (6) Connect the electrical connectors (1 through 5). c. Test After Installation. Refer to table 3-20 for alinement procedure. 5-20. Replacement of Additional Units ‘The removal or replacement of the units listed in table 5-1 is obvious, Make certain that the radar is deenergized before performing maintenance. For the appropriate test after installation, refer to the table or tables listed for each unit. For those units with no table reference, refer to the fault isolation procedures in TM 9—1430—533—12—2.TH 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 5-1. Replacrmeut af Additional Cnite on Azimuth or elevation control amplif Bride nulling Comparator Cooling s) ation IF amplif ation IF test set “network amplifier, modulator d switch control Ground speed campute Power supply (~320, (100, 150, 3 vdeo Power supply Power supply (300, 90, 28 vided iar set control, Kar set eroup test set, Ripple sensing unit. TRefer to appendix D for serial number effectivity. 5-20 (AD! 11669822 10045640 11669948 *(AW)* 10669385 *(AV)* 10065600 10288265 *(AQ)' 1OLS1821 1067 LOIBI881 10878090 10067285, 3-18 316 318 316 316 317 318 318 318 317 3-16 3-18 316 3-16, 3.17 3-16 3-16, 3-17 38 3-16, 3:18 318 3-17 313 3-8, 3-9, 3:10 38 3-8, 3-10 3-18 3-18 3-18 318 3-16 3-18 3:17 3-16ce ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Tuble 5-1. Replacement of Additional Unita = Continwed Chek prose nit rem opr ‘uh ‘Signal comparator. 10183190 3:18 Simulator control group. 10288696 *(Y)', 18 10676319 *(X)! Tracker 1. 10292815 *(AY)! 218 I 10202870 *(AX) (AE)* 10678008 *(AD)* Tracker 2. 10292746 *(AD!, $18 I 10288822 *(AA)!, 10678002 *(Z) ‘Transmit relay unnembly. 10085844 3-9, 8-10 Transmitter tage power xupply. 10103347 38, 8-10 Tranamitter text set. 10112395 Triple IF amplifier. 10183275 \ Refer to appendix D for serial number effectivity.Digit10 T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 CHAPTER 6 PREPARATION FOR TRAVEL Section I. 6-1. Scope Preparation for travel of the IHIPIR is pre- sented in this chapter. Paragraphs 6-4 and 6-5 contain general information on the transportation of the equipment by truck (prime mover), cargo aireraft, and helicopter. Paragraphs 6-8 and 6-9 contain the preparation for travel procedures. Section Il. 6-4, Transportation by Truck The M85 truck (prime mover) is usually used to tow the IHIPIR to the battery site. Supporting equipment for the radar is transported in the bed of the prime mover. 65. Transportation by Air 4, Helicopter. The IHIPIR is helicopter lifted by means of a suspension sling assembly. This assembly and other associated helicopter lifting components are shown in figure 6-1 and table 6-1. The storage bag (7, fig. 6-1) is used to stow the components when not in use. The grounding device assembly (1, fig. 6-1) is used to ground the heli- copter lifting hook (2, fig. 6-18) before hookup of the IHIPIR, This device is fabricated locally as described in subparagraph (2) below. Two spreader bar assemblies (fig. 6-5) are used to pre- vent the suspension sling assembly legs from’ bearing against sharp edges and fragile or lightly conatructed parts of the equipment being lifted. These assemblies are fabricated locally as de- seribed in subparagraph (8) below. (1) Suspension sling assembly. The suspen- sion sling assembly (fig. 6-2) required to lift the THIPIR consists of four nylon web and chain legs connected to a 30.5 em (1 ft) diameter nylon web ring. Each leg is 7.01 m (28 ft) long and consista of £4.87 m (15 ft) nylon web leg with a 2.44 m (8 ft) chain assembly bolted to the end of the nylon web GENERAL 6-2. Explanation of Procedures ‘The preparation for travel procedures describe the most efficient method of converting the IHIPIR from a completely emplaced radar into a mobile unit, 6-3. Trailer ‘The M890 trailer is used to support the IHIPIR. For detailed information pertaining to the M890 trailer, refer to TM 9-2830-235-14, (METHODS OF TRANSPORTATION MS 156058 1-Grounding device assembly 2-Load binder 8 _Quick-fittledown fastener 4-457 m (15 ft) tledown strap STape 6-Suspension sling assembly ‘T-Storage bag Figure 6-1, Helicopter lifting components. onT™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 10 Table 6-1. Desoription of Helleopter Lifting Components ‘Suspension sling assembly (2) Nylon cord Protective padding Webstrap (2) Load binder (2) Strap fastener (2) ‘Adhesive tape Storage bag Grounding device assembly Spreader bar assembly (2) Nails MS 156059 1-805 em (1 ft) web ring 2-4.57 m (16 ft) nylon web leg. Grab link 4-2.44 m (8 ft) chain leg Figure 6-8. Helicopter suspension sling—typical. Nylon and chain leg cargo sling; 7.01 m (23 ft) long; 16,000 Ibe capacity ‘Nylon cord, 8.18 mm (1/8-in.) diameter Callulose wadding, cushioning material ‘Nylon webbing, 4.57 m (15 tt) long, 1 ply Eccentric takeup, w/lever Quick-At buckle Preseure sensitive, 5 em (2 in.) wide, 64.9 m (60 yds) long Cotton duck, OD, w/sipper Rater to paragraph 6-6a for fabrication instructions Rater to paragraph 6-6a for fabrication instructions 10d, 7.62 cm (3 in.), or 16d, 8.89 cm (8-1/2 in.) leg. The sling legs can be adjusted in length to compensate for the center of gravity or construe- tion of the item to be lifted, Figure 68 shows a typical chain leg hookup of the suspension sling assembly. Instructions for sling preparation for the IHIPIR are given in section III. (2) Grounding Device Assembly. The ground- ing device assembly (1, fig. 6-1) must be fabri- cated locally. Detailed procedures for fabricating this device are as follows: NOTE ‘The letters, and key numbers in parentheses, shown below refer to figure 6-4. (a) Obtain a 61m (2 ft) section of 25.4 mm (1 in.) copper tubing (1) or other suitable material and fabricate as shown in A. (Do not apply insulating material at this time), (6) Obtain a 264mm (1 in.) strip of copper material (4) or other suitable material, 25.4 em (10 in.) long and fabricate as shown in B. (c) Attach the copper strip to the copper tubing with two self-threading screws. (d) Obtain a piece of copper braid (2) or other suitable material, which has a minimum length of 7.98 m (26 ft) and fabricate as shown inc. (e) Attach one end of the copper braid to the copper tubing with a 44-inch bolt, lockwasher, and nut.cro (f), Obtain a 80.5 cm (12 in.) copper rod (8) or other suitable material and fabricate as shown in D. (g) Attach the remaining end of the cop- per braid to the copper rod with a %-ineh bolt, lockwasher, and nut. (A) Insulate one-half of the copper tubing with an insulating tape as shown in A. (8) Spreader Bar Assembly. The two spreader bar assemblies are fabricated locally. Detailed procedures for fabricating each assembly (fig. 6-5) are as follows: MS 156060 ‘Tm 91430533121 (c) Obtain the required number of lengths of 6.08 x 10.2 cm (2x 4 in.) lumber or other sult- able material. (b) Obtain the required nails for construc- tion of the spreader bar assembly (table 6-1). (c) Cut three pieces of lumber as shown in view A, figure 6-5. (d) Nail the pieces of lumber together as shown in view B, figure 6-5. >. Cargo Aircraft. When the IHIPIR is trans- ported by cargo aircraft, the preparation for travel procedure is the same as for the prime mover. 1-Grab link 2-Te point ‘STaped excess chain Figure 6-3. Suspension sling assembly-typical chain lag hookup.‘Ta 91490833121 cra Section Ill, 646. General ‘This section describes the preparation for travel for the IHIPIR by prime mover (par. 6-8) and by helicopter (par. 6-9). 7. Toots ‘The tools required to prepare the IHIPIR for travel are a common screwdriver, a cross- recessed screwdriver, 7/16-inch wrench, and Allen wrenches. These are stowed in the general me- chanics tool kit. 68 Preparation for Travel Procedures— Prime Mover @ The detailed procedures for preparing the IHIPIR for travel are as follows: (1) Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (6, fig. 6-6) to the SAFE position. +4 PREPARATION FOR TRAVEL Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH remains in the SAFE posi- tion to prevent the antenna from rotat- ing should electrical power be applied while personnel are working on or near the antenna. (2) Deenergize the IHIPIR (table 8-7). Prior to handling system power cable, insure that the generator main power circuit breaker is set to off. Prior to handling an on-trailer cable of ‘a major item, set the major item main power circuit breaker to off.TM 91430533121 MS 164645 Figure 6-5. Spreader bar assembly. os‘Th —1430—533-—12—1 cs (8) Disconect all power and data cables and on the antenna, and secure them with the prote- cap the connectors and receptacles with the pro- tive cover cords. tective caps. (8) Manually rotate the antenna 90 that t (4) Mount the protective covers (1, fig. 6-6) faces the stow position shown in figure 6-6. 1—Protective covers ‘Headset storage box Receiver exhaust alr vent cover ‘8-Radar eet group exhaust vent cover ‘S-Tranamitter set group door exhaust vent cover ‘9_Radar set group air intake cover 4-Ground rod storage 10—Lever S-PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH 11—Pedestal intake cover 6-Motor-generator intake-exhaust vent cover 19—Elevation STOW lock Figure 6-8. IHIPIR preparation for travel and emplacoment-right front view.NOTE ‘Unleee otherwise indicated, the key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 6-7. (6) Rotate the azimuth STOW lock (22) clockwise until the stow pin is fully engaged with the torque tube and the antenna cannot be moved in either direction. (7) Lower the antenna to the lower mechanical Umit. Engage the elevation STOW lock (12, fig. 6-6) by turning the handle clockwise. It may be necessary to move the antenna slightly in elevation to engage the lock, (8) Remove the exhaust air vent cover (2, fig. 6-6) from the stowed location on the exhaust air vent and secure it to the receiver compartment hood exhaust air vent. (9) Disconnect the elevation motor exhaust cover (28) from the dummy receptacle (24) and connect it to the elevation motor exhaust (25). (10) Close and secure the exhaust air vent cover on the rear of the liquid cooling cabinet (18). (11) Close and secure the air intake cover (8, fig. 6-6) on the rear of the radar set group cabinet. (12) Close and secure the pedestal intake cover (11, fig. 6-6). (18) Remove and stow the intake-exhaust vent hood from the motor generator assembly, and remove the intake-exhaust vent cover (6, fig. 6-8) from the stowed location and secure it to the motor-generator assembly. (14) Remove and stow the transmitter cabi- ‘net intake vent hood, remove the intake cover (17) from the stowed location and secure it to the transmitter cabinet, and secure the exhaust cover to the transmitter door (8, fig. 6-6). (15) Remove the exhaust vent cover from the stowed location and secure it to the hood on the rear of the transmitter set group cabinet. (16) Remove the exhaust vent covers (8, fig. 6-6 and 20, fig. 6-7) from the stowed locations and secure them to the radar set group cabinet exhaust hoods. (17) Remove the air intake vent cover from the stowed location on the rear of the antenna pedestal head, secure it to the liquid cooling cabl- ast air intake (19), and stow the hood. (18) Disconnect the headset from the com- ‘munication station located on the front panel of the 100, #:50-, 12.6-vde power supply, and stow Tm 9—1430—$33—12—1 headset in the headset storage box (7, fig. 6-6) on the rear of the radar set group cabinet. (19) Secure all chassis drawers and panels in the radar set group and transmitter set group. (20) Close and secure the cabinet covers (1 and 16), (21) If the IHIPIR all-weather shelters (figs. 6-8, 6-9) are emplaced, refer to TM 10-8840-208-18 for the preparation for travel procedures. If not, Proceed to step (22). (22) Remove the ground rod cable (18), from the ground rod cable attach point (15), and the ground rod (12), (23) Remove the ground rod (see note be- low). (a) Position the tripod (1) so that the pulley (6) is directly over the ground rod. (b) Drive the prime mover toward the tri- pod and hook the retrieving cable (2) to a towing Point on the front of the vehicle, (¢) Attach the ground rod grip (8) to the base of ground rod (4) and secure the latch. (d) Attach the cable yoke to the eye of the grip. (c) Insure that the tripod leg that is op- posite the pulley is in line with the retrieving cable. (f) Back off the prime mover, stopping when the cable yoke has run to the cable restrain- ing pin (5). (g) If the ground rod has not pulled free, and cannot be removed by hand, unlatch the grip, drive the truck forward, reattach the grip to the base of the ground rod, and back off the vehicle once more, (24) Stow the ground rod and the ground rod cable in the ground rod storage location (14, fig. 67). b, The detailed procedures for preparing the M800 trailer, which supports the IHIPIR, for travel are as follows: 7T™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 on 1-Radar set group cabinet cover ‘2-Jack crank stow brackets ‘8-Rear leveling jack crank ‘1—Rear leveling jack horizontal lock Rear leveling jack vertical lock 9-Ground pad 10—Rear leveling jack M—Crankshaft 12-Ground rod 18-Ground rod cable MI 705090 14-Ground rod storage 15—Ground rod eable attach point 16—Transmitter set group cabinet cover ‘17—Transmitter set group air intake vent cover 18—Liquid cooling eabinet 19—Liquid cooler air intake vent cover ‘20—-Radar set group exhaust alr vent cover ‘27— Liquid cooler air vent (storage TO8) Figure 6-7. IHIPIR preparation for travel ond emplocement—left rear view.cs TM 91430533121 MI 70603A 1-Aft tent outer top support 18-Bar pin 2-Aft tant inner top support 14-Collar Aft tent 16-Front tent support pole ‘4-Polyestar cord 16-Front tant support pole adapter See 17_Aft tant support pole adapter Elbow 18-Bar pin ‘Front tant 19-Collar 8-Front tent inner top support 20-Aft tent side top support 9-Front tent side top support 21—Aft tant support pole 10-Elbow 22 Machine screw 1-Teo 28—Tent rope hem 12-Froat tent outer top support Figure ¢8. IHIPIR front and oft tente-frame assembly. (1) Remove the rear leveling jack cranks (3) from the stow brackets (2) and position them on the crankshafts (11) of the two rear leveling jacks (10). Insure that the front support is locked (2) Turn the cranks counterclockwise and in the down position; that the hand- retract the rear leveling jacks until they are clear brake levers are set; and that the of the ground and the weight of the trailer is on wheels are resting firmly on the the wheels, the front leveling jacks, and the front ground, support jack. NOTE ‘Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers ‘Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure shown below in parentheses refer to figure 6-7. 12,‘Tm 91490533121 ‘T-Tiedown rope 8-806 cm (12 in.) tent pin 10 MS 164713 it slip ‘15—405 cm (16 in.) tant pin Figure 6-9. IHIPIR front and aft tente—emplaced, (8) Stow each front leveling jack (8) as fol (a) Remove the leveling jack crank (8) from the stow bracket (7) on the A-frame and position it on the jack crankshaft (2). (b) Turn the crank counterclockwise to re- ‘tract the jack. (c) Remove the jack crank. (d) Pull up and hold the front leveling jack vertical lock (4). (e) Swing the jack upward until it is hori- zontal. Release the vertical lock. (4) Position the jack crank on the center leveling jack crankshaft (1) and turn it counter clockwise to retract the jack. (5) Remove and stow the jack crank. (6) Stow the center leveling jack as follows&-Cable restraining pin 6-Pulley Figure 6-11. Removal of ground rod. [etanon} Be careful not to damage the trailer airbrake line (6, fig. 6-15) when atow- ing the center leveling jack. (a) Pull up and hold the jack vertical lock an. (0) Tilt the jack sideways approximately 80 degrees and release the lock. (ec) Push down on the jack horizontal lock (10), swing the jack enough to clear the horizontal lock detent, and release the lock. (d) Carefully swing the jack beneath the trailer while continuing to tilt the jack sideways so asto clear the trailer yoke. Be careful not to bump the airbrake line with the jack. (e) After the trailer yoke is cleared, swing the jack upward until it locks in the horizontal position. ™ $—1430—$33—12—-1 (f) Swing the jack beneath the trailer un- til it locks in position, (7) Connect the trailer to the prime mover as ibed below: (a) ‘Open the pintle hook (8, fig. 6-18) on the prime mover by removing the locking pin and Ufting the spring-loaded T-bar latch (1 and 2, fig. 618). (b) Back the prime mover up to the trailer to that the pintle hook is directly under the lunette (4, fig. 6-18). (c) Engage the lunette on the open pintle by retracting the front support jack (8, fig. 6-14) with the jack crank (6, fig. 6-14). (4) Close the pintle hook and insert the locking pin. (e) Remove the trailer airbrake hose (8, fig. 6-15) from the dummy coupling (2, fig. 6-15) and connect it to the service coupling at the rear of the prime mover. (f) Open the service coupling shutoff cock on the prime mover. MI 150668A 1-Centar leveling jack crankshaft Front leveling jack crankshaft 8-Front leveling jack 4-Front leveling jack vertical lock 5 Handbrake lever ‘Canter leveling jack horizontal lock bracket ‘Stow S-Laveling jack crank ‘9-Canter leveling jack 10—Centar leveling jack horizontal lock 11—Center leveling jack vertical lock Figure 6-18. M300 trailer forward leveling jeoks— ‘Preparation for travel and emplacement,TM 9—1430—533—12—1 1-Pintle hook locking pin 2-Spring-loaded T-bar latch 8-Pintle hook 4-Lunetta Figure 6-18. Connecting trailer to prime mover. (g) Remove the intervehicular cable (4, fig. 6-15) from the stowage clip (5, fig. 6-15) and plug it into the receptacle on the rear of the prime mover. (i) Hook the safety chains (7, fig. 6-15) to the appropriate loops at the rear of the prime mover, (8) Fully retract the front support jack with the jack crank and then insert the crank in the stowage clip. (9) Lock the front support jack in the stow position by pulling the spring-loaded frame handle (1, fig. 6-14), and using the ground pad handle (4, fig. 6-14) to rotate the jack rearward and upward until the spring-loaded frame handle engages the holes in the top of the lunette mounting bracket (1, fig. 6-15). NOTE Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers shown in parentheses below refer to figure 6-7. (10) Stow each of the two rear leveling jacks as follows: 10 (a) Fully retract the jack with the jack crank. (b) Remove the jack crank and stow it in the stow bracket (2). (c) Pull up ard hold the vertical lock (8). (d) Swing the ground pad (9) rearward and upward to the horizontal position. Release the vertical lock. (e) Pull up and hold the horizontal lock mM. (f) Swing the jack horizontally until it is beneath the trailer. Release the horizontal lock. (11) Release the handbrake levers (5, fig. 6-12) on each side of the A-frame. MI 705124 1-Spring-loaded frame handle 2-Stowage clip 8-Front support jack 4-Ground pad handle ‘5-Support wheel 6-Front support jack crank ‘7Bracket and spindle assembly Figure 6-15, M340 trailer front eupport jock- ‘preparation for travel and emplacement.cio ¢. Prior to leaving the area, the following checks should be made: (1) The PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH is in the SAFE position. (2) All cables are disconnected, and the con- nectors and receptables properly capped. (8) The antenna protective covers are prop- erly installed. (4) The antenna is facing to the desired side of the trailer. (5) The azimuth and the elevation STOW locks are engaged. (6) The IHIPIR is properly secured to the ‘trailer. (7) All cabinet and vent covers are secured. (8) The ground rod and ground rod cable are disconnected and properly stowed. (9) The front support jack, leveling jacks, and jack cranks are properly stowed. (10) The trailer is properly connected to the prime mover. (11) The trailer lights are working properly. (12) The handbrakes are released. (18) The trailer brakes are working (move the prime mover a short distance and apply brakes). Figure 6.18. 890 trailer A-frame—preparation for travel and emplacement, ™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 69. Preparation for Travel Procedures— Helicopter a, The helicopter lifting kit (fig. 6-1) is pro- vided for each major item in the improved HAWK system. The kit contains the items necessary, ex- cept for the two spreader bars, to lift the IHIPIR and the M390 trailer by helicopter. b, Prepare the IHIPIR for helicopter lift as described below: (1) For preparation for travel procedures for the IHIPIR, refer to paragraph 6-80. In 6-8a(5) stow the antenna facing the trailer lunette (fig. 6-16). (2) For preparation for travel procedures for the M390 trailer, refer to paragraph 6-86 (1) through (5), and (8). ¢. Prepare two spreader bars as described in Paragraph 6-5a(3). d, Prepare the suspension sling (fig. 6-2) as described below: Failure to perform step (1) below could cause injury to personnel or dam- age to equipment. (1) Inspect each nylon web leg (2, fig. 6-2) of the suspension sling for any defects (burns, cut edges, or broken threads) that would make the sling unusable. (2) Select two adjacent legs of the suspen- sion sling assembly, and lay full length on the ground at the rear of the radar, Insert spreader bar (fig. 6-5) between the two legs 86.4 cm (34 in.) above the grab link bolts of each leg. Tie with nylon cord and tape. (8) Lay the spreader bar (6, fig. 6-16) with sling legs attached on top of the radar set group cabinet with the chain legs hanging over the side of the cabinet and adjacent to the rear leveling Jack. Due to the uneven distribution of weight in ‘the IHIPIR, an unequal number of chain links ‘are used to attach the chain legs to the front and rear lifting points, In the following steps, ‘the correct chain link is determined by count- ing from the end link of the chain leg. e139™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 MI 156066A 4-Right rear leveling jack bracket Grab link 6-Spreader bar Figure 6-16. IHIPIR—euspension aling assembly hookup. (4) Wrap a chain leg around each rear level- ing jack bracket as shown in figure 6-16, Insure that the grab link is forward of the jack, and fasten link 18 of each chain in its grab link. (5) Place the center loop of the lifting sling assembly on top of the antennas, and lay the un- attached sling legs down over the transmitter cabinet so that the chain legs fall adjacent to the front lifting eye (6) Attach each of the two aling legs to the front lifting eyes by passing one chain leg through each eye as shown in figure 6-16, and fasten link 62 of each chain in its grab link. 614 (7) Place the second spreader bar (2, fig. 6-16) on top of the transmitter equipment cabinet. (8) Insert the spreader bar between the two aling legs $6.4cm (84 in.) above the grab link bolts of each leg. Tie with nylon cord and tape. (9) Fasten loose chain ends with tape to prevent fouling (fig. 6-8). (10) To prevent fouling of the sling assembly before hookup, coil all four sling legs together on top of the radar antennas. Tape the legs as shown in figure 6-17 ao that they will break away daring lift. Insure that the sling legs are positioned and taped so that they will not hang up during liftIn particular, insure that the sling legs are taped clear of the antenna side receiver horn, Tape the spreader bars to the top of the cabinets on which they are resting. (10) Drive the ground rod of the grounding device assembly into the ground next to the trailer. (11) Place the grounding device (2, fig. 6-17) with the taped suspension slings on top of the antenna. ¢. Prior to helicopter lift, perform the following checks: (1) The trailer has been prepared for travel, and the handbrakes have been set. (2) The two rear and front center leveling jacks are retracted and in the vertical position. (8) The two front corner leveling jacks are (4) The front support jack is fully retracted and in the vertical position, TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 (5) The IHIPIR has been prepared for ‘travel. (6) The two spreader bars are resting on and taped to the forward and rear cabinets. (7) The four sling legs are laid and taped PS they will not hang up during helicopter f. The using organization may be required to perform the following helicopter hookup proce- jures. Failure to perform step (1) may result in injury to personnel. (1) The hookup crew must wear protective devices consisting of helmet liners, shell, and gog- MS 156067 Figure 6-17. THIPIR—auepencion eling assembly secured for helicopter pickup.TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 gles for protection against flying sand, dirt, dust, and debris. ‘The hovering helicopter develops high static voltages in excess of 20,000 volts on the helicopter lifting hook (2, fig. €-18). Failure to perform steps (2) through (8) below in the exact sequence given may result in injury to Personnel, (2) The hookup crew takes a position on the major item so that the opening of the helicopter lifting hook is to their left. This permits the hook to be grounded from its right side and the nylon ‘ssasembly to be placed on the hook from the left side. Failure to perform step (8) may result in injury to personnel. (8) Ground the helicopter lifting hook using the grounding device assembly (1, fig. 6-1). Main- tain the contact between the grounding device and the lifting hook throughout the hookup procedure. If the ground is disconnected before the hookup is completed, the hook must be grounded again before attempting to hook up the sling assembly, (4) Grasp the hook by hand and slip the nylon web ring of the suspension sling onto the hook. (6) Make certain that the helicopter lifting hook latch (8, fig. 6-18) has locked the ring into place. (6) Make certain that all hands are clear of the helicopter lifting hook and then remove the grounding device from the hook. cto MS 156064 180.5 em (1 ft) nylon web ring Helicopter lifting book ‘8--Helleopter lifting hook latch Figure ¢-18. Hookup of euspention ating assembly to ‘aticopter lifting hook. Failure to perform step (7) may result in injury to personnel. (7) The hookup crew must leave the major item to the right of the line-of-flight of the heli- copter (fig. 6-19) after completion of the hookup. ‘The hookup crew must stay clear of the major item until it is airborne (fig. 619). (8) Retrieve the grounding device assembly and return it to the storage bag.10 T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 DURING HOOKUP DURING APPROACH, RELEASE AND TAKEOFF wan UMEROENCY UAEROENCY ‘ALL GROUND PERSONNEL MOVE RIGHT => & reucorten MOVES err MI 705078 Figure 6-19. Crew positioning for helicopter pickup. 6-17voxesw Googleco TM 9—1430—533—12—1 CHAPTER 7 EMPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Section |. GENERAL 7-1. Scope 7-2. Explanation of Procedures ‘The detailed emplacement procedures for the IHIPIR are presented in this chapter. Refer to TM 9-1425—525-1 for information concerning site selection and evaluation. ‘The procedures for emplacing the IHIPIR de- scribe a typical method of setting up a completely emplaced radar from a mobile unit. These pro- cedures cover arrival by prime mover or heli- copter, They continue in sequence until the radar is ready for orientation and alinement. Proce- dures for orientation and alinement are described in chapter 8, Section Il. EMPLACEMENT OF THE IHIPIR 7-3. General This section describes the emplacement proce- dures for the IHIPIR. These procedures begin with the arrival of the IHIPIR at the battery site hy either prime mover (par. 7-5) or helicopter (par. 7-6) and describe the complete emplacement procedures of the M390 trailer which supports the IHIPIR, 7-4. Tools ‘The tools required are; a common screwdriver, ‘& cross-recessed screwdriver, a 7/16-inch wrench, Allen wrenches and a sledge hammer. 7-5. Emplacement Procedures—Prime Mover NOTE ‘When emplacing the IHIPIR, insure that the ee console is faced ‘the @. The detailed procedures for emplacing the ‘M300 trailer are as follows: NOTE ‘Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers in parentheses shown below refer to figure 6-7. (1) Set the trailer handbrakes with the hand- brake levers (5, fig. 6-12), one on each side of the A-frame. (2) Emplace each rear leveling jack (10) as described below: (e) Pull up and hold the horizontal lock . (0) Turn the jack horizontally until the ground pad (9) is at the rear of the trailer. Re- Tease the horizontal lock. (c) Pull up and hold the vertical lock (8). (d) Rotate the jack to the vertical position with the ground pad down, Release the vertical Jock. (6) Remove a crank (8) from the stow bracket (2) on the rear center of the trailer and place it on the crankshaft (11). (f) Adjust the jack until the ground pad is just clear of the ground. (8) Lower the front support jack as de- scribed below: (a) While supporting the jack (8, fig. 614) with the ground pad handle (4, fig. 6-14), pull upward on the spring-loaded frame handle (1, fig. 6-14). (b) Lower the jack to the down position. Insure that the ends of the spring-loaded frame handle engage the holes in the bracket and spindle assembly (7, fig. 6-14). (e) Disengage the jack crank (6, fig. 6-14), and turn it clockwise until the support wheels (5, fig. 6-14) reat firmly on the ground. mmTM 91430533121 (4) Release the trailer from the prime mover ‘as described below: ‘ (a) Disconnect the safety chains and se- cure them with the turnbuckles. (b) Remove the intervehicular cable as- sembly (4, fig. 6-16) from the receptacle on the prime mover and place it in the stowage clip (6, fig. 6-15). (c) Close the service coupling shutoff cock at the rear of the prime mover. Disconnect the trailer alrbrake hose from the service coupling and place it on the dummy coupling (2, fig. 6-16). Ceamnon) Make certain that the rear leveling jacks are in the vertical position and that the ground pads are lowered almost to the ground before releasing the trailer from the prime mover. (d) Remove the locking pin (1, fig. 6-18) from the pintle hook (8, fig. 6-18) on the prime mover. (¢) Release the spring-loaded T-bar latch (2, fig. 6-18) and open the pintle hook, (f) Turn the front support jack crank clockwise until the lunette (4, fig. 6-18) is free of the pintle hook, (g) Move the prime mover forward, close the pintle hook, and insert the locking pin. Cesren Be careful not to damage the trailer airbrake line when lowering the front center leveling jack. (5) Lower the front center leveling jack (9, fig, 6-12) as follow (a) Pull up and hold the horizontal lock (6, fig. 6-12). (b) Swing the jack out from under the trailer until the vertical lock (11, fig. 6-12) is ‘accessible. Release the horizontal lock. (c) Pull up and hold the vertical lock. (d) Being careful not to bump the airbrake line (6, fig. 6-16), tilt the jack sideways as re- quired to clear the trailer yoke. (@) Release the vertical lock. (f) Continue to tilt the jack sideways 10 while swinging it out from under the trailer, until ‘the jack is locked in both the horizontal and verti- cal positions. (g) Remove the jack crank (8, fig. 6-12) from the stow bracket (7, fig. 6-12) on the A-frame, and place it on the jack crankshaft (2, fig. 6-12). (A) Adjust the jack until the ground pad is just clear of the ground. (6) Lower each of the front corner leveling jacks (8, fig. 6-12) as described below: (a) Pull up and hold the vertical lock (4, fig. 6-12). (b) Rotate the jack to the vertical position with the ground pad down. Release the vertical Tock, (c) Obtain a crank and engage it on the front leveling jack crankshaft (2, fig. 6-12). (d) Adjust the jack until the ground pad is just clear of the ground. b. The detailed procedures for emplacing the IHIPIR are as follows: ‘Unless otherwise indicated, the key numbers shownbelow in parentheses refer to igure é-7. (1) Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (6, fig. 6-6) to the SAFE position, Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH remains in the SAFE posi- tion to prevent the antenna from rotat- ing should electrical power be applied while personnel are working on or near the antenna. (2) Remove the antenna protective covers A, fig. 6-6) and stow them in a protected area. (8) Remove the ground rod (12) and the ground cable (18) from the ground rod storage location (14). (4) Emplace the ground rod and attach the cable between the rod and the cable attach point (15). (5) Connect a no, 6 insulated copper wire or ‘equivalent between the IHIPIR ground rod and the ground red at the power source.Ls TM 9—1430—533—12—1 (6) If the HIPIR all-weather shelters transmitter head assembly, and secure the hood to figs. 6-8, 6-9) are to be emplaced, refer to the liquid cooler calvinet.. "M 10—8840-208-18 for the installation proce- . ures. Otherwise, proceed to step (7). (10) Set the main power switch (5) on the (7) Raise the radar set group cabinet cover _‘™#in power distributi on box to OFF. 1) and secure it by inserting the quick-disconnect :RNING } iins (1, fig. 7-1) into the cover support arms 2, fig. 7-1). w Prior to han dling a system power (8) Open the transmitter set group cabinet cable, insure that the generator main ‘over (16) and secure it by inserting the quick- lisconnect pins into the cover support arms. (9) Open the air intake and exhaust vent power circuit breaker is set to off. ravers as described below: Prior to han¢ dling an on-trailer cable of (a) Remove the air exhaust vent cover a major iten a, set the major item main (2, fig. 6-6) and stow the cover on the receiver power circu it breaker to off. sxhaust air vent. , (11) Conne zt the main power cable from the (®) Disconnect the elevation motor ex- generator to re ceptacle J1 (6) on the main power baust cover (23) from the elevation motor exhaust —_gistribution bo m. (25) and connect it to the dummy receptacle (24). (e) Open the cooling console exhaust vent . - cover located on the rear of the liquid cooler (18). a ae cee a (a) Open the radar set group air intake ' cover (9. fg 66) on the rear of the radar eet gwrp@ yp cutpite PEDESTAL SAFETY group cabinet. " (e) Open the pedestal intake cover (11, (b) ‘Release the elevation STOW lock (12, fig. 6-6). fig. 6-6) anv the azimuth STOW lock (22, fig. 6-7) (J) Remove the cover on the motor- — by tuming the handles counterclockwise. generator intake-exhaust vent (6, fig. 6-6), stow i the cover on the rear of the transmitter set group (c) Adjust the front and rear leveling tabinet, and secure the intake-exhaust hood to jacks until the trailer wheels are at least 25.4 mm the motor-generator assembly. (1-in,) off: the ground. (g) Remove the cover on the transmitter et group cabinet air intake vent (17), stow the (@) Uncover the two spirit levels (26) at cover on the rear of the transmitter set group the rear‘ corner of the elevation head. View the abinet, and secure the intake hood to the side of spirit levels and adjust the jacks as necessary, the transmitter set group cabinet. until. the bubble in each level is centered. (h) Remove the cover on the transmitter set group door exhaust vent (3, fig. 6-6), stow the () Cover the two spirit levels with their cover on the rear of the transmitter set group _protec‘tive covers. cabinet, and secure the exhaust hood to the trans- mitter set group door. @_ Remove the exhaust vent cover on the rear of the transmitter set group cabinet and stow the cover on the rear of the cabinet. The transmit- (f) Remove and stow the cranks in their lj respective stow brackets. ter exhaust vent is interlocked and must be opened | @)_ Adjust the front support jack until the t to energize. sup port wheels are resting on the ground. (i) Remove the covers on the radar set | ; group exhaust vents (8, fig. 6-6 and 20, fig. 6-7), ; (h) Secure the crank in the stowage clip J and stow the exhaust vent hoods. (2, fig. 6-14). (k) Remove the cover on the liquid cooler intake vent (19), stow the cover on the rear of the (18) Connect the data cables to the HIPIR. r3™ 9—1430—533—12—1 = i \ | MS 193920 1-Quilek-disconnect pins 2-Cov br support arms Figure 7-1. Rada set group cabinet-emplacement,7 (14) Position illuminator identification switch on the cable entry panel to the appropriate sition (ILL A or ILL B). (15) Remove the headset from the atorage box » fig. 6-6) on the rear of the radar set group binet and connect it to the communication sta- m jack J1 (8, fig. 2-4). (16) Release the elevation STOW lock (12, 5) and the azimuth STOW lock (22) on the wation head by turning the handles counter- rckewise. ¢. Prior to energizing the HIPIR, make the lowing checks. (1) The leveling jacks are properly em- wed. (2) The PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH is the SAFE position, (8) The protective covers are removed and (4) The ground rod and ground cable are roperly emplaced. T™ 9--1430—533—12—1 (5) The main power switch is in the OFF Position. (6) The cabinet covers are: secured in the open position. (7) The headlset is: properly connected. (8) All the vent covers are open. (9) The azimuth ST'OW and elevation STOW locks have been released. (10) The HIPIR is hevel. 7-6. Emplacement Procec {ures—Helicopter @. Remove and stow the stuspension sling assem- bly in the helicopter lifting: kit storage bag and stow the bag. b. Emplace the M390 trailer, which supports the HIPIR, as described in subparagraphs ‘7-ba(1) and (6). ¢. Emplace the HIPIR as described in para- graph 7-5d, d. Perform the checks outliited in paragraph ‘7-5 before energizing the HIP IR. 7-5a7 1 9—1430—533—12—1 CHAPTER 8 ORIENTING AND ALINING Section I. 81. Purpose a. Accurate target firing data and successful target engagement depends on the orientation and alinement of the major items in the HAWK battery. Alinement of the two HIPIR’s in a battery is accomplished after the pulse acquisition radar (PAR) has been oriented to a known azimuth reference. If the proper procedures are not carefully followed, misleading target information will be Processed by the battery, and effective target engagement will be degraded. 6. Normally, the battery is oriented so that accurate presentations of north, east, south, and west coordinates are shown on its cathode-ray tubes (CRT’s). However, the orientation to true north is only necessary for the tactical control officer or his assistant to accurately correlate data from an over- lay map of the defended area, or to utilize tactical information from an Army air defense command post (ADCP). When it is not necessary to correlate data from an overlay map or to utilize information from an AADCP, any available landmark may be used as a reference point for orienting the battery. ¢. While there are several methods of orienting and alining the battery, only the four methods of orienting and alining the HIPIR are discussed in this section. Paragraph 8-2 describes these four methods. 82. Methods of Orienting and Alining the HIPIR There are four methods of orienting and alining a HIPIR in a battery, a primary and three alter- tates. Subparagraphs a through d below give a sneral description of the four method: @ Primary Method. When a HIPIR is emplaced sothat it has line-of-sight with the PAR, the primary method of orienting and alining is used. The HAWK BATTERY (BCC AN/TSW-8) PAR is oriented and alined to a north azimuth reference (or to any other known reference point) to provide accurate target reference displays. The HIPIR is then alined with the PAR. ». First Alternate Method. When a HIPIR is emplaced so that it does not have line-of-sight with the PAR, the first alternate method of orienting and alining is used. The HIPIR not having line-of-sight with the PAR must be oriented to the same refer- ence point used in orienting the PAR. NOTE ‘The use of more than one reference point when lining the ew radars with the PAR can seriously degrade the effectiveness of the battery. Tolerances that accumulate in surveying more than one reference point, and in calculating azimuths from more than one reference point with an M2 aiming troduce errors of varying magnitudes de- pending upon which major items are alined to the ‘ame or to dfferent reference points. Using only one common reference point insures that the major items of battery will be alined with each other to a talerance which is dependent upon the accuracy of the alinement telescopes and the mil ring indicators. ‘The orientation of the entire battery to one known reference point (for example, north) is dependent ‘upon the accuracy of the M2 aiming circle, and the known reference point being at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the radar being oriented. ¢. Second Alternate Method. When a battery is emplaced without a PAR, the ew acquisition radar (CWAR) is oriented and alined to a north azimuth reference (or to any known reference) in place of the PAR to provide accurate target reference displays. Each HIPIR is then alined with the CWAR. d. Third Alternate Method. When a battery is emplaced without both a PAR and CWAR, the IFF antenna is oriented and alined to a north azimuth reference or to any known reference. Each HIPIR is then alined with the IFF antenna,™ 9—1430—533—12—1 8.3. Sequence of Improved HAWK Battery Alinement Operations The orientation and alinement of the IHIPIR’s in battery is controlled from the improved battery control central (IBCC). The IBCC personnel in- itiate, monitor, and coordinate the alinement op- erations of all major items in the battery. Figure 8-1 illustrates the sequence in which the aline- ment operations of a typical battery are per- formed. The unshaded areas indicate the opera- tions performed at the IHIPIR as it is alined in the battery and the shaded areas indicate the on- going alinement operations being performed at the other major items of the battery. 8-4, M2 Aiming Circle NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 8-2. The M2 aiming circle (31) is a small, light- weight instrument that is used in the battery for calculating azimuth angles when any of the alter- nate alinement procedures described in paragraph 82 are used. Basically, it consists of a 4-power, fixed-focus telescope mounted on a body that per- mits unlimited horizontal and limited vertical rotation of the telescope. Azimuth angle measure- ments are recorded on a graduated-scale azimuth mil ring (11) and micrometer (18). The aiming circle has two horizontal rotating motions. The upper (recording) motion changes the readings of the azimuth scale of the instrument; the lower (nonrecording) motion does not. The aiming circle is equipped with leveling screws (12), level vials (6), and a locking lever for the magnetic compass needle (21). The instrument is mounted on a base- plate (18) that serves as the base of the carrying cage and is also used in mounting the instrument on a tripod (80), The accessory equipment for the aiming circle consists of the tripod, the carrying case cover (24), and the accessory kit (27). The accessory kit contains the instrument light (23), plumb bob (25), lampholder and remover (29), backplate (26), and canvas cover (28). Further information concerning the emplacement opera- tion and maintenance of the M2 aiming circle is provided in FM 6-2, 8-5, Orientation and Alinement During Blackout Conditions During blackout conditions, any of the four methods discussed in paragraph 8-2 above may be 8-2 a employed with the assistance of an M42 or MS3-E1 instrument light. NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 8-8. a. The M42 instrument light (4) is used in con- junction with the M90F alinement telescope on the THIPIR and is stored in the antenna transmitter housing. The M42 contains a battery power lead (5), a dovetail fitting (6), and a lead with a pen light (2) on the end, This light fits into a bracket (1) which is mounted on the alinement telescope (7), The lamps are illuminated by means of a control switch (8). During alinement at night, the telescopes on the IHIPIR and the other major items are sighted on the pen lights, NOTE ‘The key numbers shown below in parentheses refer to figure 8-4. ©. The M53-E1 instrument light (4) is usually used with the M90F telescope on the ICC (IFF antenna) and the M109 alinement telescope and fire cutout de on the ILCHR. However, it can also be used in place of the M42 instrument light on the IHIPIR, The M58-E1 is similar to the M2 except that the control switch (3) is a different type and it is mounted forward on the side of the instrument light. The M63-E1 is stored in the cabinet set drawer in the ICC and in the forward compartment of the ILCHR. 8-6. Preliminary Procedures Before orientation and alinement of the IHIPIR can be attempted, steps a through ¢ below must be accomplished. a, Emplace the IHIPIR as described in chap- ter 7. b. Energize the power generators in accordance with the instructions posted on the inside of the generator panel, and set the output of the genera- tors for 425 vac. ¢. Establish interunit communications with the IBCC. 8-7. Synchro Control System Detailed functional schematics of the synchro control system for the improved HAWK battery are contained in TM 9—1425—-525—12-2, together with synchro alinement procedures for each major item,‘TM 9—1430—533—121 Tran escort MS 164714 Figure 8-1. Sequence of improved HAWK battery alinement operations—typical (sheet 1 of 3).Ms 164715 Figure 8 1. Jequence of improvi wproved HAWK battery alinement ient operatior yns—typical 9 (sheet 2 of 2 of 8).‘™ 9—1430—533—12-1 MS 164716 Figure 8-1. Sequence of improved HAWK battery alinement operations—typical (sheet 3 of 3).TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 10 MS 164663 Figure 8. Ma aiming cirole with accessory equipment,1—Elevation knob 2—Elevation micrometer 3—Reflector 4-Telescope eyepiece 5-Slot for instrument light 6Telescope level vial ‘7Cireular level 8-Tubular level 9-Orienting knob cover 10—Azimuth nonrecording orienting knob 1—Azimuth mil ring 32-Leveling screw 18-Baseplate M-Notation pad 16-Elevation scale 16-Neutral filter (stored position) TM 9—1430—533—12— 17—-Magnifier 18-Azimuth micrometer 19—Azimuth recording knob 20-Spring plate 21—Locking lever for compass needle 22-Objective 23—Instrument light 24—Cover for aiming circle 25—Plumb bob 26-Backplate 27—Acceasory kit 28—Canvas cover 29—Lamp holder and remover ‘30—Tripod 31—M2 aiming circle Figure 8-2—Continued. 5 MI 70615A 1-Bracket 2-Pen light 3-Control switch 4-Ma42 instrument light 5—Battery power lead 6Dovetail fitting ‘7-Alinement telescope Figure 8-8. Mounting the M42 instrument light. 86.1Digita7 5 1—Alinement telescope 2-Pen light 3-Control switch ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 MI 70616 4-M53-E1 instrument light 5—Dovetail fitting Figure 8-4. Mounting the M53-E1 inatrument light. — LCHR Azimuth Alinement Verification a The azimuth alinement verification procedure is performed, under the direction of the LCHR personnel, after the HIPIR and LCHR have been alined to insure that the LCHR arms are parallel to the HIPIR line-of-sight. This parallel condition is necessary for the missile to lock on target. Para- graphs b through d below contain a brief deseription of these procedures. 4b If line-of-sight exists between the HIPIR and the LCHR and there are no missiles on the LCHR, azimuth alinement is verified by sighting the LCHR front and rear reference points on the HIPIR inement telescope vertical crosshair. This line-of- sight verification is made on the LCHR arm closest to the LCHR alinement telescope. If both reference points cannot be alined on the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR telescope, a sighting target and support are used as described in paragraph d below. ¢. The sighting target and support are used to verify the LCHR and HIPIR alinement under the following conditions. (1) Alinement cannot be verified using the pro- cedure described in paragraph b above. (2) Line-of-sight exists between the HIPIR and LCHR and there are missiles on the LCHR. (3) Line-of-sight between the HIPIR and the UCHR does not exist (refer to paragraph e below). 4. The sighting target support is placed on the LCHR front reference point and the sighting target ismoved along the support until it is alined with the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope. The distance between the front reference point and the HIPIR alinement telescope line-of-sight is mea- sured and recorded. The same measurement is taken of the distance at the rear reference point. The difference between these two measurements should be 3.8 em (1.5 inches) or less. If the difference in measurement exceeds 3.8 em (1.5 inches), it indicates improper alinement or boresighting, incorrect adjustment of the servo balance, or broken or bent connector pins in the compensation group cabinet of the LCHR. €. If the line-of-sight between the HIPIR and LCHR does not exist, aline the sighting target with the vertical crosshair of the M2 aiming circle telescope exactly as done with the HIPIR alinement telescope in paragraph d above. 8-9. System Orientation and Alinement Procedures Perform the procedures in table 8-1 to orient and aline the HIPIR when the PAR is available, the procedures in table 8-2 when the PAR is not avail- able, or the procedures in table 8-3 when both the PAR and CWAR are not available. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the HIPIR azimuth mil ring, refer to section V, 8-7T™ 9—1430—533—12. 10 Table 8-1. Syatem Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the IPAR Operation ermal indtetion Corzetive procedore NOTE The following procedures are cordinated from the IBCC. 1 Preparation a Observe that the BCC R BUS lamp (18, fig. 2-2) on the main fuse panel is illuminated. Do not perform the alinement if the lamp is extinguished. b Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) is set to SAFE. ¢. Insure that the LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) is set to LOCAL. a. Insure that the IHIPIR is in a false radiate condition, with the master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker (21, fig. 2-6) and the power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-6) set to OFF. e. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) to OFF. f. Remove the M90F alinement telescope from the storage box (5, fig. 1-6) and install it on the IHIPIR antenna (fig. 8-5). % Insure that the IHIPIR is level (refer to par. 7-50 (12)). 2 Alinement with the IPAR Antenna. a If line of sight exists between the IHIPIR and IPAR, proceed directly to step d below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming cirele (fig. 8-2). Also refer to note below. NOTE When the alternate method is being used to aline the IHIPIR with the IPAR, the reference point used must be located at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the IPAR and the IHIPIR. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the IPAR and the THTPIR, NOTE In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. b When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel : (1) .| Frontsight the IHIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR alinement tee- scope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Set the elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) required. (2) | Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the arimuth mil ring to the azimuth determined at the M2 aiming circle. (8) | Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. (4) | Rotate the IHIPIR antenna clockwise to the azimuth of the IPAR antenna. e. Proceed to step 9. a. When directed by the IPAR personnel, frontsight the IHIPIR antenna on the backsightel IPAR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR telescope is centered on the IPAR telescope. Set the elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) as required.ce TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the IPAR—Continued ee ornate Neral indletion Corrective procedure & Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the same azimuth as the IPAR (record azimuth). ft ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. & When directed by the IBCC personnel, perform the following antenna synchro nulling procedure: qa Set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE. (2) Insure that the IHIPIR alinement telescope is still centered on the IPAR alinement tele- scope or positioned at the same azimuth as the IPAR. 3) At the IHIPIR pedestal, push the synchro adjust knob (2, fig. 8-7) down and slowly rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise until a null is obtained on nulling meter M1 (4, fig. 8-7). ) Press the fine null switch $1 (8, fig. 8-7), and simultaneously rotate the synchro adjust knob clockwise or counterclockwise until a fine null is obtained. Release the fine null switch. 6) Release the synchro adjust knob, and assure that the null indication remains on nulling meter M1. A Inform IBCC personnel that antenna synchro nulling has been completed. i If a false null is reported from the IBCC personnel, repeat steps g(2) through (5) and A. NOTE ‘efor ste J(1) through (4) tthe TBC contaae th brpee witch, Othorwiaa proceed to i For IBCC’s with bypass switch. @ When directed by the IBCC personnel to momentarily energize the antenna: (@ | Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to ON. (6) | Insure that all personnel are clear of the IHIPIR antenna. (c) | Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to OPERATE. @) Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to OFF. (e) | _ Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE. (A | Observe the azimuth mil ring indication. The IHIPIR azimuth mil ring indicates azimuth recorded in step ¢ above +1 mil (give this indication to IBCC personnel. Repeat steps g(2) through (5) above. @) When again directed by IBCC personnel to momentarily energize the antenna: (@) | Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to ON. (6) | Insure that all personnel are clear of the IHIPIR antenna. (©) | Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to OPERATE. (@) | Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to OFF. (© | _ Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE. 89™™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 on 22K. (3) (4) a @ ) () @) 8-10 Teble 8-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the IPAR—Continued coed ermal tneaton Corrective procedure Observe the azimuth mil ring indication. ‘The IHIPIR azimuth mil ring indicates the azimuth recorded in step ¢ abor 48 mils (give this indication to IBCC personnel). IBC personnel will perform IBC synchro alinement. When directed by IBCC personnel, set the LOCAL/REMOTE switch to LOCAL. Proceed to step 8. For IBCC’s without bypass switch. When directed by the IBCC personnel to energize the antenna: Release the elevation brake. Insure that all personnel are clear of the IHIPIR antenna. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to ON. Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to OPERATE. When directed by the IBCC personnel, set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE, and the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to LOCAL. Alinement with the IROR Antenna, NOTE IHIPIR A must be alined to the IROR before IHIPIR B during IROR alinement. If THIPIR Ais not available, aline IHIPIR B using the procedure for IHIPIR A. Make certain that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH is set to SAFE and that the LOCAL REMOTE switch is set to LOCAL. Manually position the IHIPIR antenna to 0 mils elevation and set the elevation brake. If line of sight exists between the IHIPIR’s and IROR, proceed to step m below. If line of tight does not exist, proceed to step d. Also refer to the note below. NOTE If line of sight does not exist between the IHIPIR's and the IROR, « new reference point must be established. This reference point must be located at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the IROR and the IHIPIR being alined, and may be different for each IHIPIR. The M2 aiming circle must bbe located at this refernce point and be visible to the IROR and the IHIPIR.sup 3d. () (2) qa) (2) T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the IPAR—Continued Operation Normal indication Corrective procedure Emplace the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) and level using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, fig. 8-2). When the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontsight the IHIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle. Set the elevation brake as required. Obtain the azimuth reading from the IHIPIR azimuth mil ring and if it is less than 3200 mils, add 3200 mils. If the IHIPIR azimuth is more than 3200 mils, subtract 3200 mils. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) and rotate the M2 aiming cirele until the azimuth mil ring upper scale (11, fig. 8-2) indicates the approximate azimuth as determined in step f above. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale and the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicate the azimuth determined in step f above. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth nonrecording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and front- sight the M2 aiming circle on the IHIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth non- recording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. Direct the IROR personnel to backsight the IROR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle, and simultaneously sight the M2 aiming circle on the IROR antenna using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. If the IROR is being alined with IHIPIR A, direct the IROR personnel to: Loosen the screws that secure the IROR azimuth mil ring and set the IROR azimuth mil ring to indicate the upper scale azimuth of the M2 aiming circle. Tighten the screws that secure the IROR azimuth mil ring. Proceed to step 0. Direct the IROR personnel to backsight the IROR telescope on the IHIPIR antenna, and then simultaneously frontsight the IHIPIR telescope on the IROR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the IROR alinement telescope. NOTE If the IROR alinement telescope is not in the THIPIR slinement telescope field of view, re- lease the elevation brake and rotate the IHIPIR antenna to bring the IROR alinement tele- scope into view. Then set the elevation brake. If the IROR is being alined with IHIPIR A, direct the IROR personnel to: Loosen the screws that secure the IROR azimuth mil ring and set the IROR azimuth mil ring to indicate the same azimuth as the IHIPIR antenna azimuth mil ring. ‘Tighten the screws that secure the IROR azimuth mil ring. ‘Make certain that the IHIPIR antenna remains sighted on the M2 aiming circle or on the TROR antenna while the IROR personnel continue with the alinement procedures, Inform the IBCC personnel when the alinement procedures have been completed.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 i Table 8-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the PAR—Continued Operation Corrective procedare 4 Antenna Alinement Verification, a When directed by the BCC personnel, condition the radar for remote operation, set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE, and the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breater te OFF. b Position the radar to 800 (or 4000) mils azimuth. 5. Alinement with the LCHR. a Position the HIPIR antenna to 0 mils elevation and engage the elevation STOW lok handwheel (10, fig. 2-1 4). Do not set the minimum elevation control to less than 190 mils in step b below. 8-10.27 ™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 Table 8-1, System Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the PAR—Continued oe Nera inition 5b. Set the minimum elevation control (2, fig. 8-8) of the minimum elevation stowed synchro (1, fig. 8-8) to 40 mils above the highest fire interrupter setting of any LCHR of that firing section. e If a line-of-sight exists between the HIPIR and LCHR, proceed directly to step q below. If a line-of-sight does not exist, proceed to step d for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to the note below. NOTE ‘When performing the alternate alinement procedures, the reference point should be located at least 305 1m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and LCHR. The M2 aiming cirele must be located at this point and must be visible to both the HIPIR and the LCHR. a If line-of-sight does not exist, emplace the M2 aiming circle and level it using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, fig. 8-2). @ When the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. fi Direct the LCHR personnel to sight the LCHR alinement telescope until the vertical crosshair of the telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. o Prevent the HIPIR antenna from moving in azimuth. h Record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. é Adjust the M2 aiming circle azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) until the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicates 0 mils. i Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper scale indicates approximately 3200 mils. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. k Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale indicates 3200 mils. L Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the ‘M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. nm Sight the M2 aiming circle on the LCHR alinement telescope using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. Direct the LCHR personnel to simultaneously sight the LCHR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle telescope and then record the azimuth angle determined at the M2 aiming circle, and the angle indicated at the LCHR alinement telescope. * Calculate and adjust for proper azimuth angle by subtracting the M2 aiming circle azimuth from the LCHR alinement telescope azimuth. However, if the LCHR alinement telescope azimuth is less than the M2 aiming circle azimuth, add 6400 mils and then subtract the M2 aiming circle azimuth. 0 Direct the LCHR personnel to rotate the LCHR alinement telescope to the azimuth value calculated above, and then lock it in position. B Proceed to step r.T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 rar Table 8-1. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the PAR—Continued 5a. q@ (2) (3) (4) (qa) (2) (3) (4) Uf line-of-sight exists, proceed as follows: Frontsight the HIPIR until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope (1, fig. 85 is centered on the LCHR alinement telescope. Direct the LCHR personnel to sight the LCHR alinement telescope on the HIPIR until th vertical crosshair is centered on the HIPIR alinement telescope. Lock the LCHR alinement telescope in position by tightening the azimuth lock. Record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. Direct the LCHR personnel to perform the following alinement procedures and await instructions from them concerning related procedures to be performed at the HIPIR. LCHR adjustments. LCHR servo check. Alinement verification. Launcher orientation. Repeat steps c through r for the remaining LCHR's. Inform the BCC/PCP personnel that the LCHR alinement procedures have been completed. Set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to LOCAL. Sep Table 8-2. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure Without the PAR ‘Operation ermal Indiston Corrective procedure NOTE ‘The following procedures are coordinated from the BCC. Preparation. Observe that the BCC R BUS lamp (18. fig. 2-2) on the main fuse panel is illuminated. Do not perform the alinement if the lamp is extinguished. Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) is set to SAFE. Insure that the LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) is set to LOCAL. Insure that the HIPIR is in a false radiate condition, with the master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker (21, fig. 2-6) and the power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker (14, fig. 26) set to OFF. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) to OFF. Remove the M90F alinement telescope from the storage box (5, fig. 1-5) and install itor the HIPIR antenna (fig. 8-5). Insure that the HIPIR is level (refer to par. 7-5 b(12)).ce TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-2. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure Without the IPAR—Continued a) (2) (3) (4) qa) (2) (8) (4) 6) Alinement with the ICWAR Antenna, If line of sight existe between the IHIPIR and ICWAR, proceed directly to atep d below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the ‘M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the IHIPIR with the ICWAR, the refer- ence point used must be located at least 805 m (1000 ft) from the ICWAR and the IHIPIR. ‘The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the TCWAR and the IHIPIR. NOTE In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel : Frontsight the IHIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR alinement tele- scope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Set the elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) as required. Loosen the two serews that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth determined at the M2 aiming circle. ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Rotate the IHIPIR antenna clockwise to the azimuth of the ICWAR antenna, Proceed to step 9. When directed by the ICWAR personnel, frontsight the IHIPIR antenna on the back- sighted ICWAR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR telescope is centered on the ICWAR telescope. Set the elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) as required. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the same azimuth as the ICWAR. Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. When directed by the IBCC personnel, perform the following antenna synchro nulling procedure: Set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE. Insure that the IHIPIR alinenient telescope is still centered on the ICWAR alinement tele- scope, or positioned at the same azimuth as the ICWAR antenna. At the THIPIR pedestal, push the synchro adjust knob (2, fig. 8-7) down and slowly rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise until! a null is obtained on nulling meter M1 (4, fig. 8-7). Press the fine null switch S1 (3, fig. 8-7), and simultaneously rotate the synchro adjust nob clockwise or counterclockwise until a fine null is obtained. Release the fine null switeh. Release the synchro adjust knob, and assure that the null indication remains on nulling meter M1. Inform ICC personnel that antenna synchro nulling has been completed.TM 91430533121 cto Table 6 System Orientation and Alinement Procedure Without the IPAR—Continued ee 2. qa (2) (8) (4) Operation Normal ndietion Corrective procedure Ifa false null is reported from the IBCC personnel, repeat steps g(2) through 9 (6) and A. When directed by the IBCC personnel to energize the antenna: Release the elevation brake. Insure that all personnel are clear of the IHIPIR antenna. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to ON. Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to OPERATE. When directed by the IBCC personnel, set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE, and the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to LOCAL. Alinement with the IROR Antenna. Perform the procedures in table 8-1, step 3. 4 Antenna Alinement Verification. a, ‘When directed by the IBCC personnel, condition the radar for remote operation, set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE, and set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to OFF. Position the antenna to 800 (or 4000) mils azimuth. 5. Alinement with the ILCHR. Perform the procedures in table 8-1, step 5. a4 Table 88. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure Without the IPAR and ICWAR ‘Operation Normal ndieston Corrective procadure NOTE ‘The following procedures are coordinated from the IBC. Preparation. Observe that the BCC R BUS lamp (18, fig. 2-2) on the main fuse panel is illuminated. Do not perform the alinement if the lamp is extinguished. Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) is set to SAFE. ‘Unsure that the LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) is set to LOCAL. Insure that the IHIPIR is in a false radiate condition, with the master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker (21, fig. 2-6) and the power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-6) set to OFF. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (18, fig. 2-2) to OFF.cs TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table £8. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure Without the IPAR and ICWAR—Continued Mf. Remove the M90F alinement telescope from the storage box (5, fig. 1-5) and install it on the IHIPIR antenna (fig. 8-5). o Insure that the IHIPIR is level (refer to par. 7-5 b(12)). 2 Alinement with the IFF Antenna. a. If line of sight exists between the IHIPIR and IFF, proceed directly to step d below. It line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to note below. NOTE When the alternate method is being used to aline the IHIPIR with the IFF, the reference ‘point used must be located at least 805 m (1000 ft) from the IFF and the IHIPIR, The M2 ‘aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the IFF and the THIPIR, NOTE In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. wo When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: (1) | Frontsight the IHIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR alinement tele- ‘scope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Set the elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) as required. (2) | Loosen the two serews that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth determined at the M2 aiming circle. (8) | Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. (4) | Rotate the IHIPIR antenna clockwise to the azimuth of the IFF antenna, e Proceed to step g. a. ‘When directed by the IFF personnel, frontsight the IHIPIR antenna on the back sighted IFF antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR telescope is centered on the IFF telescope. Set the elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) as required. « ‘Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the same azimuth as the IFF. Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. When directed by the IBCC personnel, perform the following antenna synchro nulling procedure: (1) | Set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE. (2) | Insure that the IHIPIR alinement telescope is still centered on the IFF alinement tele- ‘scope, or positioned at the same azimuth as the IFF antenna, (8) | Atthe IHIPIR pedestal, push the synchro adjust knob (2, fig. 8-7) down and slowly rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise until a null is obtained on nulling meter M1 (4, fig. 8-7).TH 9—1430—$33—12—1 cs Table 8-8. System Orientation and Alinement Procedure Without the IPAR and ICWAR—Continued Press the fine null switch Si (3, fig. 8-7), and simultaneously rotate the synchro adjust nob clockwise or counterclockwise until a fine null is obtained. Release the fine null switch, Release the synchro adjust knob, and assure that the null indication remains on nulling meter M1. (5) h Inform IBCC personnel that antenna synchro nulling has been completed. t Ifa false null is reported from the IBCC personnel, repeat steps g (2) through g(5) and k. i When directed by the IBCC personnel to energize the antenna: (1) | Release the elevation brake. (2) | Insure that all personnel are clear of the IHIPIR antenna. (8) | Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to ON. (4) | Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to OPERATE. ke When directed by the IBC personnel, set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE, and the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to LOCAL. Antenna Alinement Verifieation. When directed by the IBCC personnel, condition the radar for remote operation, set the a, PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE, and set the MOTOR GENERATOR cireait breaker to OFF, b Position the antenna to 800 (or 4000) mils azimuth. 4 Alinement with the IROR Antenna. Perform the procedures in table 8-1, step 8. Alinement with ILCHR. Perform the procedures in table 8-1, step 5.7 T™ 9—1430—533—12-1 a MI 70632A 1-Alinement telescope 2-Finger grip lock knob 38Dovetail mounting bracket Figure 8-5. HIPIR alinement telescope—mounted. MI 70636A 1-Synehro access cover 2-Synchro adjust knob 8—Fine null switch $1 4-Nolling meter M1 Figure 8-7, HIPIR alinement controls—pedestal. 4 MI 70638A 1-Spirit levels 2—Thumbscrew | 3—Verier scale 4-Mil ring Figure 8-6. HIPIR spirit levele and mil ring.T™ 9—1430—533—12—-1 p 9 MI 70655A 1—Minimum elevation stowed synchro Minimum elevation control Figure 8-8. HIPIR minimum elevation stowed synchro. Section Il. AFU (PCP AN/MSW-11) [ 810. Purpose a, Accurate target firing data and successful target engagement depend on the orientation and alinement of the major items in the assault firing unit (AFU). Alinement of the HIPIR in the AFU is accomplished after the CWAR has been oriented to a known azimuth reference. If the proper procedures are not carefully followed, misleading target information will be processed by the AFU, and effective target engagement will be degraded. ®. Normally, the AFU is oriented so that accurate presentations of north, east, south, and west coordi- nates are shown on its CRT’s. However, the orienta- tion to true north is only necessary for the tactical officer (T.O.) or his assistant to accurately correlate data from an overlay map of the defended area, or to utilize tactical information from an Army ait defense command post (AADCP). When it is not necessary to correlate data from an overlay map or to utilize information from an AADCP, any available landmark may be used as a reference point for orienting the AFU. ¢. While there are several methods of orienting and alining the AFU, only the three methods of orienting and alining the HIPIR are discussed in this section. Paragraph 8-11 describes thee three methods.7 ‘11, Methods of Orienting and Alining the HIPIR ‘There are three preferred methods of orienting d alining a HIPIR in an AFU, a primary and two ternates. Subparagraphs a through c below give a neral description of the three methods. ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 a. Primary Method. When the HIPIR is em- placed so that it has line-of-sight with the CWAR, the primary method of orienting and alining is used. The CWAR is oriented and alined to a north azimuth reference (or to any other known reference point) to provide accurate target reference displays. The HIPIR is then alined with the CWAR.gle C Digit” b. First Alternate Method. When the HIPIR is nplaced so that it does not have line-of-sight with xe CWAR, the first alternate method of orienting ad alining is used. The HIPIR must be oriented to ae same reference point used in orienting the WAR. NOTE ‘The une of more than one reference point when alining the HIPIR with the CWAR can seriously degrade the effectiveness of the AFU. Tolerances that accumulate in surveying more than one reference point, calealating azimuths from more than one reference point with an M2 aiming cirele, introduce errors of varying magnitude de- pending upon which major items are alined to the that the major items of the AFU will be alined with each other to a tolerance which is dependent upon the accuracy of the alinement telescopes and the mil ring indicators. ‘The orientation of the entire AFU to one known reference point (for example, north) is dependent upon the accuracy of the M2 aiming circle, and the known reference point being at least 305m (1000 ft) from the radar being oriented. ¢ Second Alternate Method, When the AFU is mplaced, and a CWAR is not available, the IFF antenna is oriented and alined to a north azimuth reference or to any known reference. The HIPIR is then alined with the IFF antenna. #12, Sequence of AFU Alinement Operations —Typical The alinement of the AFU is controlled from the platoon command post (PCP). The PCP personnel initiate, monitor, and coordinate the alinement sperations of all of the major items in the AFU Figure 8-9 illustrates the sequence in which tl alinement operations of a typical AFU are pei formed. The unshaded areas indicate the alinement perations performed at the HIPIR as it is alined in an AFU and the shaded areas indicate the on-going ainement operations being performed at the other major items. £13. M2 Aiming Circle ‘The M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) is a small, light, weight instrument that is used in the AFU for culating azimuth angles when either of the two alternate methods of orienting and alining described in paragraph 8-11 are used. Refer to paragraph 8-4 fora complete description of the M2 aiming cirele. ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 8-14, Orientation and Alinement During Black- jj out Conditions During blackout conditions, any of the three methods discussed in paragraph 8-11 may be em- ployed with the assistance of an M42 (fig. 8-3) or ‘M53-El (fig. 8-4) instrument light as described in paragraph 8-5. 8-15. Preliminary Procedures I Before orientation and alinement of the HIPIR can be attempted, steps a through c below must be accomplished. a, Emplace the HIPIR as described in chapter 7. ®. Energize the power generators in accordance with the instructions posted on the inside of each generator panel, and set the output of the generators for 425 vac. c. Establish interunit communications with the PCP. 8-16. Synchro Control System I Detailed functional schematics of the synchro control system for the AFU are contained in TM 9—1425—525—12—5. Synchro alinement procedures for each major item are also contained therein. 8-17. HIPIR-LCHR Azimuth Alinement Verifica- tion ‘The azimuth alinement verification procedure is performed, under the direction of LCHR personnel, after the HIPIR and LCHR have been alined to insure that the LCHR arms are parallel to the HIPIR line-of-sight. This parallel condition is neces- sary for the missile to lock on target. Refer to paragraph 8-8 for a brief description of this proce- dure. 8-18. AFU Orientation and Alinement Proce- 1 dures Perform the procedures in table 8-4 to orient and aline the HIPIR when the CWAR is available or the procedures in table 8-5 when the CWAR is not available. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the HIPIR azimuth mil ring, refer to section V. 8-191430—533—12—1 RONTSIGHT ON IoWAR Tasco Figure 8-9. Sequence of AFU alinement operations—typical (sheet 1 of 2)MS 164718 Figure 8-9. Sequence of IAFU alinement operations—typical (sheet 2 of 2).T™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 cio Tal 4-4. IAFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the ICWAR up ‘Operation arma tndtesiion Corrective procedure ne NOTE ‘The following procedures are coordinated from the IPCP. Preparation. Observe that the BCC R BUS lamp (18, fig. 2-2) on the main fuse panel is illuminated. Do not perform the alignment if the lamp is extinguished. Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) is set to SAFE. Insure that the LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) is set to LOCAL. Insure that the IHIPIR is in a false radiate condition, with the master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker (21, fig. 2-6) and the power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-6) set to OFF. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (18, fig. 2-2) to OFF. Remove the M90F alinement telescope from the storage box (6, fig. 1-5) and install it on the IHIPIR antenna (fig. 8-5). Insure that the IHIPIR is level (refer to par. 7-6 b(12)). qa (2) (8) (4) Alinement with the ICWAR Antenna. If line of sight exists between the IHIPIR and ICWAR, proceed directly to step d below. I line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using th ‘M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the IHIPIR with the ICWAR, the refer- ‘ence point used must be located at least 805m (1000 ft) from the ICWAR and the IHIPIR, ‘The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the TCWAR and the IHIPIR. NOTE In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. ‘When directed by the M2 aiming circle personn Frontsight the IHIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR alinement teh scope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Set the elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) ¢ required. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimut mil ring to the azimuth determined at the M2 aiming circle. Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Rotate the IHIPIR antenna clockwise to the azimuth of the ICWAR antenna, Proceed tostep 9. When directed by the ICWAR personnel, frontsight the IHIPIR antenna on the bac sighted ICWAR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR telescope is centered: the ICWAR telescope. Set the elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) as required.cs TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-4. IAFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure With the ICWAR—Continued ‘Operation ue Nermelindision Corrective procedure 2e. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth ‘mil ring to the same azimuth as the ICWAR. ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. When directed by the IPCP personnel, perform the following antenna synchro nulling procedure: (1) | Set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE. (2) | Insure that the IHIPIR alinement telescope is still centered on the ICWAR alinement tele- ‘scope or positioned at the same azimuth as the ICWAR antenna. (8) | At the IHIPIR pedestal, push the synchro adjust knob (2, fig. 8-7) down and slowly rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise until a null is obtained on nulling meter M1 (4, fig. 8-7). (4) | Press the fine null switch S1 (3, fig. 8-7), and simultaneously rotate the synchro adjust knob clockwise or counterclockwise until a fine null is obtained. Release the fine null switch. (5) | Release the synchro adjust knob, and assure that the null indication remains on nulling meter M1. h Inform IPCP personnel that antenna synchro nulling has been completed. é If a false null is reported from the IPCP personnel, repeat steps g(2) through (6) and h. i. When directed by the IPCP personnel to energize the antenna: (1) | Record the antenna azimuth position as indicated on the azimuth mil ring. (2) | Release the elevation brake. (8) | Insure that all personnel are clear of the IHIPIR antenna, (4) | Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to ON. (5) | Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to OPERATE, and then to SAFE after the antenna stabilizes. The azimuth of the antenna is the same as that recorded in step (1) above, + 4 mils, k When directed by the IPCP personnel, set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to LOCAL. 3 Antenna Alinement Verification. a When directed by the IPCP personnel, condition the radar for remote operation, set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE, and set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to OFF. b Position the antenna to 800 (or 4000) mils azimuth. 4 Alinement with the ILCHR. ‘When directed by the IPCP personnel, perform the procedures in table 8-1, step 5. 0-23TM 9—1430—533—12—1 10 024 Table 8-5. IAFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure Without the ICWAR Normal ndteton Corrective procedure NOTE ‘The following procedures are coordinated from the IPCP. Preparation for Alinement. Observe that the BCC R BUS lamp (18, fig. 2-2) on the main fuse panel is illuminated. Do not perform the alinement if the lamp is extinguished. Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) is set to SAFE. Insure that the LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) is set to LOCAL. Insure that the IHIPIR is in a false radiate condition, with the master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker (21, fig. 2-6) and the power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-6) set to OFF. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (18, fig. 2-2) to OFF. ‘Remove the M90F alinement telescope from the storage box (6, fig. 1-5) and install it on the IHIPIR antenna (fig. 8-5). Insure that the IHIPIR is level (refer to par. 7-5 b(12)). Alinement with the IFF Antenna. If line of sight exists between the IHIPIR and IFF, proceed directly to step d below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the IHIPIR with the IFF, the reference point must be located at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the IFF and the IHIPIR. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the IFF and the IHIPIR. NOTE Im high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. ‘When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: Frontsight the IHIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR alinement tele- scope is centered on the M2 aiming tircle telescope. Set the elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) as required. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth ‘mil ring to the azimuth determined at the M2 aiming circle. ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Rotate the HHIPIR antenna clockwise to the azimuth of the IFF antenna, Proceed to step g. When directed by the IFF personnel, frontsight the IHIPIR antenna on the backsighted IFF antenna until the vertical crosshair of the IHIPIR telescope is centered on the IFF telescope. Set the elevation brake (8, fig. 2-14) as required.cle ™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-5. IAFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure Without the ICWAR—Continued Operation ermal indication Corrective procedure oe de, Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil qa) (2) (3) (4) (5) qa) (2) (8) (4) (5) ring to the same azimuth as the IFF. ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. When directed by the IPCP perform the following antenna synchro nulling procedure. Set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to REMOTE. Insure that the IHIPIR alinement telescope is still centered on the IFF alinement telescope or positioned at the same azimuth as the IFF antenna. At the IHIPIR pedestal, push the synchro adjust knob (2, fig. 8-7) down and slowly rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise until a null is obtained on nulling meter M1 (4, fig. 8-7). Press the fine null switch $1 (8, fig. 8-7), and simultaneously rotate the synchro adjust knob clockwise or counterclockwise until a fine null is obtained. Release the fine null switch. Release the synchro adjust knob, and assure that the null indication remains on nulling meter M1. Inform IPCP personnel that antenna synchro nulling has been completed. Ifa false null is reported from the IBCC personnel, repeat steps g (2) through g (5) and h. When directed by the IPCP personnel to energize the antenna: indicated on the azimuth mil ring. Record the antenna azimuth position Release the elevation brake. Insure that all personnel are clear of the IHIPIR antenna. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (18, fig. 2-2) to ON. Set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to OPERATE, and then to SAFE after the antenna stabilizes. ‘The azimuth of the antenna is the same as that recorded in step (1) above, + 4 mils. When directed by the IPCP personnel, set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to LOCAL. Antenna Alinement Verification. When directed by the IPCP personnel, condition the radar for remote operation, set the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH to SAFE, and the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker toOFF. Position the antenna to 800 (or 4000) mils azimuth. Alinement with the ILCHR. Perform the procedures in table 8-1, step 2.98TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Section Il. 8-19. Purpose a, Accurate target firing data and successful target engagement depends on the orientation and alinement of the major items in the HAWK battery. The HIPIR has a critical role in this process because it serves as the primary system alinement reference or basepiece. Once emplaced, HIPIR A is established as the basepiece by orienting it to a known reference point (KRP). If the proper procedures are not carefully followed, misleading target information will be processed by the battery, and effective target engagement will be degraded. b. Normally, the battery is oriented so that accurate presentations of north, east, south, and west coordinates are shown on its cathode-ray tubes (CRTs). However, the orientation to true north is only necessary for the tactical control officer or his assistant to accurately correlate data from an over- lay map of the defended area, or to utilize tactical information from an Army air defense command post (AADCP). When it is not necessary to correlate data from an overlay map or to utilize information from an AADCP, any available landmark may be used as a reference point for orienting the battery. 8-20. Methods of Orienting and Alining the HIPIR’s a. HIPIR A. Since HIPIR A is the primary system basepiece, only one alinement method is re- quired, i.e., antenna alinement with the KRP, using the M90F alinement telescope. The antenna azimuth mil ring is subsequently set to the azimuth of the KRP (as determined by the M2 aiming circle when the site is initially surveyed) to provide a true north orientation, or to 0 mils to provide orientation directly to the KRP. Once oriented, HIPIR A directed by the BCC personnel to aline one radar in the acquisition section. Selection of the radar to be alined is dependent on system configuration as determined and directed by the BCC personnel. Procedures for all situations are contained in table 8-6. Alternate non-line-of-sight procedures are also included with each step. Extreme care must be exercised during this alinement procedure to mini: mize cumulative alinement errors since this acquis tion radar will become the basepiece for the remait der of the system. This allows HIPIR A to proceed with LCHR and ROR alinement, thereby minimizing the time required to establish an operational fire section. 8-26 ou HAWK BATTERY (BCC AN/TSW-11) ’. HIPIR B. The HIPIR B alinement method is dependent upon system configuration. Generally, the CWAR provides HIPIR B with alinement refer- ence. This is accomplished by telescopically alining the HIPIR B and CWAR antennas, and by setting the HIPIR B azimuth mil ring to coincide with the CWAR azimuth mil ring. In the absence of the CWAR, the PAR provides alinement reference. If both the CWAR and PAR are unavailable, HIPIR B is alined with the IFF antenna. Alinement proce- dures for all situations are contained in table 8-6, The BCC personnel determine the appropriate aline- ment procedure and direct the HIPIR B personnel accordingly. Alternate non-line-of-sight procedures are also included with each step. When oriented, HIPIR B proceeds to aline its associated LCHR’s and the ROR. 8-21. Sequence of HAWK Battery Alinement Operations The orientation and alinement of the HIPIR’s in the battery is controlled from the BCC. The BCC personnel initiate, monitor, and coordinate the alinement operations of all major items in the battery. Figure 8-10 illustrates the sequence in which the alinement operations of a typical PIP battery are performed. The unshaded areas indicate the operations performed at the HIPIR as it is alined in the battery and the shaded areas indicate the ongoing alinement operations being performed at the other major items of the battery. 8-22. M2 Aiming Circle The M2 aiming circle (Fig. 8-2) is a small, light- weight instrument that is used in the battery for calculating the KRP azimuth bearing and other reference azimuth angles when any of the non-line- of-sight alinement procedures contained in table 8-6 are used. Refer to paragraph 8-4 for a complete description of the M2 aiming circle. 8-23. Orientation and Alinement During Black- out Conditions During blackout conditions, any of the methods discussed in paragraph 8-20 above may be employed with the assistance of an M42 or M53-E1 instrument light as described in paragraph 8-5.T 9—1430—533—12—1 "WRIA TEM OPERATIONS. x r. ace PAR FF (CC) CWAR WIPIR ALB RoR oR PREPRRRTON| ] ‘ST pastRUCTION curours. ALINE "i ¥ ser mews MIL RING TO Mee AZIMUTH iP FRONTSIGHT ON BacusiGHT oN FRONT $5 mua ner Fon TEST ROTATE v ae ok, SM us wom ieremten Fae w wee ae, if BACKSIGHT SONTSIGHT ‘s) aan, erecta spare wae Breescope TELESCOPE: TELESCOPE "BY ON CWAR wroteaee fi Ev nce ‘SET'B” AZIMUTH anew i aD ane . ¥ moa. Srncino ee ¥ urea us ise: norman ee nares Beavoue SURST Es: Head Ser acon NULL “B" ANTENNA i mu | weir azmuTH REPEATBAG ‘APPEARS. ATO ce ans One's a 4 MS 432455 Figure 8-10. Sequence of HAWK battery alinement operations (BCC AN/TSW-11)-typical (sheet 1 of 3). 8-271 9—1430—533—12—1 ean rare a heme SORT eee) eetien $n cine PERE Sra sins dare Fina oko Bea pia aes 7 aan mens Ege Baas cwaR ee srg y rena seers, So ae sea Bareonn Pe ¥ ora mal Ruse Shai een ae, eas eee ome & : e ues Bao 3 mit ON Tec) ae BY | ake moween sacXi goer | gaaNem 2B hogs Ske een ee | eee ana hike Fiore wane arrears ma i aaa . Gory wero mies eat wy Seem EBA ron ae ert gueetopans SRE pare ne rae “atid WHEN ENERGIZED 2 DEENERGIZE ANTENNA wg enc peace pac See tea 8-28 MS 432456 Figure 8-10. Sequence of HAWK battery alinement operations (BCC AN/TSW-11)-typical (sheet 2 of 3).T™ 9—1430—$33—12—1 WAIOR WEN OPERATIONS L Bee PAR Fe (lee) ‘cwaR WIPIR ROR. SELECT NORMAL ENERGIZE ENERGIZE Stan Noor.” ANTENNA ANTENNA COMMAND PAR RADIATE ANTENNA, ANTENNA ROTATES ROTATES IN SYNCHRONISM WITH PAR ANTENNA MS 432457 Figure 8-10. Sequence of HAWK battery alinement operations (BCC AN/TSW-11)-typical (sheet 3 of 3). 824. Preliminary Procedures Before orientation and alinement of the HIPIR can be attempted, steps a through c below must be accomplished. a. Emplace the HIPIR as described in chapter 7. 8. Energize the power generators in accordance with the instructions posted on the inside of the generator panel, and set the output of the generators for 425 vae. c. Establish interunit communic BCC. tions with the £25, Synchro Control System Detailed functional schematics of the synchro control system for the HAWK battery are contained in TM 9—1425—1525—12—2, together with synchro alinement procedures for each major item. 8-26. HIPIR-LCHR Azimuth Alinement The azimuth alinement verification procedure is performed, under the direction of the LCHR personnel, after the HIPIR and LCHR have been alined to insure that the LCHR arms are parallel to the HIPIR line of sight. This parallel condition is necessary for the missile to lock on target. Refer to paragraph 8-8 for a brief description of this procedure. 8-27. System Orientation and Alinement Procedures Perform the procedures in table 8-6, as directed by the BCC personnel, to orient and aline the HIPIR's and the other system radars, Due to system configu- ration variations some steps do not apply in all situations. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the HIPIR azimuth mil ring, refer to section V. 8-29TM 9—1430—533—12—1 a7 ss Sek step Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11) Operation os Normal iniins corrective procdare NOTE ‘The following procedures are coordinated from the BCC. Perform only those steps you are directed to perform. Preparation. Observe that the BCC R BUS lamp (18, fig. 2-2) on the main fuse panel is illuminated. Do not perform the alinement if the lamp is extinguished. Insure that the LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) is set to LOCAL. Insure that the HIPIR is in a false radiate condition, with the master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker (21, fig. 2-6) and the power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-6) set to OFF. Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) is set to SAFE. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) to OFF. Remove the M90F alinement telescope from the storage box (5, fig. 1-5) and install it on the HIPIR antenna (fig. 8-5). Insure that the HIPIR is level (refer to par. 7-5b (12). SS Orient the HIPIR A Antenna. Manually rotate the antenna until the vertical crosshair of the alinement telescope is centered on the known reference point (KRP). Secure the antenna in place with the azimuth stow lock. NOTE Engaging the azimuth stow lock while one of the antenna locking holes is portioned near the stow lock pin (ie, while the antenna is pointing curbside or over the radar set group) may cause the stow lock pin to engage the lock hole and rotate the antenna slightly. If this situation is encountered, hold the antenna in place manually rather than securing it with the azimuth stow lock. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6). Rotate the azimuth mil ring until the vernier (3, fig. 8-6) indicates the azimuth bearing of the KRP. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the HIPIR azimuth mil ring, refer to section V. ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Disengage the azimuth stow lock. Report completion of HIPIR A antenna orientation to the BCC personnel and proceed as directed.7 TM 9—1430—533—12—-1 Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued Operation Sad Nermaentee cerca retry Aline the CWAR Antenna with HIPIR A. a If line of sight exists between the HIPIR and the CWAR, proceed directly to step [ below; if not, perform steps b through k below. Also, refer to the note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the CWAR with the HIPIR, the reference poi ‘must be loeated at a distance of at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and the CWAR. The M2 aiming cirele must be visible to both the HIPIR and the CWAR. b Emplace the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) and level using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, fig. 8-2). © Adjust the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) until the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicates 0 mils. a Manually frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. e Secure the HIPIR antenna from moving in azimuth with the stow lock. £ Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. a Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper scale (11, fig. 8-2) indicates the approximate azimuth as recorded in step f above. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. h Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale and azimuth micrometer indicate the azimuth as recorded in step f above. i Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orientation knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. é Direct the CWAR personnel to frontsight the CWAR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle, and simultaneously sight the M2 aiming circle on the CWAR antenna, using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. k Observe and record the M2 aiming circle azimuth indication and proceed to step n. Direct the CWAR personnel to backsight the CWAR antenna, and then simultaneous! frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the CWAR alinement telescope. Secure the HIPIR antenna in place with the azimuth stow lock. m Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. n Direct the CWAR personnel to adjust the CWAR azimuth mil ring to indicate this azimuth while insuring that the CWAR antenna does not move. 0 Inform the BCC that the CWAR antenna is oriented. Disengage the azimuth stow lock. Proceed to step 9. eeeT™ 9—1430—533—12—1 roy Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued Aline the PAR Antenna with HIPIR A. If line of sight exists between the HIPIR and the PAR, proceed directly to step ! below; if not perform steps 6 through k below. Also, refer to the note below. NOTE When the alternate method is being used to aline the PAR with the HIPIR, the reference point used must bbe located at a distance of at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and the PAR. The M2 aiming cirele must be visible to both the HIPIR and the PAR. Emplace the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) and level using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, fig. 8-2). Adjust the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) until the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicates 0 mils. Manually frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Secure the HIPIR antenna from moving in azimuth with the stow lock. Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. Unlock (fast motion) and azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper seale (11, fig. 8-2) indicates the approximate azimuth as recorded in step f above. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale and azimuth micrometer indicate the azimuth as recorded in step f above. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth non-recording orientating knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. Direct the PAR personnel to frontsight the PAR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle, and simultaneously sight the M2 aiming circle on the PAR antenna, using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. Observe and record the M2 aiming circle azimuth indication and proceed to step n. Direct the PAR personnel to backsight the PAR antenna, and then simultaneously frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the PAR alinement telescope. Secure the HIPIR antenna in place with the azimuth stow lock. Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. Direct the PAR personnel to adjust the PAR azimuth mil ring to indicate this azimuth while insuring that the PAR antenna does not move. Inform the BCC personnel that the PAR antenna is oriented. Disengage the azimuth stow lock. Proceed to step 9. Aline the IFF Antenna with HIPIR A. If line of sight exists between the HIPIR and the IFF, proceed directly to step J below; if not, perform steps b through k below, Also, refer to the note below.a7 TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued Neral inden Corrective procedare 5a. NOTE Cont. ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the IFF with the HIPIR, the reference point used must be located at a distance of at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and the IFF. The M2 aiming circle must, be visible to both the HIPIR and the IFF. & Emplace the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) and level using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, @ Adjust the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) until the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicates 0 mils. a Manually frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. @ Secure the HIPIR antenna from moving in azimuth with the stow lock. f Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. a Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper scale (11, fig. 8-2) indicates the approximate azimuth as recorded in step f above. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. A Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale and azimuth micrometer indicate the azimuth as recorded in step f above. i Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the orienting and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. i Direct the ICC personnel to frontsight the IFF alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle, and simultaneously sight the M2 aiming circle on the IFF antenna alinement telescope, using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. k Observe and record the M2 aiming circle azimuth indication and proceed to step ”. t Direct the ICC personnel to backsight the IFF antenna, and then simultaneously frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the IFF alinement telescope. Secure the HIPIR antenna in place with the azimuth stow lock. imuth non-recording n Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. 2 Direct the ICC personnel to adjust the IFF azimuth mil ring to indicate this azimuth while insuring that the IFF antenna does not move. ° Inform the BCC personnel that IFF antenna orientation is complete. B Disengage the azimuth stow lock. © Proceed to step 9. 6 Aline HIPIR B with the CWAR Antenna. « IE line of sight exists between the HIPIR and CWAR, proceed directly to step d below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to note below.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 cw Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued Operation 6a. NOTE Cont. ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the HIPIR with the CWAR, the reference point used ‘must be located at least 805 m (1000 ft) from the CWAR and the HIPIR. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the CWAR and the HIPIR. NOTE In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. b ‘When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: a) Frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Set the elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) as required. (2) | Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth determined at the M2 aiming circle. Insure that the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR remains centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. (3) | Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Proceed to step g. When directed by the CWAR personnel, frontsight the HIPIR antenna on the backsighted CWAR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR telescope is centered on the CWAR telescope. Set the elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) as required. e Loosen the two screws that secure the imuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the same azimuth as the CWAR. Insure that the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope remains centered on the CWAR alinement telescope. RS f ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. a Inform the BCC personnel that HIPIR B orientation is complete. h Proceed to step 9. 1 Aline HIPIR B with the PAR Antenna. a If line of sight exists between the HIPIR and PAR, proceed to step d below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step 6 for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the HIPIR with the PAR, the reference point used must be located at least 805 m (1000 ft) from the PAR and the HIPIR. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the PAR and the HIPIR. NOTE In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. 6 When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: 8-34cv Sup 7b, Cont. q@) (2) (3) res TM 91430533121 Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued Operation Corrective procedure Frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Set the elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) as required. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth determined at the M2 aiming circle. Insure that the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope remains centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Proceed to step g. When directed by the PAR personnel, frontsight the HIPIR antenna on the backsighted PAR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR telescope is centered on the PAR telescope. Set the elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) as required. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the mil ring to the same azimuth as the PAR. Insure that the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope remains centered on the PAR alinement telescope. ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Inform the BCC personnel that HIPIR B orientation is complete. Proceed to step 9. a) (2) (3) Aline HIPIR B with the IFF Antenna. If line of sight exists between the HIPIR and IFF, proceed directly to step d below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step b for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to note below. NOTE When the alternate method is being used to aline the HIPIR with the IFF, the reference point used must be located at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the IFF and the HIPIR. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and must be visible to both the IFF and the HIPIR. In high wind, the antenna has to be held in place manually. When directed by the M2 aiming circle personnel: Frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Set the elevation break (8, fig. 2-14) as required. ‘Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the azimuth determined at the M2 aiming circle. Insure that the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope remains centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Proceed to step g. ‘When directed by the IFF personnel, frontsight the HIPIR antenna on the backsighted IFF antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR telescope is centered on the IFF telescope. Set the elevation brake (3, fig. 2-14) as required. 8-35™ 9—1430—533—12-1 cv Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued Operation Corrective procedare Be. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6) and set the azimuth mil ring to the same azimuth as the IFF. Insure that the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope remains centered on the IFF alinement telescope. f Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. 0 Inform the BCC personnel that HIPIR B orientation is complete and proceed. 9 Null the HIPIR Antenna Synchro. @ Manually rotate the HIPIR antenna until the azimuth mil ring indicates 0 mils, and engage the azimuth stow lock. b Set the azimuth handwheel (18, fig. 2-1) on the control-indicator panel to 0 mils. @ At the HIPIR pedestal, push the synchro adjust knob (2, fig. 8-7) down and slowly rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise until a null is obtained on nulling meter Ml (4, fig. 8-7). a Press the fine null switch Si (3, fig. 8-7), and simultaneously rotate the synchro adjust knob clockwise or counterclockwise until a fine null is obtained. Release the fine null switch. e Release the synchro adjust knob, and assure that the null indication remains on nulling meter M1. f Inform the BCC personnel that antenna synchro nulling has been completed. 0 If a false null is reported from the BCC, repeat steps c through f. If not, proceed. h Disengage the azimuth stow lock, and proceed to step 10. 10. Alinement with the LCHR. a Position the HIPIR antenna to 0 mils elevation and engage the elevation STOW lock handwheel (10, fig. 2-14). WARNING } Do not set the minimum elevation control to less than 190 mils in step b below. b Set the minimum elevation control (2, fig. 8-8) of the minimum elevation stowed synchro (1, fig. 8-8) to 40 mils above the highest fire interrupter setting of any LCHR of that firing section. « If a line-of-sight exists between the HIPIR and LCHR, proceed directly to step q below. If line-of-sight does not exist, proceed to step d for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle (ig. 8-2). Also refer to the note below. NOTE ‘When performing the alternate alinement procedures, the reference point should be located at least 306 ‘m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and LCHR. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this point and must be visible to both the HIPIR and the LCHR. a If line-of-sight does not exist, emplace the M2 aiming circle and level it using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, fig. 8-2). a67 10¢, re (1) (2) (3) “ a (2) (3) ) TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued Operation Corrective procedare When the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Direct the LCHR personnel to sight the LCHR alinement telescope until the vertical crosshair of the telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Prevent the HIPIR antenna from moving in azimuth. Record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. Adjust the M2 aiming circle azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) until the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicates 0 mils. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper scale indicates approximately 3200 mils. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale indicates 3200 mils. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the ‘M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. Sight the M2 aiming circle on the LCHR alinement telescope using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. Direct the LCHR personnel to simultaneously sight the LCHR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle telescope and then record the azimuth angle determined at the M2 aiming circle, and the angle indicated at the LCHR alinement telescope. Calculate and adjust for proper azimuth angle by subtracting the M2 aiming circle azimuth from the LCHR alinement telescope azimuth. However, if the LCHR alinement telescope imuth is less than the M2 aiming circle azimuth, add 6400 mils and then subtract the M2 aiming circle azimuth. Direct the LCHR personnel to rotate the LCHR alinement telescope to the azimuth value calculated above, and then lock it in position. Proceed to step r. Uf line-of-sight exists, proceed as follows: Frontsight the HIPIR until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope (1, fig. 8-5) is centered on the LCHR alinement telescope. Direct the LCHR personnel to sight the LCHR alinement telescope on the HIPIR until the vertical crosshair is centered on the HIPIR alinement telescope. Lock the LCHR alinement telescope in position by tightening the azimuth lock. Record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. Direct the LCHR personnel to perform the following alinement procedures and await instructions from them concerning related procedures to be performed at the HIPIR. LCHR adjustments. LCHR servo check. Alinement verification. Launcher orientation. Repeat steps c through r for the remaining LCHR’s. Inform the BCC personnel that the LCHR alinement procedures have been completed. Set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to LOCAL, and proceed to step 11.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 7 Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued Operation season ‘na Corrective procedare Alinement with the ROR Antenna, NOTE HIPIR A must be alined to the ROR before HIPIR B during ROR alinement. If HIPIR A is not available, aline HIPIR B using the procedure for HIPIR A. Make certain that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH is set to SAFE and that the LOCAL-REMOTE switch is set to LOCAL. Manually position the HIPIR antenna to 0 mils elevation and set the elevation brake. If line of sight exists between the HIPIR’s and ROR, proceed to step m below. If line of sight does not exist, proceed to step d. Also refer to the note below. NOTE If line of aight does not exist between the HIPIR’s and the ROR, a new reference point must be established. This reference point must be located at least 306 m (1000 ft) from the ROR and the HIPIR being alined, and may be different for each HIPIR. The M2 aiming circle must be located at this reference point and be visible to the ROR and the HIPIR. Emplace the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) and level using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, fig. 8-2). When the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle. Set the elevation brake as required. Obtain the azimuth reading from the HIPIR azimuth mil ring and if it is less than 3200 mils, add 3200 mils. If the HIPIR azimuth is more than 3200 mils, subtract 3200 mils. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper scale (11, fig. 8-2) indicates the approximate azimuth 38 determined in step f above. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale and the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicate the azimuth determined in step f above. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth nonrecording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth nonrecording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. Direct the ROR personnel to backsight the ROR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle, and simultaneously sight the M2 aiming circle on the ROR antenna using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. If the ROR is being alined with HIPIR A, direct the ROR personnel to: Loosen the screws that secure the ROR azimuth mil ring and set the ROR azimuth mil ring to indicate the upper seale azimuth of the M2 aiming circle. ‘Tighten the screws that secure the ROR azimuth mil ring. Proceed to step 0.cz TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-6. HAWK Battery Orientation and Alinement Procedure (BCC AN/TSW-11)—Continued lim, Direct the ROR personnel to backsight the ROR telescope on the HIPIR antenna, and then simultaneously frontsight the HIPIR telescope on the ROR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the ROR alinement telescope. NOTE If the ROR alinement telescope is not in the HIPIR alinement telescope field of view, release the elevation brake and rotate the HIPIR antenna to bring the ROR alinement telescope into view. Then set the ‘elevation brake. If the ROR is being alined with HIPIR A, direct the ROR personnel to: Loosen the screws that secure the ROR azimuth mil ring and set the ROR azimuth mil ring to indicate the same azimuth as the HIPIR antenna azimuth mil ring. Tighten the screws that secure the ROR azimuth mil ring. Make certain that the HIPIR antenna remains sighted on the M2 aiming circle or on the ROR antenna while the ROR personnel continue with the alinement procedures. Inform the BCC personnel when the alinement procedures have been completed. (3) (4) a) (2) (3) a) (2) Determining the Tactical Antenna Elevation Angle. When the BCC personnel request the tactical elevation angle: Look through the HIPIR alinement telescope and manually scan the entire sector of interest azimuth. Set the elevation brake as required so the horizontal crosshair of the alinement telescope coincides with the lowest point of the horizon within sector. Report this elevation (in mils) to the BCC personnel as the tactical elevation angle. Release the elevation brake. When directed to energize the antenna: Clear the antenna area. Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to OPERATE. Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) to ON. When directed to deenergize the antenna: Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to OFF. Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE. Remove and stow the M90F alinement telescope.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 cv Section IV. AFU (PCP AN/MSW-13, -14) 8-28. Purpose a, Accurate target firing data and successful target engagement depend on the orientation and alinement of the major items in the assault firing unit (AFU). Alinement of the HIPIR in the AFU is accomplished by orienting it to the known reference point (KRP). If the proper procedures are not carefully followed, misleading target information will be processed by the AFU, and effective target engagement will be degraded. 6. Normally, the AFU is oriented so that accurate presentations of north, east, south and west coordinates are shown on its CRT’s. However, the orientation to true north is only necessary for the tactical officer (T.0.) or his assistant to accurately correlate data from an overlay map of the defended area, or to utilize tactical information from an Army air defense command post (AADCP). When it is not necessary to correlate data from an overlay map or to utilize information from an AADCP, any available landmark may be used as a reference point for orienting the AFU. 8-29. Methods of Orienting and Alining the HIPIR The HIPIR is oriented and alined by alining the vertical crosshair of the M90F alinement telescope on the KRP. At this time, the HIPIR antenna azimuth mil ring is adjusted to indicate the azimuth of the KRP (as determined by the M2 aiming circle when the site is initially surveyed) for a true north orientation, or to 0 mils to provide orientation directly to the KRP. 8-30. Sequence of AFU Alinement Operations The alinement of the AFU is controlled from the platoon command post (PCP). The PCP personnel initiate, monitor, and coordinate the alinement operations of all of the major items in the AFU. Figure 8-11 illustrates the sequence in which the alinement operations of a typical AFU are per- formed. The unshaded areas indicate the alinement operations performed at the HIPIR as it is alined in an AFU, and the shaded areas indicate the on- going alinement operations being performed at the other major items. Table 8-7 contains the Procedures required of the HIPIR during system alinement, including alternate procedures when 8-40 line of sight to the other major items does not exist. Due to configuration variations, some steps do not apply in all situations. 8-31. M2 Aiming Circle The M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) is a small light- weight instrument that is used in the AFU for calculating the KRP azimuth bearing and other reference azimuth angles when any of the alternate non-line-of-sight alinement procedures contained in table 8-7 are used. Refer to paragraph 8-4 for a complete description of the M2 aiming circle. 8-32. Orientation and Alinement During Blackout Conditions During blackout conditions, any of the alinement methods contained in table 8-7 may be employed with the assistance of an M42 (fig. 8-3) or M53-El (fig. 8-4) instrument light as described in paragraph 85. 8-33. Preliminary Procedures Before orientation and alinement of the HIPIR can be attempted, steps a through c below must be accomplished. a. Emplace the HIPIR as described in chapter 7. b. Energize the power generators in accordance with the instructions posted on the inside of each generator panel, and set the output of the generators for 425 vae. c. Establish interunit communications with the PCP. 8-34, Synchro Control System Detailed functional schematics of the synchro control system for the AFU are contained in TM9- 1425—1525—12—5. Synchro alinement procedures for each major item are also contained therein.7 TM 9—1430—533—12—1 ALINE ON KRP ‘SET AZIMUTH MIL, Ring TO MRP. AZIMUTH FRONTSIGHT ON GWAR TELESCOPE SET AZIMUTH ro ROTATE ANTENNA ‘70,0000 fv AND ENGAGE AZIMUTH ‘Stow LOCK NULL ANTENNA SYNCHRO MS 432458 Figure 8-11. Sequence of AFU alinement operations (PCP AN/MSW-13, -14)—typical (sheet 1 of 2). . 8-4 sree GoogleTM 9—1430—533—12—1 a Siam RIOR ITEM OPERATIONS SEQUENCE PCP/IFF CcWAR HIPIR wipin7 ey Cun FF FROMTSIGHT IFE ANTENNA BACKSIGHT FRONTSIGHT oF ON CUA TELESCOPE” TF TELESCOPE LERN TeteacOreE SET AZIMUTH Mit RING TO AZIMUTH OF CWAR ¥ NULL ANTENNA SYNCHRO POSITION AZIMUTH CURSOR ‘SWEEP ON TDEC MS 432459 Figure 8-11. Sequence of AFU alinement operations (PCP AN/MSW-13, -14)—typical (sheet 2 of 2). 8-35, HIPIR-LCHR Azimuth Alinement Verifica- tion The azimuth alinement verification procedure is performed, under the direction of LCHR personnel, after the HIPIR and LCHR have been alined to insure that the LCHR arms are parallel to the HIPIR line of sight. This parallel condition is neces- sary for the missile to lock on target. Refer to paragraph 8-8 for a brief description of this proce- dure. 8-42 8-36. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedures Perform the procedures in table 8-7 to aline the HIPIR to the KRP and to aline the CWAR or IFF antenna with the HIPIR as directed by the PCP personnel. Table 8-7 contains procedures to be performed at the HIPIR and references to proce- dures to be performed at the other major items. These procedures are contained in the appropriate major item 12-1 manual. NOTE For detailed information concerning th the reading of the HIPIR azimuth mil ring, refer to section V.™ 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-7. AFU Orientation ond Alinement Procedure (PCP AN/MSW-18, -14) Operation ol Nemelintieiet —Garactiveproedore NOTE ‘The following procedures are coordinated from the PCP. Perform only those steps you are directed to perform. L Preparation. a Observe that the BCC R BUS lamp (18, fig. 2-2) on the main fuse panel is illuminated. Do not perform the alinement if the lamp is extinguished. Insure that the LOCAL-REMOTE switch (21, fig. 2-1) is set to LOCAL. Insure that the HIPIR is in a false radiate condition, with the master oscillator BEAM circuit breaker (21, fig. 2-6) and the power amplifier BEAM circuit breaker (14, fig. 2-6) set to OFF. ad Insure that the PEDESTAL SAFETY SWITCH (1, fig. 2-14) is set to SAFE. @ Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (18, fig. 2-2) to OFF. £ Remove the M90F alinement telescope from the storage box (5, fig. 1-5) and install it on the @ £ a HIPIR antenna (fig. 8-5). Insure that the HIPIR is level (refer to par. 7-56 (12). Orient and Aline the HIPIR Antem Manually rotate the antenna until the vertical crosshair of the alinement telescope is centered on the known reference point (KRP). Secure the antenna in place with the azimuth stow lock. Loosen the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring (4, fig. 8-6). Rotate the azimuth mil ring until the vernier (3, fig. 8-6) indicates the azimuth bearing of the KRP. NOTE For detailed information concerning the setting and the reading of the HIPIR azimuth mil ring, refer to section V. ‘Tighten the two screws that secure the azimuth mil ring. Disengage the azimuth stow lock. Report completion of HIPIR antenna orientation to the PCP personnel and proceed as directed. 3. Aline the CWAR Antenna. a If line of sight exists between the HIPIR and the CWAR, proceed directly to step | below; if not, perform steps 6 through k below. Also, refer to the note below. NOTE ‘When the alternate method is being used to aline the CWAR with the HIPIR, the reference point used ust be located at a distance of at least 305 m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and the CWAR. The M2 aiming circle must be visible to both the HIPIR and the CWAR.T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 av Table 8-7. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure (PCP AN/MSW-18, -14)—Continued Emplace the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) and level using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, fig. 8-2). Adjust the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) until the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) « indicates 0 mils. a Manually frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. e Secure the HIPIR antenna from moving in azimuth with the stow lock. f Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. 9 Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper scale (11, fig. 8-2) indicates the approximate azimuth as recorded in step f above. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. A Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale and azimuth micrometer indicate the azimuth as recorded in step f above. i Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the ‘M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. é Direct the CWAR personnel to frontsight the CWAR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle, and simultaneously sight the M2 aiming circle on the CWAR antenna, using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. k Observe and record the M2 aiming circle azimuth indication and proceed to step m. L Direct the CWAR personnel to backsight the CWAR antenna, and then simultaneously frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is vertically centered on the CWAR alinement telescope. Secure the HIPIR antenna in place with the azimuth stow lock. m Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. n Direct the CWAR personnel to adjust the CWAR azimuth mil ring to indicate this azimuth while insuring that the CWAR antenna does not move. 0. Inform the PCP personnel that the CWAR antenna orientation is complete. p. Disengage the azimuth stow lock. Proceed to step 5. Aline the IFF Antenna. If line of sight exists between the HIPIR and the IFF, proceed directly to step 1 below; if not, a perform steps b through k below. Also refer to the note below. NOTE Iternate method is being used to aline the IFF with the HIPIR, the reference point used mast be visible to both the HIPIR and the IFF. & Emplace the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2) and level using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8 fig. 8-2).a T™ 9—1430—533—1: Table 8-7. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure (PCP AN/MSW-19, -14)—Continued aa ermal ndetnn Corrective procedure 4c Adjust the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) until the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicates 0 mils. Manually frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Secure the HIPIR antenna from moving in azimuth with the stow lock. Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper scale (11, fig. 8-2) indicates the approximate azimuth as recorded in step f above. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. Rotate the azimuth knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale and azimuth micrometer indicate the azimuth as recorded in step f above. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. Direct the PCP personnel to frontsight the IFF alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle, and simultaneously sight the M2 aiming circle on the IFF antenna, using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. Observe and record the M2 aiming circle azimuth indication and proceed to step n. Direct the PCP personnel to backsight the IFF antenna, and then simultaneously frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is vertically centered on the IFF alinement telescope. Secure the HIPIR antenna in place with the azimuth stow lock. Observe and record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. Direct the PCP personnel to adjust the IFF azimuth mil ring to indicate this azimuth while insuring that the IFF antenna does not move. Inform the PCP personnel that IFF antenna orientation is complete. Disengage the azimuth stow lock, and proceed to step 5. Null the HIPIR Antenna Synchro. Manually rotate the HIPIR antenna until the azimuth mil ring indicates 0 mils, and engage the azimuth stow lock. Set the azimuth handwheel (18, fig. 2-1) on the controleindicator panel to 0 mils. At the HIPIR pedestal, push the synchro adjust knob (2, fig. 8-7) down and slowly rotate it clockwise or counterclockwise until a null is obtained on nulling meter Mi (4, fig. 8-7), Press the fine null switch S1 (3, fig. 8-7) and simultaneously rotate the synchro adjust knob clockwise or counterclockwise until a fine null is obtained. Release the fine null switch. Release the synchro adjust knob, and assure that the null indication remains on nulling meter ML. Inform the PCP personnel that antenna synchro nulling has been completed. If a false null is reported from the PCP, repeat steps c through f. If not, proceed. Disengage the azimuth stow lock, and proceed to step 6.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 7 8-46 Table 8-7. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure (PCP AN/MSW-19, -14)—Continued Operation Normal ndetion Corrective procedure Alinement with the LCHR. Position the HIPIR antenna to 0 mils elevation and engage the elevation STOW lock handwheel (10, fig. 2-14). Do not set the minimum elevation control to less than 190 mils in step 6 below. Set the minimum elevation control (2, fig. 8-8) of the minimum elevation stowed synchro (1, fig. 8-8) to 40 mils above the highest fire interrupter setting of any LCHR of that firing section. If a line-of-sight exists between the HIPIR and LCHR, proceed directly to step q below. If a line-of-sight does not exist, proceed to step d for alternate alinement procedures using the M2 aiming circle (fig. 8-2). Also refer to the note below. NOTE When performing the alternate alinement procedures, the reference point should be located at least 305, 1m (1000 ft) from the HIPIR and LCHR. The M2 aiming cirele must be located at this point and must be visible to both the HIPIR and the LCHR. Uf line-of-sight does not exist, emplace the M2 aiming circle and level it using the circular and tubular levels (7 and 8, fig. 8-2). When the M2 aiming circle is emplaced, frontsight the HIPIR antenna until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Direct the LCHR personnel to sight the LCHR alinement telescope until the vertical crosshair of the telescope is centered on the M2 aiming circle telescope. Prevent the HIPIR antenna from moving in azimuth. Record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. Adjust the M2 aiming circle azimuth recording knob (19, fig. 8-2) until the azimuth micrometer (18, fig. 8-2) indicates 0 mils. Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth recording knob and rotate the M2 aiming circle until the azimuth mil ring upper seale indicates approximately 3200 mils. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth recording knob. Rotate the azimuth recording knob until the azimuth mil ring upper scale indicates 3200 mils Unlock (fast motion) the azimuth non-recording orienting knob (10, fig. 8-2) and frontsight the M2 aiming circle on the HIPIR telescope. Lock (slow motion) the azimuth non-revording orienting knob and then adjust the knob for a fine frontsight. Sight the M2 aiming circle on the LCHR alinement telescope using both the fast and slow motion of the azimuth recording knob. Direct the LCHR personnel to simultaneously sight the LCHR alinement telescope on the M2 aiming circle telescope and then record the azimuth angle determined at the M2 aiming circle, and the angle indicated at the LCHR alinement telescope. Calculate and adjust for proper azimuth angle by subtracting the M2 aiming circle azimuth from the LCHR alinement telescope azimuth. However, if the LCHR alinement telescope azimuth is less than the M2 aiming circle azimuth, add 6400 mils and then subtract the M2 aiming circle azimuth.a7 TM 9—1430—533—12—1 Table 8-7. AFU Orientation and Alinement Procedure (PCP AN/MSW-13, -14)—Continued Operation Sip Mamaia pet 60. Direct the LCHR personnel to rotate the LCHR alinement telescope to the azimuth value calculated above, and then lock it in position. BR Proceed to step 7. « If line-of-sight exists, proceed as follows: qa) Frontsight the HIPIR until the vertical crosshair of the HIPIR alinement telescope (1, fig. 8-5) is centered on the LCHR alinement telescope. (2) | Direct the LCHR personnel to sight the LCHR alinement telescope on the HIPIR until the vertical crosshair is centered on the HIPIR alinement telescope. (3) | Lock the LCHR alinement telescope in position by tightening the azimuth lock. (4) Record the HIPIR azimuth mil ring indication. rn Direct the LCHR personnel to perform the following alinement procedures and await instruction from them concerning related procedures to be performed at the HIPIR. (1) | LCHR adjustments. (2) LCHR servo check. (3) | Alinement verification. (4) Launcher orientation. & Repeat steps c through r for the remaining LCHR’s. t Inform the PCP personnel that the LCHR alinement procedures have been completed. u Set the LOCAL-REMOTE switch to LOCAL, and proceed to step 7. Determining the Tactical Antenna Elevation Angle. a When the PCP personnel request the tactical elevation angle: qa) Look through the HIPIR alinement telescope and manually scan the entire sector of interest azimuth, (2) | Set the elevation brake as required so the horizontal crosshair of the alinement telescope coincides with the lowest point of the horizon within sector. (3) Report this elevation (in mils) to the PCP personnel as the tactical elevation angle. (4) | Release the elevation brake. b When directed to energize the antenna: (1) | Clear the antenna area. (2) | Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to OPERATE. (3) Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker (13, fig. 2-2) to ON. a When directed to deenergize the antenna: q@ Set the MOTOR GENERATOR circuit breaker to OFF. (2) Set the SAFE/OPERATE switch to SAFE. a Remove and stow the M90F alinement telescope. 8-47T™ 9—1430—533—12—1 ar Section V. AZIMUTH MIL RING 8-37. Introduction ‘This section explains how to read and adjust the azimuth mil ring and the vernier scale. Part A of figure 8-12 illustrates the azimuth mil ring, while part B illustrates the vernier scale. These two items provide antenna position data. The azimuth mil ring is read to provide data accurate to within 10 mils, while the vernier scale is used to provide data accurate to within one mil. The azimuth mil ring data, together with the vernier scale data, provides the antenna azimuth mil ring reading. 8-38. Description of the Azimuth Mil Ring and Vernier Scale a. Azimuth Mil Ring. When the antenna is oriented and alined, the azimuth mil ring lined up with zero (0) mark on the vernier scale can be read to obtain the HIPIR antenna azimuth position in mils. The azimuth mil ring contains 640 equally- spaced marks which divide the ring into 10-mil sections equalling 6400 mils. These marks are in two lengths, long and short. Every other long mark has number, beginning with zero (0) (3, fig. 8-12). Tu zero mark has a value of zero mils or 6400 mils ‘These numbers continue with 1 (4, fig. 8-12), whict has a value of 100 mils, and 2 (5, fig. 8-12), which ha: a value of 200 mils. This is followed by 3 (6, fig. 8-12) which has a value of 300 mils, and so on, through 6 (1, fig. 8-12), which has a value of 6300 mils, and finally to zero with a value of 6400 mils. Long unnumbered marks (2, fig. 8-12) located between two numbered marks divide the area inside the num- bered marks into two 50-mil sections. Each 50-mil section contains four equally-spaced unnumbered short marks which form five 10-mil sections. The mil ring is secured by two thumbscrews which are loosened for adjustment of the azimuth mil ring. b. Vernier Scale, The vernier scale is so mounted that it can be used to aid in reading the azimuth mil ring. The value of the mil ring is always read at a point exactly opposite the zero (0) mark (9, fig. 8-12) on the vernier scale. There are 21 long and short, marks that divide the vernier scale into 20 equal sections. The first, middle, and last marks are a f 27 3 4 {iyssfiuys Pdi Fiabe spiel 10 8 RT A - AZIMUTH MIL RING 9 8 7 rirrg 10. aa MS 432460 PART B - VERNIER SCALE 1-63 (6300 mils—tong mark) 26360 mils (long mark) 3-0 (zero mils—iong mark) 4-1 (100 mile—tong mark) 5-2 (200 mils—tong mark) 6-3 (300 mils—tong mark) 7-10 (long mark) 8-5 (long mark) 9-0 (long mark) 10-10 (long mark) Figure 8-12. Azimuth mil ring and vernier scale. 8-48a7 numbered 10, zero (0), and 10, respectively, (7, 9, and 10, fig. 8-12). The long marks between 10 and zero (0), and zero (0) and 10 (8, fig. 8-12) are not num- bered, but have a value of five. None of the short marks are numbered, but each has a value of one. Each of the twenty sections of the scale has a value of one. The vernier scale is divided into two groups. These are zero (0) to 10 going in a ew direction, and zero (0) to 10 going in a cew direction. The ew group is used to read or adjust the azimuth mil ring setting between 6400 mils and 3200 mils. The position of the vernier scale is fixed and cannot be adjusted. 8-39. How to Read the Azimuth Mil Ring Using the Vernier Scale (Fig. 8-13) The azimuth mil ring reading when used with the vernier scale indicates the antenna azimuth position in mils. The azimuth mil ring reading is always 10 0 TM 9—1430—533—12 taken opposite the zero (0) mark on the vernier scale. Part A of figure 8-13 shows the vernier scale zero mark lined up with the 100-mil mark on the azimuth mil ring. In this example, the mil ring simply reads 100 mils. Part B of figure 8-13 shows the vernier scale zero (0) mark lined up with the 6300-mil mark on the azimuth mil ring. But a simple mil ring reading is not always possible. Often, the azimuth mil ring must be read, using the vernier as shown in part C of figure 8-13. In this situation, notice that the vernier scale zero mark is not lined up with an azimuth mil ring mark. Instead, the zero mark is, somewhere between 100 mils and 110 mils and in a cw direction. This means that the reading is at least, 100 mils, but less than 110 mils. The vernier scale now must be used to indicate the number of mils between 100 and 110. This number is more than zero, but less than 10. When located, this number is added to 100 to complete the azimuth mil ring reading. This AZIMUTH MIL RING ‘VERNIER SCALE PART A100 MILS (cw) AZIMUTH MIL_RING - uu VERNIER SCALE ) PART B= 6300 MILs (cow! VERNIER SCALE PART C102 MILS (CW) VERNIER SCALE PART 0- 6395 MILS (cow) MS 432461 Figure 8-13. How to read the azimuth mil ring and vernier scale, 8-49TM 9—1430—533—=12—1 is how the vernier scale is read. Observe each mark (C, fig. 8-13) from 0 to 10 on the vernier scale in the ew-positive direction. By design, only one of these marks lines up with a mark on the azimuth mil ring. In this example, the second mark past zero (0) lines up perfectly with a mark (120 mils) on the mil ring. The value of this mark on the vernier scale is 2. This number, when added to 100, gives a total of 102 mils. ‘The azimuth mil ring reading then is 100 mils read on the azimuth mil ring, plus 2 mils read on the vernier scale. This means a total reading of 102 mils. Part D of figure 8-13 shows an azimuth mil ring reading of 6395 mils. Here the vernier scale zero (0) mark lies between 6390 and 6400 mils, In this example, the five-mil mark (cew direction) on the vernier scale lines up with the 6350-mil mark on the azimuth mil ring. The azimuth mil ring is also read in a cew direction. That is, reading starts at 6400 mils. The azimuth mil ring reading then is 6390 mils read on the azimuth mil ring plus five mils read on the vernier scale. This means a total reading of 6395 mils. 8-40. How to Set the Azimuth Mil Ring a. Introduction. There are two methods used to adjust the azimuth mil ring setting. The method selected depends on the value of the azimuth mil ting. One method is used for those azimuth mil ring setting which can be read directly on an azimuth mil ring mark. This azimuth mil ring setting is divisible by 10 and requires a single adjustment. A second method is used for those azimuth mil ring settings that lie between two marks on the azimuth mil ring. This azimuth mil ring setting is not divisible by 10 and therefore requires two adjustments. b. Azimuth Mil Ring Setting For Values Divisible By 10. A single fine adjustment is made when the value of the azimuth mil ring is divisible by 10. Assume the value of the required setting is 100 mils (A, fig. 8-18). This value is divisible by 10. One setting of the azimuth mil ring is all that is required. First, loosen the azimuth mil ring thumbscrews. Next, rotate the azimuth mil ring ew until the zero (0) mark on the vernier scale is exactly opposite the 100-mil m: Tighten the thumbscrews. Now the azimuth mil ring is set to 100 mils. Assume the azimuth mil ring setting is 6300 mils (B, fig. 8-13). The value is divisible by 10. Loosen the azimuth mil ring thumbscrews. Next, rotate the azimuth mil ring ecw until the vernier scale zero (0) mark is exactly opposite the azimuth mil ring 6300-mil mark. Tight- en the thumbscrews. 8-50 cv ¢. Azimuth Mil Ring Setting For Values Not Divisible by 10. Two adjustments to the azimuth mil ring are made when the azimuth mil ring setting is not divisible by 10. The first is a coarse adjust- ment. This is followed by a fine adjustment. Both adjustments are made to the azimuth mil ring. (1) Azimuth mil ring 102-mil cw coarse adjust- ‘ment. The coarse adjustment adjusts the azimuth mil ring to within 10 mils of the azimuth mil ring setting. Assume the value of the desired azimuth mil ring setting is 102 mils (A, fig. 8-14). This value is not divisible by 10. Notice that 102 mils on the azimuth mil ring is located ew somewhere between the 100-mil and 110-mil marks. The lower value mark (100 mils) is called the coarse adjustment mark, Before any adjustments can be made, loosen the azimuth mil ring thumbserews. Next, line up the 100-mil coarse adjustment mark exactly opposite the VERWIER SCALE PART A, 102 MIL CW COARSE ADJUSTMENT VERNER SCALE PART B, 6398 MILS CCW COARSE ADAUSTMENT MS 432462 Figure 8-14, Azimuth mil ring coarse adjustment,1e17 ivernier scale zero (0) mark. This completes the coarse adjustment. This setting also provides data yneeded to make the fine adjustment to the azimuth mil ring. (2) Azimuth mil ring 102-mil cw fine adjust- ment. The fine adjustment to the azimuth mil ring is made by lining up the fine adjustment mark on the azimuth mil ring exactly opposite the fine adjust- ment mark on the vernier scale. These fine adjust- ‘ment marks must be located and identified. (a) Vernier scale fine adjustment mark. The vernier scale fine adjustment mark is found by subtracting the value of the coarse adjustment mark from the value of the azimuth mil ring setting. Assume an azimuth mil ring setting of 102 mils results in: 102 — 100 = 2. The vernier scale fine adjustment mark equals 2 mils and is located ew at the vernier seale second short mark past zero (0) (A, fig. 8-14). () Azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark, The azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark of 120 mils (A, fig. 8-14) is located directly above and slightly to the right of the vernier scale fine adjustment mark. Note and identify this mark which is 120 mils on the azimuth mil ring. The fine adjustment is now made by lining up the azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark exactly opposite the vernier scale fine adjustment mark (A, fig. 8-15). When this adjustment has been completed, tighten the azimuth mil ring thumbscrews. This completes the azimuth mil ring setting of 102 mils. (3) Azimuth mil ring 6395-mil cow coarse ad- justment. The coarse adjustment adjusts the azi- muth mil ring to within 10 mils of the azimuth mil ting setting. Assume the value of the desired azi- muth mil ring setting is 6395 mils. This value is not divisible by 10. Notice that 6395 mils on the azimuth mil ring is located cew somewhere between the 6390 and 6400-mil marks (B, Fig. 8-14). The lower value mark (6390 mils) is called the coarse adjustment mark. Before any adjustments can be made, loosen the azimuth mil ring thumbscrews. Next line up the 6390-mil coarse adjustment mark exactly opposite the vernier scale zero (0) mark. This completes the coarse adjustment. This setting also provides data needed to make the fine adjustment to the azimuth mil ring. (4) Azimuth mil ring 6895-mil ccw fine adjust- ment, The fine adjustment to the azimuth mil ring is made by lining up the fine adjustment mark on the azimuth mil ring exactly opposite the fine adjust- ment mark on the vernier scale. These fine adjust- ments must be located and identified. TM 9—1430—$33—12—1 (a) Vernier scale fine adjustment mark, The vernier scale fine adjustment mark is found by subtracting the value of the coarse adjustment mark from the value of the desired azimuth mil ring setting. Assume an azimuth mil ring setting of 6395 mils results in: 6395 — 6390 = 5. The vernier seale fine adjustment mark equals 5 mils and is located ecw at the vernier scale 5-mil mark (B, fig. 8-14). (o) Azimuth mil ring 6395-mil cew fine adjust- ‘ment mark, The azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark of 6350 mils (B, fig. 8-14) is located directly above and slightly to the right of the vernier scale fine adjustment mark. Note and identify this mark on the azimuth mil ring. The fine adjustment is now made by lining up the azimuth mil ring fine adjustment mark exactly opposite the vernier scale fine adjustment mark (B, fig. 8-15). When this adjustment has been completed, tighten the azimuth mil ring thumbscrews. This completes the azimuth mil ring setting of 6395 mils. Fine ‘ADJUSTMENT hs AZMUTH MIL_RING VERMIER SCALE PART A, 102 MIL CW FINE ADJUSTMENT AZIMUTH MIL. RING ‘VERNIER SCALE PART B. 6395 MILS COW FINE ADJUSTMENT Ms 432481 Figure 8-18. Azimuth mil ring fine adjustment 8-51,TM 9—1430—533—12—1 (5) Azimuth mil ring setting rules. Azimuth mil ring setting rules are listed below. (a) Obtain the azimuth mil ring setting. (b) Determine the value of the coarse adjust- ment mark. (c) Loosen the azimuth mil ring thumb- screws. (d) Adjust the azimuth mil ring to the coarse adjustment mark. 8-52 17 (e) Caleulate the value of the vernier scale fine adjustment mark. (A) Locate the azimuth mil ring fine adjust- ment mark. (g) Line up the azimuth mil ring fine adjust- ment mark exactly opposite the vernier scale fine adjustment mark. (A) Tighten the azimuth mil ring thumb- screws.ce TM 9—1430—533—12—1 CHAPTER 9 LUGHTNING PROTECTION #1. Scope « This chapter contains instructions for protect- ing the HIPIR from direct and indirect lightning strikes, Standard battery and platoon emplacement preedures require equipment grounding. However, lighting protection is also required in. areas where lie battery site is higher than the surrounding ‘erain and in areas where severe electrical storms arexperienced. 4. Individual site requirements may dictate shunges in the procedures described in this chapter. lightning protection is required whenever a tatery is expected to remain at a position for m extended period of time. Units in a highly mobile tactical situation may have to disregard oviding lightning protection. 42. lightning Red Design and Construction 4. General. The procedures contained in this ragraph are used to design, construct, and em- tlie a lightning rod for the HIPIR. Once emplaced, ‘ach lightning rod is connected to the HIPIR light- ting protection ground system. The presence of a wl-grounded lightning rod protects the HIPIR from direct lightning strikes and lightning-induced ‘urrent surges. 6. Cone of Protection. The “cone of protection” ‘toncept is used in the following procedures to protect the HIPIR. A cone of protection starts at the highest bint of a vertical shielding conductor, and extends tonically downward. The shielding conductor pro- ‘ies ightning protection for all items or structures tunpletely enclosed by the cone. The radius of the tiular base of the cone defines the ground area Motected by the vertical shielding conductor. This tadius is equal to twice the height of the vertical shielding conductor (fig. 9-1). « Design and Construction. Fabricate a light- ling protection assembly for the HIPIR in aecor- tance with figure 9-2. Refer to table 9-1 for a list of naterials required. 9-3. Lightning Red Emplacement Procodures The following are the detailed procedures for emplacing the vertical shielding conductor and mast assemblies fabricated according to paragraph 9-2c. Do not connect the equipment ground system to the lightning protection ground system. To do so will result in serious damage to electronic equipment in the event of a lightning strike. a. Emplace the shielding conductor mast with vertical shielding conductor 1.8 m (6 ft) from the equipment being protected. b. If the shielding conductor mast must be em- placed more.than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the equipment, inerease “he height of the mast by one-half the added distance. This keeps the equipment within the cone of protection. NOTE: THE RADIUS OF THE CONE ISEQUAL To TWICE ITS HEIGHT, >= HEIGHT OF CONE fuows, oF cone: MI 70656 Eigure 9-1. Cone af protection concept.TM 9—1430—533—12—1 BONDING CONDUCTOR 60cm (any i ‘MAST ‘SHIELDING C ONDUCTOR: 4.95m GONDUSTOR i EQUIPMENT GROUND ROD note SHIELOING THES THE MMMM ABOVE GROUND TITY CAUTION CONDUCTOR POLE HEIGHT NECESSA\ RY TO PROVIDE GROUND ROD ADEQUATE PROTECTION FOR THE RADAR. SHIELDING SHIELDING. CONDUCTOR CONDUCTOR GROUND ROD MAST MAXIMUM DISTANCE. DO NOT CONNECT THE EQUIPMENT GROUND ROD TO THE SHIELDING. (CONDUCTOR GROUND ROD. EQUIPMENT GROUND ROD: MS 164719A Figure 9-2. HIPIR lightning protection layout — typical.7 NOTE If the equipment is located on a mound or tower, increase the height of the shielding conductor mast, by an amount equal to the height of the mound or tower. ¢. Extend the shielding conductor 60 cm (2 ft) above the top of the mast. This provides an air terminal to intercept the electrical discharge at a safe distance above vulnerable and flammable parts or structures. d. Use a 1.8 m (6 ft) length of hollowed wood molding to protect the shielding conductor from mechanical damage at ground level. e. Emplace a 1.8 m (6 ft) shielding conductor ground rod at least 1.8 m (6 ft) beyond the mast and at least 3.6 m (12 ft) from the equipment being protected. The distance between the shielding conductor ground rod and the equipment ground rod should be as large as possible. TM 9—1430—533—12—1 NOTE If bedrock prevents driving the shielding conductor ground rod 1.83 m (6 ft) deep, dig a radial trench 8.66 m long by 0.914 m deep (12 ft by 8 ft) from the base of the mast and away from the equipment being protected. Connect No. 2 copper wire to the vertical ‘shielding conduetor, and bury the wire in the trench. f. Drive the shielding conductor ground rod at least flush with the ground. If possible, drive the ground rod 30 cm (1 ft) below the soil surface. g. Refer to TM 9—1425—525—1, appendix I, for detailed instructions for measuring the resistance of the major item lightning protection ground rod or buried wire. If the measured resistance is more than 10 ohms, use the procedures contained in TM 9—1425—525—1, appendix I, to reduce the resis- tance to 10 ohms or less. A. Connect a bonding conductor of No. 2 AWG copper wire between the base of the shielding conductor and the ground rod using silver epoxy material. Bury the bonding conductor at least 60 cm (2 ft) underground. The soil above the buried wire should be compressed to increase soil contact. Table 9-1. Materials Required Pole, utility, 10-7 m (85 ft) (1 each) Rod, ground, 1.88 m X 1.59 em (6 ft 5/8 in.) (1 each) ‘Wire, copper, No. 2, 27 m (88.6 ft) Staples, 2.54 em X 0,968 em (1 in. X 8/8 in.) Molding, Ranier wood ground wire No. RGM-2, 1.88 m (6 ft) Staples, 7.62 em X 881 em (Bin. X 11/2in) 5975-00-296-0762 '5815-00-161-9862 9-3soogleTM 9—1430-533- 12-1 APPENDIX A REFERENCES Refer to TM 9-1425-525—L for a list of other publications pertinent to this material and associated yuipment.Digit‘TH 9~-1490—533— 12-1 APPENDIX B MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART 8-1. General provides a summary of the main- tenance operations covered in the equipment man- uals. It authorizes categories of maintenance for specific maintenance functions on repairable items and components, and the tools and equipment required to perform each function. This appendix may be used as an aid in planning maintenance operations. 8-2. Explanation of Format for MAC Page Group Number. The numbers in this column identify components, assemblies, and modules within the next higher assembly. b. Functional Group. This column lists the item names of component units, assemblies, subassemb- lies, and modules on which maintenance is au- thorized. ¢ Maintenance Functions. This column indicates the maintenance category at which performance of the specific maintenance function is authorized. ‘Authorization to perform a funetion at any cate- gory also includes authorization to perform that function at higher categories. Maintenance functions will be limited to and defined as follows: __(1) Inspect. To determine serviceability of an item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and aeericat characteristics with established stand- (2) Test. To verify serviceability and to detect electrical or mechanical failure by use of test equipment. (3) Service. To clean, preserve, to charge, and to add fuel, lubricants, cooling agents, and air. (4) Adjust. To rectify to the extent necessary to bring into proper operating range. (5) Aline, To adjust specified variable el- ements of an item to bring to optimum perfor- mance. (6) Calibrate. To determine the corrections to be made in the readings of instruments of test equipment used in precise measurement. Consists of the comparison of two instruments, one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy, to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared with the cer- tified standard. (1) Inatall. To set up for use in an operational environment such as an emplacement site or vehicle, (8) Replace. To replace unserviceable items with serviceable assemblies, subassemblies, or parts. (9) Repair. To restore an item to serviceable condition. This includes, but is not limited to, inspection, cleaning, preserving, adjusting, replac- ing, welding, riveting, and strengthening. (10) Overhaul. To restore an item to a com- pletely serviceable condition as prescribed by maintenance serviceability standards using the Inspect and Repair Only as Necessary (IROAN) technique. (11) Rebuild. To restore an item to a standard as nearly as possible to original or new condition in appearance, performance, and life expectancy. This is accomplished through complete disassembly of the item, inspection of all parts or components, repair or replacement of worn or unserviceable elements (items) using original manufacturing tolerances and specifications, and subsequent reas- sembly of the item. ‘The codes used represent the various maintenance categories as follows: Code Maintenance category C Operator/erew O Organizational maintenance F Direct support maintenance H_ General support maintenance D_ Depot maintenance d. Tools Required. The numbers appearing in this column refer to specific tools and equipment which are identified by these numbers in the tools required page. ¢. Remarks. The letters appearing in this column refer to ic remarks which appear on the remarks page.TM 9—-1490-533—12-1 8-3. Explanation of Format for Tools Required Pages 4. Tool Code. The numbers in this column corre- spond to the numbers used in the tool required column of the MAC. The numbers indicate the applicable tool for the maintenance function. 4. Maintenance Category. The codes in this col- umn indicate the maintenance category normally allocated the facility. ¢. Nomenclature. This column lists tools, test, and maintenance equipment required to perform the maintenance functions. 4. Tool Number. This column lists the Federal stock number.TM 9—1430-533— WAINTOUNCE ALLOCATION OAT Fon 2p sm aye us OwnT NBER nies. aa WAINTOUNCE FUNCTIONS TT Tl Py py SB PINCTIONG. GROUP 3 He ioe [nae oe e fo 2300 _[ptsrieion we e fo 2700 [vam toa ofe 2900 | ematoree any ole 120 lentes gi, ehseroate Bip e fo 1310 [eooer ute e fo re es ole 1200 [weer casrator ofe 2300 [anarsat crop OF oto suo [aviator tadar shan o fo $130 _[oumstor contro comp o fo 5335 [stg cawentor ole 5395 __[oneraortncertrese rr 208 | cowrerter sian ete ry 3290 | mttecter tacoma fe | 00 [otros opin vse fo 2350 [upitie, rerrisa vo ele Tide fospese =laile 2910 |awlitier, mew Aer o fo [Gonna [onto racecar fo 220 [Apion best Septer fo $650 [teaver Wnisor run o fe ato [omerator Hts er sere [mentor ack A oct ator tate Freeney o fo eset Hock, meiver o fo cating Seer |e A coable tector clr Y tetiater tems fe fo 1 = ao r $650 [mseer, tact Te ele A Teste, nceme ole fe fe 2° as “rete et Ct e]TH 91430533121 WAINTOUNCE ALLOCATION GHART FOR__Rader Set_As/rerg-66_ Onn ner 10182351 i ANTONE ROTIONS ] Pred bey | ys > ear Se AINCTIONN. OUP b]5le 3 [sto [priv tox steverten ofololr 1a | ntor oomrter fstewter elole 773 | mee ssendiy, Pedestal AAA 3710 [rie to, Animes ofololy [socom nt sche suet elolele 100 _| rransatecer, 1-1088 0120 __| reasonteear Panel to 2 610 _| rransntteer reset to 3 6100 | rranenitter Panel to 1 Modulator OeetiLator Mend Transuieter Nouitor o310__| natey Assendiy, 6290 | nace tisctetcal rquipene 410 | tine voteage saputator 6439 | rower Suppiy Aaey 6505 | rover supply Moduat_ At 6525 | rover supply Wadual te? 6535 __| rower supply Modal 3 6345 __| rover supply Madual nd 6300 | aupistier rodutacor osettiacor a | sania eae aa ote ei tee ae er cee frm 7 [ein cra 4750 _| rows supply Test tet 4700 _| merwore nipple SensingTm 9—1490-533-12-1 MAINTEWNCE ALLOCATION CHART FOR_sapar sxe sae o6 QWART MMBER__ 10182351 pairing racTion Be ANCTIOW. GR 5 claslilalslalil g i 3) B/8|3| 2] 3/2) 8/6/8/81 8 besa EREEEELEE Tin | owe supply clolo [elt [alos Sa Jats wa acco slelsieioteetelatels oo evecaes Set eebtelstels ice ee Be eeleeie Beet toce ros an aisle Shel ed ease eae aih elated: ee feet eee aj aee ne a eae Sietedeetebele lets eile aes eel cleletetets | ET slallets ARIAS Pee ete Slee 7330 __| rove Sep ele |e fe ofolnlo le ee sa ee Cee =r Tete | ete leeds SS ee lel Bleek

S-ar putea să vă placă și

• The Subtle Art of Not Giving a F*ck: A Counterintuitive Approach to Living a Good Life

  

  De la Everand

  The Subtle Art of Not Giving a F*ck: A Counterintuitive Approach to Living a Good Life

  Mark Manson

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (5794)
• The Gifts of Imperfection: Let Go of Who You Think You're Supposed to Be and Embrace Who You Are

  

  De la Everand

  The Gifts of Imperfection: Let Go of Who You Think You're Supposed to Be and Embrace Who You Are

  Brené Brown

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (1090)
• Never Split the Difference: Negotiating As If Your Life Depended On It

  

  De la Everand

  Never Split the Difference: Negotiating As If Your Life Depended On It

  Chris Voss

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (838)
• • Reviste
  • Podcast-uri
  • Partitură
• Principles: Life and Work

  

  De la Everand

  Principles: Life and Work

  Ray Dalio

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (599)
• The Glass Castle: A Memoir

  

  De la Everand

  The Glass Castle: A Memoir

  Jeannette Walls

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (1712)
• Hidden Figures: The American Dream and the Untold Story of the Black Women Mathematicians Who Helped Win the Space Race

  

  De la Everand

  Hidden Figures: The American Dream and the Untold Story of the Black Women Mathematicians Who Helped Win the Space Race

  Margot Lee Shetterly

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (895)
• Sing, Unburied, Sing: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  Sing, Unburied, Sing: A Novel

  Jesmyn Ward

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (1103)
• Grit: The Power of Passion and Perseverance

  

  De la Everand

  Grit: The Power of Passion and Perseverance

  Angela Duckworth

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (588)
• Shoe Dog: A Memoir by the Creator of Nike

  

  De la Everand

  Shoe Dog: A Memoir by the Creator of Nike

  Phil Knight

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (537)
• The Perks of Being a Wallflower

  

  De la Everand

  The Perks of Being a Wallflower

  Stephen Chbosky

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (2104)
• The Hard Thing About Hard Things: Building a Business When There Are No Easy Answers

  

  De la Everand

  The Hard Thing About Hard Things: Building a Business When There Are No Easy Answers

  Ben Horowitz

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (344)
• Elon Musk: Tesla, SpaceX, and the Quest for a Fantastic Future

  

  De la Everand

  Elon Musk: Tesla, SpaceX, and the Quest for a Fantastic Future

  Ashlee Vance

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (474)
• Bad Feminist: Essays

  

  De la Everand

  Bad Feminist: Essays

  Roxane Gay

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (1015)
• Her Body and Other Parties: Stories

  

  De la Everand

  Her Body and Other Parties: Stories

  Carmen Maria Machado

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (821)
• The Outsider: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  The Outsider: A Novel

  Stephen King

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (1839)
• TM 9-4940-568-10 FRS

  

  Document404 pagini

  TM 9-4940-568-10 FRS

  Advocate

  100% (3)
• The Sympathizer: A Novel (Pulitzer Prize for Fiction)

  

  De la Everand

  The Sympathizer: A Novel (Pulitzer Prize for Fiction)

  Viet Thanh Nguyen

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (121)
• The Emperor of All Maladies: A Biography of Cancer

  

  De la Everand

  The Emperor of All Maladies: A Biography of Cancer

  Siddhartha Mukherjee

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (271)
• Angela's Ashes: A Memoir

  

  De la Everand

  Angela's Ashes: A Memoir

  Frank McCourt

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (440)
• Brooklyn: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  Brooklyn: A Novel

  Colm Toibin

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (1937)
• The Little Book of Hygge: Danish Secrets to Happy Living

  

  De la Everand

  The Little Book of Hygge: Danish Secrets to Happy Living

  Meik Wiking

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (400)
• The World Is Flat 3.0: A Brief History of the Twenty-first Century

  

  De la Everand

  The World Is Flat 3.0: A Brief History of the Twenty-first Century

  Thomas L. Friedman

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (2259)
• A Man Called Ove: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  A Man Called Ove: A Novel

  Fredrik Backman

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (4609)
• The Art of Racing in the Rain: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  The Art of Racing in the Rain: A Novel

  Garth Stein

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (4200)
• A Tree Grows in Brooklyn

  

  De la Everand

  A Tree Grows in Brooklyn

  Betty Smith

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (1929)
• The Yellow House: A Memoir (2019 National Book Award Winner)

  

  De la Everand

  The Yellow House: A Memoir (2019 National Book Award Winner)

  Sarah M. Broom

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (98)
• Steve Jobs

  

  De la Everand

  Steve Jobs

  Walter Isaacson

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (806)
• Devil in the Grove: Thurgood Marshall, the Groveland Boys, and the Dawn of a New America

  

  De la Everand

  Devil in the Grove: Thurgood Marshall, the Groveland Boys, and the Dawn of a New America

  Gilbert King

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (266)
• The Woman in Cabin 10

  

  De la Everand

  The Woman in Cabin 10

  Ruth Ware

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (2322)
• Yes Please

  

  De la Everand

  Yes Please

  Amy Poehler

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (1891)
• A Heartbreaking Work Of Staggering Genius: A Memoir Based on a True Story

  

  De la Everand

  A Heartbreaking Work Of Staggering Genius: A Memoir Based on a True Story

  Dave Eggers

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (231)
• Team of Rivals: The Political Genius of Abraham Lincoln

  

  De la Everand

  Team of Rivals: The Political Genius of Abraham Lincoln

  Doris Kearns Goodwin

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (234)
• Fear: Trump in the White House

  

  De la Everand

  Fear: Trump in the White House

  Bob Woodward

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (738)
• Wolf Hall: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  Wolf Hall: A Novel

  Hilary Mantel

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (3811)
• John Adams

  

  De la Everand

  John Adams

  David McCullough

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (2409)
• On Fire: The (Burning) Case for a Green New Deal

  

  De la Everand

  On Fire: The (Burning) Case for a Green New Deal

  Naomi Klein

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (74)
• The Light Between Oceans: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  The Light Between Oceans: A Novel

  M.L. Stedman

  Evaluare: 4.5 din 5 stele

  4.5/5 (789)
• The Unwinding: An Inner History of the New America

  

  De la Everand

  The Unwinding: An Inner History of the New America

  George Packer

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (45)
• Manhattan Beach: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  Manhattan Beach: A Novel

  Jennifer Egan

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (792)
• The Constant Gardener: A Novel

  

  De la Everand

  The Constant Gardener: A Novel

  John le Carré

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (104)
• TM 11-487C-1 1965

  

  Document1.531 pagini

  TM 11-487C-1 1965

  Advocate

  100% (2)
• TM 11-2405 S-13/TM Shelter and Instruments Met.

  

  Document44 pagini

  TM 11-2405 S-13/TM Shelter and Instruments Met.

  Advocate

  100% (1)
• TM 11-5840-345-34P - Radar - System - AN - FSQ-84 - 1978 PDF

  

  Document58 pagini

  TM 11-5840-345-34P - Radar - System - AN - FSQ-84 - 1978 PDF

  Wurzel1946

  Încă nu există evaluări
• Cheat Sheet For Engines

  

  Document192 pagini

  Cheat Sheet For Engines

  Terrence Staples

  Încă nu există evaluări
• TM 11-487 October 1944

  

  Document537 pagini

  TM 11-487 October 1944

  Advocate

  100% (3)
• Kniga # 3616 and # 3617

  

  Document7 pagini

  Kniga # 3616 and # 3617

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• Rise of ISIS: A Threat We Can't Ignore

  

  De la Everand

  Rise of ISIS: A Threat We Can't Ignore

  Jay Sekulow

  Evaluare: 3.5 din 5 stele

  3.5/5 (137)
• Little Women

  

  De la Everand

  Little Women

  Louisa May Alcott

  Evaluare: 4 din 5 stele

  4/5 (104)
• TM 11 5820 535 24P

  

  Document191 pagini

  TM 11 5820 535 24P

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• TM 5-6115-304-15 1963

  

  Document73 pagini

  TM 5-6115-304-15 1963

  Advocate

  100% (1)
• 001

  

  Document1 pagină

  001

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• TM 11-5895-366-15 January 1967 Incl. C1

  

  Document144 pagini

  TM 11-5895-366-15 January 1967 Incl. C1

  Advocate

  100% (2)
• S 342/tya 27

  

  Document16 pagini

  S 342/tya 27

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 667a/trc 138B

  

  Document49 pagini

  S 667a/trc 138B

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 187C.MRR 8

  

  Document10 pagini

  S 187C.MRR 8

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 141 G

  

  Document17 pagini

  S 141 G

  Advocate

  100% (1)
• Shelter S-355/T...

  

  Document8 pagini

  Shelter S-355/T...

  Advocate

  100% (1)
• S 583/TRC 151

  

  Document8 pagini

  S 583/TRC 151

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 330a/trc 117

  

  Document13 pagini

  S 330a/trc 117

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 591/TRC 175

  

  Document11 pagini

  S 591/TRC 175

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 665.TRC 170 (V)

  

  Document25 pagini

  S 665.TRC 170 (V)

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S-805 G

  

  Document9 pagini

  S-805 G

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 615.MSC 64

  

  Document9 pagini

  S 615.MSC 64

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 711.TRC 179 (V)

  

  Document5 pagini

  S 711.TRC 179 (V)

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 734.MSC 74

  

  Document23 pagini

  S 734.MSC 74

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 70/u

  

  Document12 pagini

  S 70/u

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• S 389.msa 34

  

  Document9 pagini

  S 389.msa 34

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• TM 11-900 1942 Pe-75a and Pe-75b

  

  Document63 pagini

  TM 11-900 1942 Pe-75a and Pe-75b

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• International Harvester F 1934

  

  Document6 pagini

  International Harvester F 1934

  Advocate

  Încă nu există evaluări
• TM 5-6115-599-14P

  

  Document444 pagini

  TM 5-6115-599-14P

  Advocate

  0% (1)
• Military Railways 1916

  

  Document191 pagini

  Military Railways 1916

  Nancy Cunningham

  Încă nu există evaluări